DAVINCI RESOLVE 18

The Editor’s Guide to

DaVinci
Resolve 18

Download

DAVINCIRESOLVE 18
Free!
Author: Chris Roberts

This page intentionally left blank.

The Editor’s Guide to

DaVinci
Resolve 18

The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18
Chris Roberts© 2023 by Blackmagic Design Pty Ltd
Blackmagic Designwww.blackmagicdesign.com
To report errors, please send a note to learning@blackmagicdesign.com.
Series Editor: Patricia Montesion
Editor: Dan Foster
Contributing Authors: Arthur Ditner, Daria Fissoun, and Dion Scoppettuolo.
Cover Design: Blackmagic Design
Layout: Blackmagic Design, Danielle Foster

Notice of Rights
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher. For information
on getting permission for reprints and excerpts, contact learning@blackmagicdesign.com.
Notice of Liability
Neither the author nor Blackmagic Design shall have any liability to any person or entity for any loss or damage causedor alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book, or by omissions from this book,or by the computer software and hardware products described within it.
Trademarks
Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products are claimed as trademarks.
Where those designations appear in this book, and Blackmagic Design was aware of a trademark claim, the designations
appear as requested by the owner of the trademark. All other product names and services identified throughout
this book are used in editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies with no intention of infringementof the trademark. No such use, or the use of any trade name, is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation
with this book.
(Mac) and (macOS) are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Windows is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
ISBN 13: 979-8-9872671-2-7

Contents1

2

Forewordvii

Acknowledgments

viii

About the Authorix

Getting Startedx

Introducing Blackmagic Cloud

xiv

Building the Rough Cut

1

Setting Up a Project

2

The Edit Page

10

Assembling the Sound Bites

11

Working with the Subclips

19

Adding the Final Sound Bites

24

Adding B-Roll and Pacing the Sound Bites

31

Painting the Interview

36

Backtiming Edits

43

Adding the Music

48

Lesson Review

51

Refining the Rough Cut

53

Setting Up the Project54

Duplicating the Timeline

55

Trimming the Timeline Clips

58

Rolling Edits

63

Ripple Trimming Multiple Edit Points

64

Slide Edits

66

Replacing Clips

67

Audio Mixing

80“Ducking” the Music Levels

88

Adding the Logo

90

Adding the Closing Titles

96

Last Minute Changes

102

Full Screen Review

106Contents

iii

3

4

5

6

iv

Quick Export

108

Lesson Review

111

Fine Cutting an Interview

113

Starting the Project

114

Using the Smooth Cut Transition

117

Importing a “Selects” Timeline

119

Working Across Multiple Timelines

122

Refining the Radio Edit

128

Editing Between Timelines

132

Working with Stacked Timelines

139

Lesson Review

145

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

147

Working with Separate Takes

148

Editing for Continuity

152

Comparing Different Takes

162

Tidying Up the Audio

167

Utilizing Split Edits

169

Dynamic Trimming

173

Filling the “Dead Air”

178

Lesson Review

181

Multicamera Editing

183

Editing a Multicamera Interview

184

Switching Multicam Angles

192

Editing a Multicamera Music Video197

Real-Time Multicamera Editing

203

Adjusting the Multicamera Edit

210

Adjusting a Multicam Clip214

Lesson Review

221

Project Organization

223

Creating a New Project and Project Settings

224

Importing Media

230

Contents

7

8

Generating Proxy Files

234

Syncing Audio to Video

246

Configuring Metadata Presets

252

Importing and Using Metadata

257

Creating Subclips

281

Power Bins

290

Lesson Review

293

Edit Page Effects

295

Setting Up the Project

296

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

298

Variable Speed Changes

309

Creating Freeze Frames

318

3D Keyer FX

325

Transform FX

334

Video Collage

339

Creating Tiles with Video Collage

350

Lesson Review

361

Editing and Mixing Audio

363

Preparing the Project

364

When Should You Start Mixing?

366

Replacing Lines from Other Takes  

367

Balancing the Dialogue Clips

373

Enhancing the Scene

380

Panning Tracks in Acoustic Space  

382

Adding More Atmosphere

386

Creating a Radio Effect393

Simplifying the Mix

399

Mixing with the Mixer

407

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

408

Lesson Review

419

Contents

v

9

vi

Delivering Projects

421

Preparing the Projects

422

Reformatting a Timeline for Different Aspect Ratios

424

Reframing Shots

430

Smart Reframe (Studio Version Only)

435

Customizing Deliver Page Presets

438

Exporting AAF for Pro Tools

441

Adding Subtitles

444

Importing Subtitle Files

448

Adjusting Subtitles

450

Styling Subtitles

451

Exporting with Subtitles

455

Exporting Audio Tracks

457

Changing and Rendering Jobs from Multiple Projects

460

Media Managing Timelines

467

Lesson Review

471

Index

473

Contents

Foreword
Welcome to The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18.
DaVinci Resolve 18 is the only post-production solution that combines editing, color
correction, visual effects, motion graphics, and audio post-production all in one software
tool! Its elegant, modern interface is fast to learn for new users yet powerful enoughfor the most experienced professionals. DaVinci Resolve lets you work more efficiently
because you don’t have to learn multiple apps or switch software for different tasks.
It’s like having your own post-production studio in a single app!
DaVinci Resolve 18 adds Blackmagic Cloud support for remote collaboration, DaVinci
proxy workflow, new Resolve FX, intuitive object masking, improved subtitling for editors,
Fairlight fixed bus to FlexBus conversion, and so much more!
Best of all, Blackmagic Design offers a version of DaVinci Resolve 18 that is completely
free! We’ve made sure that this version of DaVinci Resolve includes more features than any
paid editing system. That’s because at Blackmagic Design we believe everybody shouldhave the tools to create professional, Hollywood-caliber content without having to spend
thousands of dollars.
I invite you to download your copy of DaVinci Resolve 18 today and look forward to seeing
the amazing work you produce!

Grant Petty
Blackmagic Design

Forewordvii

Acknowledgments
We would like to thank the following individuals for their contributions of media usedthroughout the book:— Brian J Terwilliger, Terwilliger Productions for Living In the Age of Airplanes.
— Nuyen Anh Nguyen, Second Tomorrow Studios for Hyperlight.
— Chris Lang, Aaron Walterscheid, Nathan LeFever, and Sherwin Lau for Organ Mountain
Outfitters content. “Furever Glass” music composed and performed by Matt Carlin.
— Miss Rachel’s Pantry in Philadelphia, PA.
— Miserable Girl—Jitterbug Riot, EditStock ad— HaZ Dulull for Sync footage—Sync is a short proof-of-concept film written, produced,
and directed by Hasraf “HaZ” Dulull and is the property of hazfilm.com.
— Citizen Chain footage.

viii

AcknowledgmentsAbout the Author
Chris Roberts has spent the last 25 years editing everything from online corporate
promos to broadcast television, with editing credits that include the BAFTA Award-winningseries The Great House Giveaway.
He has been delivering video editing training for nearly 20 years and has trained
university students and staff; broadcast journalists; and sports, factual, and drama
editors. As a Blackmagic Certified Master Trainer, he has been responsible for delivering
DaVinci Resolve training to end users and other trainers around the world, both in person
and remotely.
Over the years, he has also written articles on editing techniques and editing software
for a variety of magazines and online publications, as well as writing several other books,
including The Beginner’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18.
Chris lives in Worcestershire, UK, with his partner Samantha and, when not working,enjoys reading post-apocalyptic fiction, listening to hard rock and blues music, and bingewatching the TV programs he has invariably missed.
This book is dedicated to the memory of his dearly loved and sadly missed mum, Maureen.
www.chrisroberts.info

About the AuthorixGetting Started
Welcome to The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18, the official Blackmagic Design
Training and Certification book that teaches editors, artists, and students how to edit in
DaVinci Resolve. All you need is a Mac or Windows computer, the free download version
of DaVinci Resolve 18, and a passion to learn and tell your story!
This official step-by-step training guide covers the basics of editing video and audio
content so you can start creating your own Hollywood-caliber film and video today!

What You’ll Learn— Apply advanced editing and trimming techniques for multiple genres as used byprofessional editors around the world.
— Generate and manage proxy media with the Blackmagic Proxy Generator.
— Perform variable speed changes to enhance action.
— Use trimming tricks and real-time dynamic trimming.
— Apply multicamera syncing and editing techniques.
— Organize large projects efficiently using metadata and smart bins.
— Build complex composites on the edit page.
— Use keyframes to create sophisticated animations.
— Edit and mix audio for stereo and surround sound.

xGetting Started

— Create, import, and edit subtitles for different languages.
— Deliver projects for online distribution, broadcast TV, and streaming services.
— Discover dozens of tips and tricks throughout the book that will transform
how you work!

The Blackmagic Design Training
and Certification Program
Blackmagic Design publishes several training books that take your skills farther in
DaVinci Resolve 18. They include:— The Beginner’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18— The Colorist Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18— The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18— The Fairlight Audio Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18— The Visual Effects Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18
Whether you want an introductory guide to DaVinci Resolve or want to learn moreadvanced editing techniques, color grading, sound mixing, or visual effects, our certified
training program includes a learning path for you.
After completing this book, you are encouraged to take a 1-hour, 50-question online
proficiency exam to receive a Certificate of Completion from Blackmagic Design. The
link to the online exam can be found on the Blackmagic Design training webpage. The
webpage also provides additional information on our official Training and Certification
Program. Please visit www.blackmagicdesign.com/products/davinciresolve/training

Getting Started

xi

System Requirements
This book supports DaVinci Resolve 18 for macOS and Windows. If you have an older
version of DaVinci Resolve, you must upgrade to the current version to follow along withthe lessons.

NOTE The exercises in this book refer to file and resource locations that will differ
if you are using the version of software from the Apple Mac App Store. For the
purposes of this training book, we recommend that macOS users download anduse the DaVinci Resolve software from the Blackmagic Design website rather thanfrom the Mac App store.

Download DaVinci Resolve
To download the free version of DaVinci Resolve 18 or later from theBlackmagic Design website:
1

Open a web browser on your Windows or macOS computer.

2

In the address field of your web browser, type: www.blackmagicdesign.com/products/
davinciresolve.

3

On the DaVinci Resolve landing page, click the Download button.

4

On the download page, click the option appropriate to your computer’s
operating system.

5

Follow the installation instructions to complete the DaVinci Resolve installation.

When you have completed the software installation, follow the instructions in the following
section to download the content for this book.

xii

Getting Started

Copying the Lesson FilesThe DaVinci Resolve lesson files must be downloaded to your macOS or Windows computer
to perform the exercises in this book. After you save the files to your hard drive, extract thefile and copy the folder to your Movies folder (macOS) or Videos folder (Windows).

To Download and Install the DaVinci Resolve Lesson Files
When you are ready to download the lesson files, follow these steps:
1

Open a web browser on your Windows or macOS computer.

2

In the address field of your web browser, type: www.blackmagicdesign.com/products/
davinciresolve/training

3

Scroll the page until you locate the The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18.

4

Click the Lesson Files link to download the media. The file is roughly 16.5 GB in size.

5

After downloading the zip file to your macOS or Windows computer, open yourDownloads folder and double-click R18_Editors_Lessons.zip to unzip it if it doesn’t
unzip automatically. You’ll end up with a folder named “R18 Editors Guide” that
contains all the content for this book.

6

From your Downloads folder, drag the R18 Editors Guide folder to your Movies folder(macOS) or Videos folder (Windows). These folders can be found within your User
folder on either platform.

You are now ready to begin Lesson 1.

Getting Certified
After completing this book, you are encouraged to take the 1-hour, 50-question online
proficiency exam to receive a Certificate of Completion from Blackmagic Design.
The link to this exam can be found on the Blackmagic Design training webpage:www.blackmagicdesign.com/products/davinciresolve/training

Getting Started

xiii

Introducing Blackmagic Cloud
DaVinci Resolve is the world’s only complete post-production solution that lets everyone
work together on the same project at the same time. Traditionally, post-production
follows a linear workflow with each artist handing off to the next, introducing errors andmountains of change logs to keep track of through each stage. With DaVinci Resolve’s
collaboration features, each artist can work on the same project, in their own dedicatedpage with the tools they need.
Now Blackmagic Cloud lets editors, colorists, VFX artists, animators, and sound engineers
work together simultaneously from anywhere in the world. Plus, they can review eachother’s changes without spending countless hours reconforming the timeline.
Simply create a Blackmagic Cloud ID, log in to the online DaVinci Resolve Project Server,
and follow the simple instructions to set up a new project library—all for one low
monthly price!
Once created, you can access this library directly from the Cloud tab in the ProjectManager to create as many projects as you need—all stored securely online. Then invite up
to 10 other people to collaborate on a project with you. With a simple click, they can relink
to local copies of the media files and start working on the project immediately, with all theirchanges automatically saved to the cloud.
Enabling Multiple User Collaboration for your project means that everyone can work on
the same project at the same time—edit assistants, editors, colorists, dialogue editors,
and visual effects artists can now all collaborate wherever they are in the world in a way
never before possible.

Media Sync with Blackmagic Cloud Store
Now you don’t need to buy expensive proprietary storage that needs an entire IT team to
manage! Blackmagic Cloud Store has been designed for multiple users and can handle thehuge media files used by Hollywood feature films. You can also have multiple Blackmagic
Cloud Stores syncing the media files with your Dropbox account so that everyone hasaccess to the media files for the project.
To find out more about these exciting workflows, visit blackmagicdesign.com/products/
davinciresolve/collaboration

xiv

Introducing Blackmagic CloudLesson 1

Building theRough Cut
Editing is so central to cinematicstorytelling that director Francis FordTime

Coppola once said, “The essence ofThis lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

cinema is editing.” This book explores

Goals

this “essence” of cinema, as applied

Setting Up a Project

2

The Edit Page

10

powerful editing features found in

Assembling the Sound Bites

11

DaVinci Resolve 18.

Working with the Subclips

19

Adding the Final Sound Bites

24

Adding B-Roll andPacing the Sound Bites

31

Painting the Interview

36

Backtiming Edits

43

and functionality available to you

Adding the Music48

in DaVinci Resolve, together with

Lesson Review

51

to the art and craft of editing andstorytelling, through the robust andWhether you’re working to cut
the latest cinematic blockbuster, afast-turnaround commercial spot,
an episodic TV show, or an entire
web series, the tools, technology,

the techniques discussed anddemonstrated throughout this book,will help you achieve your vision.

The edit page supports the approach to nonlinear editing that has been battle-tested
by editors around the world for decades. In this lesson, you’ll learn the basics of thosetechniques as they apply to building a rough cut. In Lesson 2, you will then learn how torefine this rough cut into a final, polished masterpiece.

Setting Up a Project
Editing is often an iterative process that requires you to build a coherent story fromdisparate pieces of footage. While there are many generally accepted workflows for
assembling these sounds and pictures, unfortunately there is no definitive “right way” toedit; every step the editor takes has its own unique aims, considerations, and consequences.
With that said, you’ll start your exploration of editing in DaVinci Resolve by putting
together a rough cut of a 1-minute social media promo for New Mexico outdoor clothing
brand Organ Mountain Outfitters. Along the way, you’ll gain an appreciation of some of thethought processes and happy accidents that often occur in editing suites around the world.
You will begin this lesson by importing a project that already contains the clips needed forthe edit, and which has also been organized for you using a variety of techniques that you’ll
explore further in later lessons.
1

Open DaVinci Resolve to display the Project Manager.

To keep the projects used in this book separate from any of your other current
projects, you will create a new local project library on your system.

2

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Project libraries are collections of projects that can reside locally on your computeror on directly attached storage media, on a network location that can be shared bypeople on the same network, or in the Blackmagic Cloud, where project libraries canbe accessed online by anyone you choose to invite. Network and cloud-based projectlibraries also have the advantage that they can be used to collaborate, so that multiple
DaVinci Resolve users can work on the same project simultaneously.
To set up a cloud-based project library, you will need a Blackmagic Cloud ID. You canregister for a free account at cloud.blackmagicdesign.com. Once registered, you can
use the project server to set up a project library in the cloud for a single, low monthly
cost that you can cancel at any time. You can access any project libraries you havecreated in Blackmagic Cloud by clicking the Cloud option in DaVinci Resolve’s ProjectManager and logging in using your Blackmagic Cloud ID. Anyone hosting a projectlibrary in Blackmagic Cloud can invite up to 10 additional uses to collaborate in realtime for no additional cost. Project libraries on a network can be set up and managed
using the free DaVinci Resolve Project Server, available for download from the
DaVinci Resolve support pages on the Blackmagic Design website atwww.blackmagicdesign.com/support/family/davinci-resolve-and-fusion.
For the purposes of this book, you will work with a local project library.
2

Ensure that Local is selected at the top of the Project Manager, and then click theShow/Hide Project Libraries button to reveal the project libraries.

NOTE If you haven’t yet created any project libraries, you will see only
the default local project library, called “Local Database.” In versions of
DaVinci Resolve prior to version 18, project libraries were called databases.

Setting Up a Project33

Click the Add Project Library button at the bottom of the project libraries list.

The Add Project Library window appears.
4

In the Add Project Library window, click the Name field, type R18 Editors Guide, andthen click the Browse button.

You’ll need to select (or create) an empty directory on your system for a new projectlibrary. For the purposes of the lessons in this book, you can use the folder provided in
the downloaded R18 Editors Guide folder.

4

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

5Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Editors Guide Project Library and click Open to selectthis folder as the location for your new project library.

NOTE If this is not your first time working through this exercise, and you’ve
already created a project library in this folder, simply create a new folder inthe R18 Editors Guide folder and choose that as the location for your new
project library.

6

In the Add Project Library window, click Create to create your new project library.

Setting Up a Project5

The new project library appears in the list of project libraries connected to
DaVinci Resolve.

TIP To switch project libraries, simply click on the desired project library fromthe list to reveal the projects contained within that library. Projects can becopied from one project library to another using the Copy Project To button at
the top of the Project Manager.

Having successfully created a new empty project library, you can import the project fileneeded for this first lesson.
7

Click the Import button.

8

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 01 and select the file OMO Promo.drp.

NOTE Files using the extension .drp are DaVinci Resolve Project files.
96

Click Open.

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

TIP Alternative ways of importing a project include dragging .drp files directly
onto the Project Manager, right-clicking in an empty area of the ProjectManager and choosing Import Project, or choosing File > Import Project.

The project is imported into the project library and appears in the Project Manager.

DaVinci Resolve does not “open” project files directly. Instead, imported .drp files arecopied into the current project library. It is this imported project that you will be able toopen and make changes to, not the original .drp file you selected for import. Clicking
the Export button allows you to export a selected project(s) from the project library
to individual .drp files, but any further changes to the project can only be made to
the project in the project library. You can find out more information about managing
project libraries in The Beginner’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18 (blackmagicdesign.com/
products/davinciresolve/training).
10 Double-click the OMO Promo project to open it.
The project opens in DaVinci Resolve on the page last used in the application.
11 If necessary, click the edit page button.

Setting Up a Project7

12 Select Workspace > Reset UI Layout to reset the edit page workspace to the default
configuration.
You have successfully imported and opened a project but, before you begin editing
with the clips in this project, you’ll need to relink the clips in this project to their media
files on your computer’s hard drive.

Relinking the Media Files
The reason why clips may go offline is often because the associate media files have been
moved or renamed on the original storage drive. To prevent this from happening, once you
have imported the clips you should leave them in their original locations on your computer.
If you need to move them for any reason, you can use DaVinci Resolve’s Media Management
feature. You’ll learn more about media management in Lesson 9, “Delivering Projects.”
In the meantime, DaVinci Resolve makes it easy to know if any of your project’s media files
are unexpectedly offline, allowing you to quickly relink them.
1

In the top left of the interface, above the media pool, click the red Relink Media button.

NOTE The Relink Media button will only be red if there are any media files in
the project that are unexpectedly missing. Media that has been deliberately
unlinked is not included.

8

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

2

The Relink Media window appears, telling you how many files are currently missing.

TIP Place your cursor over the location where Resolve expected to find thefiles for more detail about the location of the files you need.

3

Click the Locate button, and in the file window that appears, navigate to the R18
Editors Guide folder and click Open.

Resolve will automatically search and recognize the file structure inside this folder,
and then relink the media files for you.

Setting Up a Project9

NOTE In case Resolve cannot find the appropriate files, you can initiate a morecomprehensive search from the Relink Media window using the Disk Search button.
Be aware, though, that this search may take much longer if you have very large
hard drives with lots of media files to search through!

Once the clips have been successfully relinked, you can now begin reviewing thisfirst project.

The Edit Page
Whether you are new to video editing, or you are already a seasoned professional looking
to add DaVinci Resolve to your editing arsenal, the edit page is where you’ll find all thetools you need to craft your story.
Media Pool—displays clips
in the currently selected bin

Source Viewer—displays
the unedited footage

Timeline Viewer—displays
edited clips in the timeline

Bin List—allows you to easily
select a bin to view its contents

Timeline—allows you to arrange andadjust clips used in the current edit
Timeline Toolbar—features timeline
editing modes, editing functions,and timeline zoom settings

For this lesson, the project has already been set up and organized for you using a variety
of different techniques that you’ll explore yourself in later lessons.

10

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Assembling the Sound Bites
Someone once said that the hardest part of writing a book is starting the first chapter.
Indeed, the same is true for editing but with sounds and moving pictures rather thanwords on a page. Placing those first few clips into an empty timeline can be quite daunting;you never quite know where you should start, or where you will ultimately end up.
However, once you have begun assembling the footage, and the edit slowly starts to reveal
itself, you’ll begin to see what’s working, what doesn’t work, and what might be coaxed into
working with a bit of effort.
To start this exciting process, you’ll need an empty timeline.
1

In the bin list, select the TIMELINES bin, and choose File > New Timeline or press
Command-N (macOS) or Ctrl-N (Windows)

2

In the Timeline Name field in the Create New Timeline window, type OMO Promo,change the Audio Track Type to Mono because the audio for the interview is set tomono, and click Create.

A new timeline is created in the selected bin, and additional controls appear in thetimeline window.

NOTE You can set the default starting timecode, number of video and audio
tracks, and audio track type for new timelines in the editing section of the User
Preferences.

Assembling the Sound Bites

11

3

In the bin list, click the disclosure triangle next to the INTERVIEW bin.

Inside this interview bin, you’ll see several additional bins: one for each camera used toshoot the interview (referred to as A, B, and C cameras for the purposes of this project),one for the audio clips that have already been synced to the interview clips, and one for aseries of subclips that have been created to help make working with the interview easier.

NOTE You’ll learn how to sync audio and video clips, create subclips, and edit
multicamera footage in later lessons.

4

Select the A CAM bin to reveal the interview clips shot on this camera.

TIP You can use the slider at the top of the media pool to resize the clip
thumbnails, making them easier to see and making it easier to read theclip name.

12

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

To preview each of these clips, you can use the Live Media Preview feature.
5

Without clicking, move your mouse pointer over any of the four clips.

The clip appears in the source viewer and is scrubbed as you move your mouse backand forth across the clip in the media pool.

TIP You can disable audio scrubbing by choosing Timeline > Audio Scrubbing
or pressing Shift-S.

6

Double-click the first clip in this bin, OMO_A_002 to open it in the source viewer.

7

Click the Go To First Frame button or press Home to move the playhead back to thestart of the clip.

Assembling the Sound Bites

13

8

Click the Play button or press the Spacebar to begin playing the clip from the beginning.
As you’ll probably realize very quickly, this interview clip is rather long andencompasses several answers to different questions. You certainly don’t want to use
this entire clip. Instead, you will use just a small sound bite.

9

Click the Stop button or press the Spacebar again to halt playback.
To help you locate the sound bite, you can display the clip’s audio waveform along withthe source video.

10 Click the source viewer’s Options menu (represented by three dots) and choose Show
Zoomed Audio Waveform.

A green waveform appears along the bottom of the source viewer.

TIP For a more detailed waveform that displays separate audio channels, you
can change the source viewer mode dropdown menu to Audio Track.

14

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

11 Again, click the Go To First Frame button or press Home to return the playhead back tothe beginning of the clip.
12 Click the Play button or press the Spacebar to start playing the interview again.
13 Just after Chris laughs, but before he says, “I’m Chris Lang…,” click the Stop button orpress the Spacebar to stop playback.

You should be able to judge where Chris starts to introduce himself from the size ofthe audio waveform in the display.
14 Click and hold the jog wheel (or press the Left or Right Arrow keys on your keyboard)
to refine the position of the playhead (as indicated by the red line in the waveform
display) to just before the start of the waveform.

TIP If you disabled audio scrubbing previously, press Shift-S to enable audio
scrubbing to help you refine the position to just before Chris starts speaking.

Assembling the Sound Bites

15

15 When you’re happy that the playhead is positioned just before Chris says, “I’m Chris
Lang…,” choose Mark > Mark In or press I to add an In point to specify where you want
this clip to start.

16 Click Play or press the Spacebar to continue playing the clip until Chris says, “…in Las
Cruces, New Mexico,” and then stop playback.
17 Using the jog wheel, refine the position of the playhead in the clip to just before Chris
blinks, and choose Mark > Mark Out or press O to add an Out point to specify where
you want this clip to end.

16

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

18 Drag the clip from the source viewer to the timeline viewer.

A series of editing overlays appears, detailing the different types of edits available
to you in DaVinci Resolve. Seasoned editors will probably recognize many ofthese options from other nonlinear editors (NLEs), although some are specific to
DaVinci Resolve. The default is Overwrite.
19 With the Overwrite edit overlay highlighted, release the mouse button.
The first clip is edited into the timeline.

Assembling the Sound Bites

17

Controlling Playback
An important part of editing is learning how to control the playback of your video.
While you could use the transport controls underneath the source or timelineviewers, keyboard shortcuts are much more efficient. DaVinci Resolve’s default
keyboard layout supports all the usual shortcuts for playback that professional
editors around the world will recognize. You can use the Spacebar to start andstop playback and the Left and Right Arrow keys to move forward and backward
one frame at a time. More experienced users will be happy to know that theJ, K, and L keys also control playback at different speeds, a staple of NLE systems.

J

K

L

The order of the JKL keys matches the layout of the Play Reverse, Stop, and Playtransport controls in both the source and timeline viewers.
Try the following to practice controlling the playback of the source ortimeline viewer:— Press L to play forward.
— Press J to play backward.
— Press K to stop playback.
You can keep tapping the J or L keys to increase the shuttling speed up to
64x normal speed:— Press L twice to shuttle forward at 2x normal speed.
— Press J twice to shuttle backward at 2x normal speed.
And you can also use the same keys to jog back and forth to precisely locate a
specific frame:— Hold K and tap L to jog forward 1 frame.
— Hold K and tap J to jog backward 1 frame.
— Hold K and Hold L to scrub forward.
— Hold K and hold J to scrub backward.

18

Lesson 1

Building the Rough CutWorking with the Subclips
Before you start adding additional sound bites to this timeline, it’s worth considering just
how much of that first clip you used. If you look at where you added the In and Out points
on the clip in the source viewer, you’ll see that it’s only a small portion of a much larger
clip—only about 6 or 7 seconds of a clip that is over 2 minutes long!

TIP You can tell how long a clip is, or the duration between the In and Out points
you’ve added, using the duration timecode value in the top left of the source viewer.

This disparity between the amount of footage shot and the amount used in the edit is not
unusual and is often referred to as the shooting ratio. Depending on what’s being edited,shooting ratios can vary wildly; a typical news piece might have a shooting ratio of 3:1(for every 3 minutes shot, 1 minute was used), whereas some reality shows might have ashooting ratio of around 600:1, if not more!
With so much footage being captured and needing to be edited, it can sometimes be
useful to just focus on a much smaller, relevant portion. This is where subclips come in.
Subclips are clips that have been isolated from a much longer master clip but are stillreferencing the original media file so that they aren’t taking up additional storage spaceon your system. You will learn how to create and manage your own subclips in Lesson 6.
For this lesson though, the subclips have already been created for you from the much
longer interview clips.
1

In the bin list, select the SUBCLIPS bin to view the four subclips.

Working with the Subclips

19Each subclip has its own individual name that references which clip the subclip was
originally created from (e.g., A 005), along with a comment on what is said in thatsound bite (e.g., Design, Tagline, Brand). You will learn how to create friendly clip
names like this in Lesson 6.

TIP To show the filename of the clips rather than the clip name used in the
project, you can choose View > Show File Names.

2

Double-click the fourth clip in the SUBCLIPS bin—SUBCLIP A 008 Experiences—to open it in the source monitor and play this clip through from the start.
Because the subclip is a much more manageable duration, it’s easier to see thewaveform represented over the duration of the subclip.

3

Click the source viewer’s Options (three dots) menu and choose Show Full Clip
Audio Waveform.

Even though this is still only a 30-second portion of the much longer interview clip in
the A CAM bin, you still only need to use a portion of it.

20

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

4Move the playhead to just before Chris starts speaking and press I to add an In point.

5

Press L to play through the clip and then stop after Chris has said “… the landscapes”
but before he looks away from the interviewer, and press O to add an Out point.

Working with the Subclips

21

6

In the timeline toolbar, click the Overwrite Clip button, or press F10.

NOTE If you’re using DaVinci Resolve on macOS, you may need to configure
your keyboard settings in System Preferences to “Use F1, F2, etc. keys as
standard function keys” to use the default editing shortcuts. Alternatively, you
can use the fn key with any F key to override the macOS shortcuts.

The second interview clip is edited into the timeline starting at the position of thetimeline playhead and using only the portion marked between the In and Out points inthe source.

22

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Timeline Zoom and Scroll
The edit page has three options for controlling the zoom level for clips in the timeline:
Full Extent Zoom will always display the whole duration ofyour timeline in the timeline window, automatically adjusting thezoom to keep everything in sight. This is most useful for seeing abird’s-eye view of your edit and allows you to navigate
anywhere within the timeline.
Detail Zoom scales the timeline to a closer, zoomed view,
centered on the playhead. This option is most useful when you
want to step into the timeline to select a clip or edit point tomake fine adjustments.
Custom Zoom provides the most flexibility
since it allows you to set your own zoom scalein the timeline. You can use the slider to zoom
in and out of the playhead location or holdOption (macOS) or Alt (Windows) and use the scroll function on your mouse (ortrackpad) to adjust the zoom of the timeline dynamically, centered on theplayhead.
Useful keyboard shortcuts for zooming the timeline include:— Command-= (equals) in macOS or Ctrl-= (equals) in Windows to zoom in to theposition of the timeline playhead.
— Command-–(minus) in macOS or Ctrl--(minus) in Windows to zoom out of theposition of the timeline playhead.
— Shift-Z toggles between fitting the timeline to
the timeline window and returning you tothe previous zoom level.
Timeline track heights can be adjusted using theTimeline View Options menu or by holding Shift andusing the mouse scroll wheel over either the audio
or video tracks of the timeline.
The timeline can also be scrolled left and rightusing the scrollbar at the bottom of the timeline
window or by holding Command (macOS) or
Ctrl (Windows) and using the scroll function on
your mouse (or trackpad).

Working with the Subclips

23Adding the Final Sound Bites
You will now continue to add the rest of the sound bites for this promo using a variety ofediting functions.
1

In the timeline, click the Full Extent Zoom button to have the two timeline clips fill thetimeline window.

2

Select the source viewer to make it active.

TIP Press Q to quickly switch between the timeline and source viewers.
3

Press the Up Arrow key to move to the previous clip in the media pool—SUBCLIP A
008 Brand—and, if necessary, press Home to return to the start of this clip.

4

Play the clip in the source viewer and add In and Out points around the portion of theinterview where Chris says, “Our brand is really a reflection of our community who we are.”24

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut5Perform an Overwrite edit by dragging the clip from the source viewer to the timelineviewer, clicking the Overwrite Clip button, or pressing F10.

Insert Edits
Another frequently used editing function is the Insert edit, which enables you to add clips
earlier in the timeline without overwriting anything else.
1

Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and press the Up Arrow key two times toselect the first clip in the SUBCLIPS bin, SUBCLIP A 005 Design.

2

Move the playhead in the source viewer to the second group of audio waveforms.

This is the next sound bite you will add to this timeline, but it’s a bit of a tight edit tofind the In point for as Chris stumbles slightly and says “that” twice. However, using thezoomed audio waveform display will make it so much easier to locate the short pause
between the two “that’s” quickly and accurately for a clean start to the sound bite.

Adding the Final Sound Bites

25

3

From the source viewer’s Options menu, choose Show Zoomed Audio Waveform.

4

Use the jog wheel, press the Left and/or Right Arrow keys, or hold K and press J or L,
to jog the playhead into the gap between the waveforms.

5

When you’re happy that the playhead is aligned after the first “that” but before thesecond “that,” press I to add an In point.

6

Continue playing the clip in the source viewer and add an Out point after Chris says,“… that’s really where the design process starts.”
It doesn’t make much sense for this sound bite to be edited at the end of the timeline.
Instead, you will insert the clip in between two of the earlier clips in the timeline. But
before making the edit, look at where the timeline playhead is currently located.
Unless you drag and drop the clip into the timeline, whenever you make an edit using
the timeline viewer overlays, buttons in the timeline toolbar, or keyboard shortcuts,
the timeline playhead is automatically placed at the end of the clip last edited into thetimeline. This makes sense when adding clips sequentially because you can quickly edit
the next clip directly after the previous clip. But if you wish to add clips to a different
part of the timeline, you’ll need to move the playhead to the appropriate position (see“The Rules of Three-Point Editing” later in this lesson).
Since the playhead is currently positioned at the end of the last clip in thetimeline, you’ll need to tell Resolve where you want to add this clip by moving thetimeline playhead.

26

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

7Press Q to switch to the timeline viewer and press the Up Arrow key to position thetimeline playhead at the start of the third clip.

8

Drag the clip from the source viewer to the timeline viewer, placing it on the Insert
option in the overlay.

The clip is inserted into the timeline at the playhead position.

Adding the Final Sound Bites

27

Append At End Edits
Another useful editing function is the Append at End edit. This does exactly what it says;
it adds the clip to the timeline after the last clip on the targeted track.

NOTE You will learn more about targeting tracks in Lesson 2,“Refining the Rough Cut.”1

Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and press the Down Arrow key to move tothe second subclip, SUBCLIP A 007 Tagline.

2

Add In and Out points around the final sound bite of this interview where Chris says,“That’s why we say experience the southwest.”

You’ll want to add this sound bite to the end of the current timeline. Following the rulesof three-point editing, you should position the timeline playhead at the appropriate
position. However, Resolve offers a handy editing function that allows you to add clips
to the end of the timeline no matter where the timeline playhead is.

28

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

3Drag the marked subclip from the source viewer to the Append at End overlay in thetimeline viewer.

The final sound bite is added to the end of the timeline even though the playhead was
not placed there.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 01/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 1.drt
and click Open.

Adding the Final Sound Bites

29

The “Rules” of Three-Point Editing
With a few notable exceptions, every edit you perform is generally referred to as athree-point edit. This means that DaVinci Resolve is calculating what you want to beedited and where you want it edited into the timeline.
In the previous steps, the In and Out points you marked in the source viewer were
the first two points required; the third point was the position of the playhead in
the timeline, where the In point of the clip in the source viewer will be placed when
you make the edit.
Even if you don’t add any In or Out points to a clip prior to editing it to the timeline,
you’re still following the rules of three-point editing because Resolve uses theclip in the source viewer from the beginning (the implied In point) to the end (theimplied Out point).
And even if you drag a clip directly to the timeline, you are manually overriding
the default third point (where the clip will start) by deciding where to place the clip
prior to releasing the mouse button.
Is the Append at End edit you just performed a three-point edit? Yes! It still
adhered to the rules of three-point editing by utilizing the In and Out points inthe source viewer, but although the Append at End edit didn’t use the timeline
playhead position, it still had a third point that it was following: the end of the last
clip in the timeline.
Later in this lesson, you’ll learn how to make much more complex three-point edits
by placing different combinations of In and Out points in the source viewer andtimeline, so try to work out the rules of three-point editing that Resolve is following
and how the In and Out points (real or implied) are being used to complete
these edits.
In later lessons, you’ll also make some four-point edits and edits that use In and
Out points in unique and specific ways!

30

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Adding B-Roll andPacing the Sound Bites
Now that you have the sound bites in the timeline, you can start building out the story
with the B-roll footage. Part of this process involves having a feel for the material you’re
working with and understanding how the final piece will look and feel. As with mostcreative processes, it requires a little imagination but also the understanding that things
will continue to be refined as the edit develops.
You will start by adding a shot at the start and end of the edit, which will eventually be used
as a background for the opening and closing titles.
1

Select the B-ROLL bin in the bin list.

All the potential B-roll footage for this edit is in this single bin but, depending on
how much footage you’re dealing with, it may be difficult to see where to start.
You could organize this footage further in to separate bins; however, as with thesubclips you used earlier, this process has already been done for you using a seriesof keyword smart bins.

Adding B-Roll and Pacing the Sound Bites

31

2

In the Smart Bins list in the bottom section of the bin list, select the Keywords folder
and then select the disclosure triangle to open the list of keywords smart bins.

TIP You can resize the Smart Bins area by dragging the dividing line at the topof the Smart Bins section of the bin list.

3

Select the SCENERY smart bin.
This smart bin contains any clips that have been identified and tagged with the“SCENERY” keyword.

NOTE You will learn how to add and manage keywords and other metadata tocreate and manage your own smart bins in Lesson 6, “Project Organization.”

4

Double-click the first clip in this smart bin, Organ Mountain Timelapse to open it in
the source viewer.

32

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

This is a timelapse shot of the eponymous Organ Mountain and will serve well as a
background to the opening and closing titles you will add toward the end of Lesson 2.
Notice that In and Out points have already been applied for you at a duration of
7 seconds.
To insert this at the beginning of your timeline, you will need to move the timeline
playhead to the appropriate point.
5

Press Q to switch to the timeline viewer and press Home to move the playhead to thestart of the timeline.

6

Click the Insert Clip button in the timeline toolbar or press F9.

The clip is inserted at the start of the timeline.

To add the same 7-second clip to the end of the timeline, you can perform an Append
at End edit. While there is no specific timeline toolbar button for this function, you canstill access the function using the menus or a keyboard shortcut.
7

Choose Edit > Append to End of Timeline or press Shift-F12.
The same 7-second clip is added to the end of the timeline.

Adding B-Roll and Pacing the Sound Bites

33

Next, you’ll create some pacing between each of the sound bites. You will start bycreating a short gap after the first of Chris’s sound bites.
8

Move the timeline playhead so it sits anywhere over the third clip in the timeline.

9

Choose Timeline > Select Clips Forward > Select Clips Forward on this Track, or press Y.
This command selects all the clips forward from the timeline playhead for thetargeted track.

NOTE You will learn more about targeting tracks in Lesson 2,“Refining the Rough Cut.”With all the clips selected, it’s easy to move them together.
10 With the clips still selected, type +200 into the timeline viewer’s timecode field andpress Enter (Return).
This moves the selected clips forward by 2 seconds, leaving a gap. Two seconds is anarbitrary amount that might need to be adjusted later.

34

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

11 Press the Down Arrow key to move to the next edit in the timeline (which places theplayhead on the first frame of the third interview clip) and press Y to select all clips
along the targeted track.
12 Type +100 and press Enter (Return) to add another 1-second gap between the second
and third interview clips.

13 Move the playhead anywhere over the fifth clip in the timeline and press Y to select all
clips forward from the playhead.

14 Again, type +200 and Enter (Return) to have the last three clips move forward by 2
seconds leaving another gap on the timeline.
15 Finally, place your playhead over the final sound bite and press Y.
16 Type +100 and press Enter (Return) to create a 1-second gap before the payoff of thisvideo, where Chris recites the tagline, “Experience the southwest.”

These gaps allow the sound bites to “breathe” slightly, meaning that they allow Chris totake a breath as he would have to do in the real world, but the gaps also allow room forthe audience to take in what’s been said before the next sound bite comes in. You canthink of this technique as being the equivalent to punctuation for movie making.

Adding B-Roll and Pacing the Sound Bites

35

Painting the Interview
Now that you have the general structure of the edit in place, you can start adding the
B-roll. This performs the dual role of making Chris’s sound bites come alive and covering
the gaps between the sound bites, pulling the edit into a cohesive whole. This process isoften referred to as painting, since you are primarily enhancing the story through pictures.
To do this, you will set In and Out points in the timeline to specify the duration of the shots
you’ll need.
1

Move the playhead so that it snaps to the end of the second clip in the timeline, where
the first gap starts.

TIP Press N to enable or disable the timeline snapping function.
2

Press I to add an In point here in the timeline.

3

Play the timeline until Chris says, “… experience the southwest because…” and thenstop playback.

4

Press O to add an Out point here in the timeline.

You have now marked a portion of the timeline where you want the first B-roll clip tobe edited.
5

From the ACTIVITIES smart bin, double-click the clip PINE TREE WALKING to open it
in the source viewer.
This is a shot of three friends, attired in Organ Mountain Outfitters clothing, walking in
the foothills of the mountains.

36

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

6Play the clip from the beginning and add an In point after you hear the director shout“Go ahead” and the girl is about to take her second step.

NOTE Before you go to the next step, take a moment and check how many In
and/or Out points you’ve added in total for this edit…. Three, right? The In andan Out points in the timeline are the first two, and the In point in the source
viewer is the third.

Typically, B-roll shots like this tend to be edited on top of the interview already in thetimeline as a cutaway. DaVinci Resolve provides an editing function to make this aseasy as possible.
7

Drag the PINE TREE WALKING clip to the Place on Top function in the timelineviewer overlays.

Painting the Interview

37

Thanks to the rules of three-point editing, the clip is edited between the In and Out
points in the timeline, starting at the In point you set in the viewer. The Place on Top
edit has also created an extra video and audio track to accommodate the new clip
without overwriting any of the existing footage.

As before, the timeline viewer is now the active window, and the playhead is
automatically positioned at the end of the clip you just added to the timeline, readyfor you to specify where the next edit should be.
8

Without moving the timeline playhead, press I to add an In point to the timeline.

9

Play the timeline and add an Out point after Chris says “…there’s nothing like it…”

10 Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and press the Up Arrow key to open theprevious shot of the friends walking up the steps, PINE TREE TRAIL STEPS.

38

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

11 Set an In point just as the second guy enters the frame and has his left leg outstretched.

12 Choose Edit > Place on Top or press F12 to add the clip to the same tracks as theprevious cutaway.

13 With the timeline active, press I to add an In point in the timeline, play forward, andadd an Out point after Chris says, “… ever experienced.”

Painting the Interview

39

14 Press Q to switch to the source viewer and press the Down Arrow key until you open
the shot WHITE SANDS FRIENDS in the source viewer.
15 Add an In point to this shot after the girl on the left looks up and is smiling forthe camera.

The wind noise against the camera microphone is a little off-putting for this shot.
16 In the source viewer, click the video-only overlay and drag to the Place on Top overlay
in the timeline viewer to edit only the video, not the audio of this clip.

17 Add an In point to the playhead position in the timeline and an Out point after Chrissays, “… the culture, the food…”

40

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

18 Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and press the Up Arrow key to navigate
to the clip PINA BLANCA FIRE DANCER and add an In point near the top of the clip
where the girl is spinning the flaming torches.

19 In the timeline, click the destination control for A1 to disable it.

This prevents the audio from the source clip being edited into the timeline whileallowing you to use editing shortcuts.
20 Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.

Painting the Interview

41

21 Add an In point to the timeline and an Out point after Chris says, “…. really inspires us…”

22 Press Q to switch to the source viewer and press the Up Arrow key to navigate to theclip PENA BLANCA JUMPING ROCKS.
23 Add an In point when the guy is about to jump on to the rock.

24 Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.

42

Lesson 1

Building the Rough CutHopefully, you can see just how powerful an understanding of three-point editing
techniques can be to quickly add a series of cutaways like this. These cutaways will
likely need trimming, but before you turn your attention to that you will add a few morecutaways to the end of the interview using a variation of the technique you’ve justbeen using.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 01/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 2.drt andclick Open.

Backtiming Edits
When you were adding the first set of cutaways to Chris’s interview, you were specifying
where each of those shots would start based on the placing of the In point. However,there are certain circumstances when you’ll want to edit a clip into the timeline and specify
where that shot should end. This process is often referred to as backtiming and is easy tounderstand when you follow the rules of three-point editing.
1

Play the third interview clip in the timeline, adding an In point just after Chris says, “…
we bring it back to the store….”

To quickly add an Out point to the end of this clip, you can use a command to jump
to the Out point of the clip under the playhead. This is different to simply jumping
forward to the next edit because it places the playhead on the last frame of thecurrent clip, rather than on the first frame of the next clip, so that you can add the Out
point precisely.
2

Choose Playback > Go To > Last Frame or press ’ (apostrophe).

Backtiming Edits

43

The playhead jumps to the last frame of the clip, which you can see by the presence ofan Out point symbol in the bottom right of the timeline viewer.

3

Press O to add an Out point.

NOTE The playhead in DaVinci Resolve is inclusive of the current frame, which
in practice means that In points are always added at the head, or start, of theframe, and Out points are always added at the tail, or end, of the frame. Thismeans the minimum duration you can mark is 1 frame.

4

From the RETAIL smart bin, locate the clip named STORE COMPUTER DESIGN andopen it in the source viewer.
This is a clip of Organ Mountain Outfitter’s lead designer creating their latest T-shirt
design on the computer.

44

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

5Locate the frame, near the beginning of the clip, just before the large black
circle appears.

This is where you want this shot to end.
6

Add an Out point at this frame.
Again, a bit of rudimentary math should quickly reveal that you now have a total ofthree In and Out points across the timeline and the source viewer (an In and Out in thetimeline and another Out in the source viewer). In this case, the rules of three-point
editing mean that because there is just an Out point and no In point in the source
viewer, the clip will be edited to the timeline as expected, but the two Out points will bealigned, meaning the shot will then be backtimed to the In point.

TIP If you need to remove an In point, you can choose Mark > Clear In or press
Option-I (macOS) or Alt-I (Windows). Similarly, to remove an unwanted Out
point, choose Mark > Clear Out or press Option-O (macOS) or Alt-O (Windows).
To remove an In and Out point simultaneously, choose Mark > Clear In and Outor press Option-X (macOS) or Alt-X (Windows).

7

Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.
Next, you’ll add a cutaway to help bridge the gap you created in the edit earlier.

Backtiming Edits45

8

Add an In point to the start of the gap in the timeline.

9

Play forward and add an Out point after Chris says, “Our brand is just really areflection of…”

10 From the RETAIL smart bin, open the clip STORE HANGING SHIRT in thesource viewer.
This clip is a lengthy sequence of a shirt making its way out from the design studioto the shop shelves. You only need the last part of this ambitious shot though(sorry, director!)
11 In the source viewer, locate the frame where the girl hangs the T-shirt up and has left
the frame (near the end of the clip).
12 Mark an Out point.

46

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

13 Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.
14 Add an In point to the current playhead location in the timeline.
15 Add an Out point after Chris says, “That’s why we say…” and he has lowered his hands
to his knees.

16 From the RETAIL smart bin, open the clip STORE EXTERIOR SIGN in the source viewer.
17 Add an Out point on a frame just after the girl in the black hat has exited the store andreleases the door.

Backtiming Edits

47

18 Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.
Excellent. With the final cutaway in place, all the jump cuts and gaps between Chris’s
sound bites have been covered. There’s just one final element to add to this timeline tocomplete the rough cut.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 01/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 3.drt
and click Open.

Adding the Music
Music is such an important part of many edits. Whereas the spoken word (whether it bescripted dialogue, interviews, or narration) will often convey what we need to know abouta subject, music will most often convey what we should feel about a scene or subject. Get
the music wrong and the whole edit might communicate the wrong impression completely!
Thankfully, in this case the music has been carefully chosen for you. All you have to do is
add it to the current timeline.
1

Ensure that the timeline viewer is selected and press Home to return the playhead tothe start of the timeline.

2

Select the MUSIC bin from the bin list in the media pool and open the ONE MINSOUNDTRACK.wav clip in the source viewer.

48

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

When viewing audio-only clips such as this, the source viewer automatically switches toaudio mode.
You can add In and Out points to audio clips just as you’ve done throughout thislesson. In this case, though, it’s unnecessary because the music is already just under aminute in length, which is the desired duration for the whole edit.
3

In the timeline, click the track destination control for A1 to re-enable and allow audio tobe edited into the timeline again.

4

Press F12 to make a Place on Top edit.

The music clip is added to a new audio track.
The only thing left to do now is attenuate (reduce) the volume of the audio clip sothat it more closely matches the rest of the audio in the timeline. It doesn’t have tobe the correct level at this time—just low enough that it doesn’t overpower the otherelements in the timeline as you continue to refine it in the next lesson.

Adding the Music

49

5

Place you mouse over the volume overlay for the audio clip in the timeline, which isrepresented by a thin white line running through the length of the clip.

6

Click and hold the volume overlay and drag down to reduce the volume of the clip until
the tooltip reads about -18 dB.

TIP Hold Shift while adjusting the volume overlay for more precise control
when changing the audio level.

7

Press Home to return the playhead to the start of the timeline and play back the clip toreview the rough cut.

Congratulations! You have completed the first lesson. Remember, this lesson was about
being able to quickly put together a rough cut using the editing tools available in the edit
page. Along the way, you should have acquired a firm grasp of the principles of threepoint editing. However, there is still much, much more to do to refine this timeline before
it’s ready to show to the client at Organ Mountain Outfitters. This will be the focus of thenext lesson.

50

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Lesson Review
1

True or false? A rough cut is a polished timeline that requires no further work.

2

Which of the following can be used to separate long clips into more manageable clips?
a) Source clipsb) Master clipsc) Subclips

3

True or false? The Place on Top and Append at End edit functions do not havekeyboard shortcuts.

4

What is the minimum number of In and Out points you need to successfully completea three-point edit?
a) 0
b) 2
c) 3

5

What is the name given to an edit that uses a combination of two Out points and only
one In point?
a) Reversed editb) Fit to Fill editc) Backtimed edit

Lesson Review

51

Answers
1

False. A rough cut is usually the first step in the editing process where the overall
structure of the edit is quickly built but still needs to be refined.

2b) Subclips.

3

False. The default keyboard shortcut for Place on Top is F12, and for Append at End it’s
Shift-F12. Keyboard shortcuts for all the edit page editing functions can be seen in the
View menu.

4a) 0. Most editing functions are based on the rules of three-point editing whether or
not you add In or Out points to the timeline or source viewer. If no In or Out points
are in the source viewer, the first frame of the clip is treated as the In point, and thelast frame is treated as the Out point. If no In or Out points are in the timeline, theplayhead generally becomes the timeline In point (except when making an Append
at End edit). If you drag a clip directly to the timeline, you are manually choosing the“third” point by choosing where to place the clip.

552c) Backtimed edit.

Lesson 1

Building the Rough Cut

Lesson 2

Refining theRough CutIn the previous lesson, you createda rough cut for a short promotionalTime

video for the outdoor clothing brandThis lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

Organ Mountain Outfitters. For many,Goals

knowing how to quickly create an edit

Setting Up the Project54

Duplicating the Timeline

55

Trimming the Timeline Clips

58

edit has revealed itself, it’s now time to

Rolling Edits

63

precisely fine-tune each individual edit

Ripple Trimming
Multiple Edit Points 	

64Slide Edits

66

Replacing Clips

67

Audio Mixing

80

has accomplished about 80% of the“Ducking” the Music Levels

88

editing required for the promo, but

Adding the Logo

90

this should be accomplished quickly—

Adding the Closing Titles

96

within 20% of the available editing

Last Minute Changes

102

time. The remaining 20% of the editing

Full Screen Review

106

Quick Export

108

Lesson Review

111

like this is often enough. However, formany editors this is only the beginning.
Now that the basic structure of theso that the piece is as polished as it canpossibly be.
To appropriate the 80/20 rule: therough cut you created in Lesson 1(the trimming, audio mixing, graphics,etc.) will then take up the remaining
80% of the time! As you can see, thejob is far from finished!

Of course, part of the job of the editor is to deliver the final project to meet a deadline—
you wouldn’t want to miss the movie’s opening night!—so it’s not surprising that many feelthat a job is never really “completed”; it’s more that you just run out of time and money!

Setting Up the ProjectThis lesson starts exactly where Lesson 1 finished. If you completed Lesson 1, you may
proceed to the next section in this lesson: Duplicating the Timeline.
If, however, you didn’t fully complete the previous lesson, you can always import a catchup
timeline to help you get started with this lesson.

NOTE The following steps assume that you have at least completed the first part ofLesson 1 and that you have set up a new project library, imported the OMO Promo(Organ Mountain Outfitters promo) project file, and relinked the offline media. If
you haven’t completed those steps, please refer to the start of Lesson 1 before
continuing with the steps below.

1

Open DaVinci Resolve and, in the Project Manager, double-click the OMO Promo
project to open it in DaVinci Resolve.

2

If necessary, ensure that the edit page is selected.

3

In the bin list, select the TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline.

4

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 02/Timelines, select the fileOMO Promo Catchup 4.drt, and click Open.
The timeline is imported into the selected bin in your project and automatically opens
in the timeline viewer. You can now continue with this lesson.

54

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutDuplicating the TimelineIt’s generally good practice to duplicate your current timeline before you start making
major changes because if you (or your client/director) don’t like the subsequent changes
you make, you always have a backup copy of the timeline to return to.
1

Choose Timeline > Find Current Timeline in Media Pool to quickly reveal the currently
active timeline in its bin.

2

Right-click the current timeline and choose Duplicate Timeline.

A copy of the timeline appears in the same bin.

Duplicating the Timeline

55This duplicate of your active timeline has the same name but with the word copy added
to the end to signify this is the duplicated timeline.

TIP If you cannot read the timeline’s whole name in the media pool, use theslider to resize the thumbnails.

Many editors often like to rename the duplicated timeline, usually replacing “copy”
with a version number (v1, v2, v3, etc.) so they know what they are looking at in the bin.
However, if you leave the name of the duplicated timeline as is, subsequent duplicationof the original timeline will result in the name of the new duplicated timeline being
incrementally increased (copy, copy 1, copy 2, etc.). This is a useful technique since,
firstly, it always means the version of the timeline you’re working on is the latest, and,secondly, the automatic names of the duplicated timelines can help to “backtrack” to aprevious version of the timeline if needed.

NOTE Projects may contain many timelines. You can use bins to help organize
these duplicated timelines so that you always know which timeline you should
be working on. Alternatively, you can always disable a timeline you’re not usingby right-clicking the timeline in the media pool and choosing Disable Timeline.
Disabled timelines cannot be opened without first re-enabling them, and they
won’t appear in the timeline viewer dropdown list.

With a backup copy of your timeline in your bin, you can now continue to finesse the
OMO promo.

56

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutThe Editor’s Art
Trimming is the term given to adjusting a clip’s In and Out points once it is in thetimeline and is arguably the most import skill an editor possesses. Trimming allows
you to adjust the start of a clip, the end of a clip, the start and end of a clip, or, incertain circumstances, the start and end of other timeline clips.
DaVinci Resolve has one of the most flexible, fully featured trimming toolsets
of any nonlinear editor (NLE), allowing you to perform complex timeline
adjustments intuitively and precisely. As such, over the next few lessons you
will become increasingly familiar with what trimming can help you achieve in
different circumstances.
Beyond simply cutting a clip and removing large sections of unwanted footage,
trimming in DaVinci Resolve generally occurs in one of two timeline modes:
Selection mode and Trim Edit mode.
Selection mode allows you to move clips around the timeline and adjust theirdurations simply and easily. This is the most intuitive way to begin trimming clips in
Resolve’s timeline.
Trim Edit mode unlocks the true power of the trimming functions. In this mode,
you can ripple edit points, as well as slip the content of a shot and slide theposition of a shot in relation to its neighboring clips.
All the trimming features in Resolve can also be applied to multiple clips or
multiple edit points simultaneously and can be made by clicking and dragging withyour mouse or using keyboard shortcuts for the utmost precision.
Both Selection mode and Trim Edit mode can also be used in conjunction with
the Dynamic Trim mode. You’ll learn more about dynamic trimming in Lesson 4,“Cutting a Dramatic Scene.”

Duplicating the Timeline57

Trimming the Timeline Clips
In the previous lesson, you added a series of cutaways to paint the interview by adding
In and Out points to the timeline and quickly editing the B-roll footage using the Place on
Top edit. Following the steps in the lesson, you didn’t spend much time reviewing eachof those edits as you made them, focusing instead on just getting the material into thetimeline. Now, though, you can start to consider how those shots are working together,trimming each one as appropriate.
You will begin by trimming some of the clips in the OMO Promo timeline using Selection mode.
1

Place the timeline playhead at the beginning of the first interview clip and review the
first group of cutaways on the V2 track.

The edit is functional but feels a little loose, especially coming out of the interview clip
into the first cutaway of the friends walking up the path in the foothills.

58

2

Return the playhead to the start of the first clip on V2.

3

Click the Detail Zoom button to zoom in on the playhead position in the timeline.

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

4

Select the clip on V2 to select it and drag it backward by about a second (-01:00 in
the tooltip).

Unfortunately, moving the clip like this has left a gap in the cutaways, which
disconcertingly cuts back to the underlying clip of Chris’s interview on V1. You will needto trim the start of the next clip on V2 to fill this gap.
5

Click the start of the second clip on V2 and drag backward until it snaps to the end of
the previous clip.

This process has lengthened the second clip by one second to fill the gap created
when you moved the first clip.
6

Return the playhead to the start of the first interview clip, and play to review thechanges you’ve just made.
Simply bringing the first cutaway in slightly earlier makes the edit feel a little “tighter,”but the edit point between the first and second cutaway clips now feels a little more
awkward because you’ve changed the point at which the second clip now starts.
To refine this edit point, you will slip each shot in turn using Trim Edit mode.

Trimming the Timeline Clips

59

7

Click the Trim Edit Mode button in the timeline toolbar, or press T.

The Trim Edit button turns red to indicate that Trim Edit is now the selected timeline
mode. You will also see that the mouse pointer has changed from the arrow of
Selection mode to a trim symbol.
8

Move your mouse pointer over the first cutaway clip on V2.

The Trim Edit mode is contextual, meaning that it will have different functions
depending on where you place your cursor. When you place your mouse pointer overthe middle of the clip, the trim symbol changes to a slip icon to reflect the type of trim
you are about to perform.
9With the slip icon displayed, click the clip and drag left in the timeline.

This time, because you are in Trim Edit mode, the clip does not move in the timeline.
Instead, you will see that you are slipping the clip within its own In and Out points!
The timeline viewer has automatically changed to a 4-up multi-view preview of thechange you’re making.

60

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutThe top two images show the start and end (the In and Out points) of the currently
selected clip, and the bottom two images show the last frame of the previous timeline
clip (Chris’s interview on V1) and the first frame of the following timeline clip (thesecond cutaway on V2).
In the timeline itself, you will also see a white outline extending from the start and endof the clip being slipped.

This outline shows the available handles for that clip—that is, the portion of this clip
not currently being used in the timeline.
10 With the clip selected, drag to the left to slip the shot until the top-right image in themulti-view preview shows the guy in the red shirt stepping forward with his left leg
forward (about -00:15 in the tooltip), and then play the first clip on V2 to review the change.
Once again, by changing this first clip, you’ve arguably made the cut to the second
cutaway shot even worse!

Trimming the Timeline Clips

61

11 Select the second cutaway clip and slip it to the left by about 1 second (-01:00 in thetooltip) so that the top-left image in the muti-view preview has the same guy with hisleft leg extended in a similar manner.

TIP You can use the lower-left image (which now shows the last frame of theprevious timeline clip) to help visually match the two shots.

12 Return the timeline playhead to the beginning of the first interview clip on V1 and playback to review the changes you’ve just made.
Even though you haven’t adjusted the timing of the gap between the two interview
clips on V1, by trimming and finessing the edit between the cutaway shots, the edit
feels slightly tighter as a result.

NOTE More often than not, you will find that you need to use different
trimming operations in combination. In the previous steps, you trimmed thestart of one clip but then needed to slip both clips to refine how the first shot
cut to the second. As you will see, this is common to most trimming operations.

62

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Rolling Edits
Another useful trimming function is the roll edit, which allows you to reposition an edit
point by trimming two neighboring clips at the same time.
1

Position the timeline playhead at the start of the second cutaway on the V2 track,
PINE TRAIL WALKING, and play the next four cutaways.
The shot of the four friends smiling for the camera, WHITE SANDS LAUGHING FRIENDS,
is a little short when viewed in context with the other cutaways.

2

Place you mouse pointer over the center of the edit, so it displays the roll icon.

3

Click to select both sides of the edit: the Out of the second clip (referred to as theoutgoing clip) and the In of the third clip (referred to as the incoming clip).

4

Trim the selected edit to the right for about a second (+01:00 in the tooltip).

This rolling trim adds 1 second to the outgoing clip but also trims 1 second off theincoming clip, so it doesn’t leave a gap.

NOTE You can use either Selection mode or Trim Edit mode to roll edits; thefunctionality is the same in either mode.

Rolling Edits

63

5

Return the timeline playhead to the start of the WHITE SANDS FRIEND clip and review
the change you’ve just made.

6

Now that the timing of each of the cutaways seems to work better, click the Full Extent
Zoom button to zoom out and see the entire timeline.

Ripple Trimming
Multiple Edit Points
Another powerful function of the timeline’s Trim Edit mode is the ability to ripple edit points.
Rippling edits is very useful when you want to refine the timing or pacing of shots because,
unlike with Selection mode, the changes you make ripple through the rest of the timeline.
In the current edit, you can use a ripple edit to adjust the pacing of the gaps between theinterview clips.
1

With Trim Edit mode still selected, click to the left of the start of the third interview
clip on V1.

This will the select the “outgoing” part of the gap.
2

Drag the selected edit point to the right to begin lengthening the gap.

As you do this, you’ll notice that all the other clips starting after the selected edit are also
being adjusted based on the change you’re making. This is the power of ripple edits.

64

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutHowever, the clip covering the gap between the second and third interview clips isn’t
included in this change because it starts before the selected edit. As a result, the clip’s
duration and position remain unchanged, so you will end up cutting back to Chris’sinterview at a different place!
While it should be no problem to simply roll the end of the cutaway of the guy on therock, sometimes it’s easier to trim multiple edit points together.
3

Release the mouse and choose Edit > Undo to undo any changes that you might havemade to this edit.

TIP You can view a complete list of the steps you can undo and redo bychoosing Edit > History > Open History Window.

4

With the end of the gap still selected, Command-click (macOS) or Ctrl-click (Windows)
the end of the fifth clip on V2.

By selecting both of these edit points, you can now trim them together.
5

Drag the selected edit on V2 to the right to add about 1 second to the duration of thisclip and the selected gap below.

6

With the edits still selected, choose Playback > Play Around/To > Play Around Current
Selection or press / (forward slash) to review the change.

Ripple Trimming Multiple Edit Points

65

Slide Edits
The fourth type of trim that you can make in Trim Edit mode is the slide edit. Slide edits
are probably the least used type of trimming operations, but it’s still useful to know thatthey’re available to you.
Like a slip edit, slide edits are made to selected clips, but they actually affect the outgoingand incoming clips on either side of the selected clip(s).
1Ensure that the timeline is still in Trim Edit mode and place your mouse pointer overthe lower part of second of the final three middle cutaways, where you can read thename of the clip, STORE HANGING SHIRT.

When in Trim Edit mode, the cursor changes to the slide icon when placed over aclip’s name bar.
2

With the slide icon displayed, select the STORE HANGING SHIRT clip and drag right,
pressing N to disable snapping if necessary to slide the clip by 1 second (+01:00 in
the tooltip).

TIP When you disable snapping by pressing N when in the middle of adjustinga clip like this, snapping will be automatically re-enabled when you release
the mouse.

66

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

3

Ripple the start of the STORE EXTERIOR SIGN clip forward by a second (-01:00 on
the tooltip).

By ripple trimming the start of the clip on V2, all clips that start after this point will
also be rippled. This has the effect of increasing the duration of the gap below the
STORE EXTERIOR SIGN clip.
Excellent! You should now have a fuller understanding of how the Trim Edit mode
functions in practice.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 02/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 5.drt
and click Open.

Replacing Clips
Another useful function that can help finesse the edit is using the Replace edit toquickly change an existing clip in the timeline for alternative takes or even completely
different shots.
To begin with, you will use the Replace edit to change the camera angles used for the
portions of Chris’s interview that are still in view. You will start with the last interview clip,
which you will replace with a close-up shot.

NOTE The following examples use clips that have matching timecode to aid thereplacing of clips. This is not the same as using the full multicam editing workflow.
You’ll explore how to sync, cut, and switch between the different angles ofmulticamera footage in Lesson 5, “Multicamera Editing.”

Replacing Clips

67

1

Place the timeline playhead so that it snaps to the end of the cutaway over the final
interview clip.

2

In the timeline viewer, right-click the current timecode field and choose
Source Timecode.

The current timecode field now displays the source timecode for the currently
displayed clip in the timeline.

68

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

3

Right-click the source timecode field and choose Copy Timecode.

4

In the media pool, select the B CAM bin.

5

From the name of the interview clip in the timeline, SUBCLIP A 007 Tagline, you canidentify that this sound bite comes from take “007” of the full interview.

6

Open the clip OMO_B_007 into the source viewer.

Replacing Clips

69

7

Right-click the source viewer’s current timecode field and choose Paste Timecode.

The playhead jumps directly to the pasted timecode in the source viewer.

70

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

TIP You can see the current source timecode for each clip at the current
playhead position by selecting the timeline viewer’s Options menu (three dotsmenu) and choosing Show Timecode Overlays.

While these overlays are for reference only and cannot be copied directly, you
can use them to check the source timecode for the clip on a specific track andthen manually type the timecode in the source viewer’s current timecode field.

Before you go further, note that the Replace edit is a powerful editing function, but it
does not follow the standard rules of three-point editing. The Replace edit uses the
position of the two playheads in the source and timeline viewers to determine how thesource clip should be aligned in the timeline and, in the absence of any timeline In or
Out points, will use the timeline clip’s start and end points to determine the durationof the clip.
It can be a little confusing at first, but remember that the Replace edit is the first of
the four-point edits you can perform in DaVinci Resolve’s edit page: the two playheads
being the first two points and the timeline clip’s start and end points being the second
two points.

Replacing Clips

71

NOTE Replace edits will always ignore any In or Out points set in thesource viewer.

8

Drag the clip from the source viewer to Replace in the timeline viewer overlays.

The close-up from the B camera replaces the wide shot in the timeline, with the source
and timeline viewers now both displaying the same frame.

9

Press / (forward slash) to preview the new clip in the timeline.
As if by magic, the audio and video of the sound bite clip you originally edited into
the timeline has been replaced with the audio and video of the slightly closer camera
angle! Such is the power of the Replace edit.

72

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutReplacing Part of a Clip
You can also use the Replace edit to replace a portion of a clip in the timeline in acouple of ways.
1

Place the timeline playhead in the middle of the third interview clip, just after Chrissays, “…we take that inspiration….”

2

In the timeline toolbar, click the Blade Edit mode or press B.

3

Place the mouse pointer over the interview clip so that the Blade mode snaps to thetimeline playhead.

4

Click the clip to add an edit point.

Replacing Clips73

5

Click the timeline viewer’s timecode field and press Command-C (macOS) or Ctrl-C(Windows) to copy the source timecode for the interview clip.

6

From the C CAM bin, open the OMO_C_005 clip in the source viewer.

7

Select the timecode field in the source viewer and press Command-V (macOS) or
Ctrl-V (Windows).

8

Click the Replace Clip button in the timeline toolbar or press F11 to replace thetimeline clip after the edit.

NOTE On macOS systems, you might need to make a further change to thedefault keyboard functions in order to use F11 as the shortcut for Replace edits.
Open System Preferences and choose Keyboard > Shortcuts > Mission Control,and either deselect or change the shortcut used for Show Desktop.

74

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

9Press / (forward slash) to preview the edit. If necessary, select Trim Edit mode and rollthe edit point to refine the position of the cut.

You can also use timeline In and Out points in conjunction with the Replace edit to limit
the amount of footage replaced in the timeline, and use the track destination controls
to specify whether to replace the video or audio parts of a clip.
10 Press A to select Selection mode or click the Selection mode button in thetimeline toolbar.
11 Play the first interview clip and add an In point just before Chris says, “… store in
Las Cruces….”
12 Choose Playback > Go To > Last Frame, or press ’ (apostrophe), to jump to the last
frame of this clip and add an Out point.

Unfortunately, you can’t simply copy the source timecode as you did previously
because the cutaway clip is being displayed—so the source timecode is actually thesource timecode for the PINE TRAIL WALKING clip. Instead, you will perform a Match
Frame to open the interview clip’s source clip in the source viewer.
13 Select the first interview clip in the timeline and choose Clip > Match Frame to Source
Clip or press F.

NOTE Alternatively, you can select the Match Frame button to the right of theTimeline viewer’s controls.

Replacing Clips

75

The source clip for the interview clip in the timeline opens in the source viewer at thesame frame as the playhead in the timeline.

14 Select the current timecode field in the source viewer and press Command-C (macOS)
or Ctrl-C (Windows) to copy the current timecode.
15 From the C CAM bin, open the OMO_C_002 clip into the source viewer and paste thecopied timecode into the current timecode field.

76

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutBecause you only want to use the video of this clip, you need to specify that the audio
shouldn’t be used to replace the audio already in the timeline.
16 In the timeline track headers, click the destination control for source audio A1, or press
Command-Option-1 (macOS) or Ctrl-Alt-1 (Windows).

17 Press F11 to make the Replace edit, replacing only the video part of the clip in the timeline.

Placing In and Out points in the timeline allows you to limit the amount of footage
being replaced. By using the additional camera angles of the interview, you have also
introduced more visual variety to the edit.

Specifying Destination Tracks
In the previous lesson, you started by editing a series of clips on to the first video andaudio tracks in the timeline: Video 1 and Audio 1. The clips you subsequently added as
cutaways were edited on to additional tracks (Video 2 and Audio 2, and then Audio 3 forthe music) using the Place on Top edit, which automatically created those additional tracks
as they were needed.
However, if you wish to edit directly to an existing track, you will need to specify that trackusing the destination controls in the timeline track headers.

Replacing Clips

77

1

Place the timeline playhead at the start of the fifth clip on V2, PENA BLANCAJUMPING ROCKS, and add an In point.

2

Add an Out point about 2 seconds later, as the guy reaches the top of the rock.

3

From the ACTIVITIES smart bin, open the clip PENA BLANCA LOOKOUT into thesource viewer and locate a frame about halfway through the clip that most closely
matches the frame in the timeline viewer.

You now need to target the appropriate track in the timeline.

78

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

4

In the timeline track header, click the V2 destination control to target the video source(V1) to the Video 2 track, or press Option-2 (macOS) or Alt-2 (Windows).

TIP A series of commands for changing the various video and audio
destination controls can be found by choosing Timeline > Track
Destination Selection.

5

Press F11 to perform a Replace edit directly on the Video 2 track.

6

Press / (forward slash) to preview the edit you’ve just made.
An advantage of using the Replace edit, rather than a backtimed Overwrite edit, is thatyou don’t need to add any In or Out points in the source viewer. Indeed, any In or Out
points in the source viewer will be ignored whenever you make a Replace edit. Also,
when you perform Replace edits, the source and timeline playheads can be placedon frames outside the In and Out points in the timeline, but the portion of the source
footage replaced within the In and Out points will be calculated from the offset of the
In and Out points from the playheads.

7

Right-click the timeline viewer’s timecode field and choose Record Timecode to return
to displaying the timeline’s timecode value.

Replacing Clips

79

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 02/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 6.drt
and click Open.

Audio Mixing
So far in this lesson, you have primarily continued to refine the video clips in the timeline,
and the nature of editing means that you can continue making similar adjustments as
you see fit, whether it be replacing shots entirely or in part, or trimming clips to refine thepacing, timing, and duration of the edit. However, at some point you need to switch yourfocus to other parts of the edit that need your attention, especially if you’re going to deliver
the edit to the client in good time!
As the edit seems to be progressing well, it’s time to turn your attention to the audio in
the timeline.
In many cases, you can spend as much time refining and finessing the audio in the timeline
as you can the video. Over the next steps, you’ll use some common techniques to ensurethat you can mix your audio to the correct levels efficiently and effectively. You will start bynormalizing Chris’s interview levels.

NOTE You’ll learn more advanced audio editing and mixing techniques in Lesson 8,“Audio Editing and Mixing.”

1

Click the Mixer button at the top right of the interface to display the mixer to the rightof the timeline.

80

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

TIP If you’re struggling for room on your display, click the Media Pool buttonin the top left of the interface to close the media pool and reclaim somescreen space.

2

Click the Mute button for track A3 in the timeline track controls or the Mixer so themusic doesn’t play. This lets you to focus on the audio levels of Chris’s interview clips.

3

Play the timeline from the start, observing the levels of the clips on track A1 in
the mixer.

Audio Mixing

81Even though the audio for these clips is from the same interview, there is still a lotof inconsistency in the levels, with some clips peaking as loud as -3 dBFS and otherspeaking as low as -18 dBFS.
4

Select all the clips on the A1 track, and then right-click any of the selected clips andchoose Normalize Audio Levels.

The Normalize Audio Level window appears with several options for normalizing theaudio levels of the selected clips.

5

Leave the Normalization Mode set to Sample Peak Level and the Target Level set to thedefault of -9 dBFS.
The Normalization Mode dropdown menu allows you to choose the method used todetermine how each clip’s volume level will be normalized. Options include a varietyof loudness normalization algorithms specific to various international standards,
which are useful for balancing the perceived overall loudness of several clips to one
another, regardless of transient levels throughout each clip. You can also perform Peaknormalization, with options for both Sample Peak and True Peak. Whichever method
you choose, the result is largely the same: each clip’s audio level is analyzed and thenadjusted to the various peak and/or loudness levels specified.

82

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

6Change the Set Level option to Independent.

When Set Level is set to Relative, all selected clips are treated as if they’re one clip, sothat the highest peak and/or loudness level of all the selected clips is used to define
the adjustment, and the volume of all selected clips is adjusted by the same amount.
When Set Level is set to Independent, the peak and/or loudness levels of each clip isused to define the adjustment to that specific clip. This is likely to result in different
volume adjustments to each clip to make the peak and/or loudness levels of eachaudio clip better match one another. Relative is useful if you’re normalizing a seriesof clips that have a consistent recorded level, such as a controlled dialogue recording,whereas Independent is much more useful if you’re trying to balance a series of clips
that have different recorded levels (subtle or not), such as interviews or other location
audio, which might have been recorded under less-controlled conditions.
7

Click Normalize.
The audio levels for the selected clips are adjusted so that the peak level for each clip
hits -9 dBFS on the audio meters.

Audio Mixing

83

8

To verify, play through the timeline again, looking at the levels of the A1 track inthe mixer.
Each clip now plays at a more consistent level but not necessarily completely
consistently because it depends on the consistency at which the original audio levels
were recorded! For example, the first and fifth interview clips are both generally
around 6 dB lower than the other clips. This is because both clips have a larger peak attheir starts, which affects how the rest of the clip has been normalized.

9

Zoom in on the first clip on A1 so you clearly see the audio waveform.

10 Option-click (macOS) or Alt-click (Windows) the volume bar twice to add two keyframes
just after the first large peak, but before the second lower peak.

11 Click and hold the volume bar after the second keyframe to see the current leveladjustment applied to the clip by the Normalization process.

84

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutThe tooltip shows an adjustment of about -3 dB. To bring the level of the rest of thisclip back in line with the other clips, you need to apply a +6 dB adjustment, bringing
the adjustment up from -3 dB to +3 dB.
12 Drag the volume bar up until the tooltip reads about 3 dB.

13 Repeat the process on the fifth clip on A1, SUBCIP A 008 Brand - Chris, adding the
keyframes just after the first large peak, and bringing the level after the second
keyframe up to around 4 dB.

Congratulations! You have successfully normalized and balanced the interview clips.

Using Keyframes to Remove Unwanted Audio
You can also use audio keyframes to help you remove unwanted sounds.
1

Play the last interview clip on track A1, OMO_B_007, listening carefully after Chris says,“That’s why we say….”
You can hear an unwanted clapping sound as he lowers his hands to his knees (thisaction is covered by the cutaway of the store exterior).

Audio Mixing85

2

Zoom in on the clip in the timeline so you can clearly see the waveform and identify theslight peak created by the clap.

3

Option-click (macOS) or Alt-click (Windows) the volume bar to add two keyframes justafter Chris’s first sound bite and just before the second, and a third above the peakmade by the clap.

4

Drag the middle keyframe down to reduce the level of the clap so that you no longer
hear it in the mix.

86

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Setting Levels of SOT Clips
You can also apply normalization to effects clips, such as those on track A2. This type ofaudio is often referred to as SOT, short for “sound on tape,” an anachronistic term used torefer to audio recorded on a camera.
1

Select the two clips on track A2, right-click either of them, and choose Normalize
Audio Levels.

2

In the Normalize Audio Level window, change the Target Level to -18 dBFS, a level morein keeping with sound effects, or SOT clips, and click Normalize.

The clips are normalized to the desired level.
3

Add two keyframes to the first of the SOT clips, just before Chris’s second interview
clip, and raise the first part of this clip by about 6 dB (from about 12 dB to 18 dB in thetooltip), so you can hear more of the walkers’ footsteps between Chris’s interview clips.

4

Use the fade-in handle to fade in the first SOT clip over about a second.

Audio Mixing87

5

Use the fade-out handle to fade out the second SOT clip over about a second.

These last few changes mean the SOT clips are now working well with the audio fromChris’s interview. Next, you’ll need to bring the music back into the mix.

“Ducking” the Music Levels
The final touch you will apply to the audio for this edit is to mix in the music with the restof the timeline audio, reducing the volume level of the music during interviews or otherdialogue clips—a technique referred to as ducking.
The music’s audio level is currently set at -18 dB, which is a good starting point for themusic in relation to the levels of the interview clips. Having already set these levels, you’ll
want to simply raise the audio in the gaps between Chris’s sound bites.
1

Click the Mute button for A3 in the timeline track controls or the Mixer to re-enable
the audio for the music, and play the timeline from the beginning, listening to how themusic sounds next to the interview audio.

2

Add two keyframes to the music clip near to where Chris’s first sound bite begins.

3

Drag the volume bar before the first of these two keyframes up by about 6 dB (toabout -12 dB in the tooltip).

Play the beginning of the timeline again to hear the music duck under Chris’sinterview audio.

88

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

4

Repeat the process, adding two keyframes to the music clip at the end of Chris’s final
sound bite, increasing the level of the clip after the second keyframe by about 6 dB
so that the music swells after Chris recites the tagline for this video: “…experience thesouthwest.” Play back this part of the timeline to review the change.

There are several other gaps in Chris’s interview where you can also increase the levelof the music.
5

Hold Option (macOS) or Alt (Windows) and click to add four keyframes to the music cliparound the gap between Chris’s first and second interview clips.

6

Drag the volume bar between the second and third of these keyframes to raise thelevel of that part of the audio clip by about 6 dB.

7

Repeat the process to raise the music during the other gaps between theinterview clips.

You can now review the timeline from the beginning to hear the music duck under
Chris’s sound bite clips. Once you’re happy with each of the clips’ levels, you can also
close the Mixer window.

“Ducking” the Music Levels

89NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 02/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 7.drt
and click Open.

Adding the Logo
The edit is nearly finished. Just before you apply the finishing touches though, you’ll needto add the Organ Mountain Outfitters logo to the opening shot and some titles to theclosing shot featuring a “call to action” to encourage the viewer to visit the Organ Mountain
Outfitter’s website as well as emphasizing the tagline, “Experience the Southwest.”
1

In the timeline, position the playhead over the first clip, ORGAN MOUNTAIN TL.mov,
and then choose Playback > Go To > Last Frame or press ’ (apostrophe) to jump to thelast frame of this clip.

90

2

Press O to set an Out point at this frame in the timeline.

3

From the GRAPHICS bin, open the clip OMO LOGO.png in the source viewer.

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

NOTE If you closed the media pool previously, then you’ll need to open it byclicking the Media Pool button in the top left of the interface.

4

Click the Overwrite Clip button in the timeline toolbar, or press F10, to overwrite theclip on to the targeted track (V2).

NOTE If V1 is currently the targeted track, you can change the destination
control or perform a Place on Top edit instead of the Overwrite.

DaVinci Resolve can work with various graphic file formats as well as video and audio
files. When using graphic files, the clips have a default “duration” of 5 seconds, which
was enough for the backtimed edit you just performed in the previous step. However,
because graphic files are simply the same frame repeated, the clip can be trimmed to
be as long or as short as you need it.

TIP You can adjust this default “duration” used for graphics or still images in
the User Preferences > Editing category under “Standard still duration.”5

In the timeline, drag the fade handle at the start of the clip to the right to apply a
12-frame fade in (+00:12 in the tooltip).

Adding the Logo

91

6

Place the timeline playhead over the OMO LOGO.png clip and in the top left of theinterface, click the Effects button to open the Effects Library below the media pool.
The Effects Library contains several built-in video and audio transitions, titles,
and generators.

7

Select the Open FX category and scroll down to the Resolve FX Stylize group.

8

Double-click the Drop Shadow filter to apply the effect to the OMO LOGO.png clip in
the timeline.
The drop shadow helps the logo stand out from the background clip on V1. To adjust
the settings for this clip, you will need to use the controls available in the Inspector.

92

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

NOTE DaVinci Resolve automatically “selects” the clip on the highest track inthe timeline without the need for you to physically click and select it. Clicking
and selecting a clip will override this behavior, allowing you to manually choose
which clip the effect will be applied to. Alternatively, you can drag the filter
directly to any clip, or selected clips, in the timeline.

9

Click the Inspector button in the top right of the interface to open the Inspector to theright of the timeline viewer.

NOTE If you’re working on a small(ish) monitor, when you open the Inspector
Resolve might have to display the source and timeline viewers in single
viewer mode.

The Inspector is the place where you can access many settings for the clips in thetimeline or the media pool. You will learn how to use the Inspector in later lessons. For
now, all you need to do is adjust the Drop Shadow effect’s settings.
10 In the Inspector, click the Effects tab to reveal the controls for any effects applied tothe currently selected clip.

Adding the Logo

93

11 Reduce the Drop Distance to about 0.020 and the Blur to about 0.40 to create a moredefined shadow.

With the drop shadow applied and finessed, there’s one other useful effect you canapply to this graphic to provide some much needed motion.
12 In the Inspector, click the Video tab.
This tab in the Inspector allows you to adjust many common settings for the current
clip, including size and position. You will learn how to use these controls to create eyecatching effects in Lesson 7, “Compositing in the Edit Page.”
13 Enable the Dynamic Zoom and click to reveal the controls and change the Dynamic
Zoom Ease menu to Ease Out.

94

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Play the OMO LOGO.png clip in the timeline to review the dynamic zoom results, andnotice how the still image fades and zooms, coming to a gentle rest toward the endof the clip.
You can also choose to refine the start and end framing for the dynamic zoom.
14 Choose View > Viewer Overlay > Dynamic Zoom to reveal the onscreen controls for the
dynamic zoom.

TIP You can also reveal the controls in the viewer overlay by clicking theTransform Mode dropdown menu in the timeline viewer.

15 Adjust the starting framing for the dynamic zoom by dragging the corners of thegreen box out slightly, away from the edges of the graphic.

Adding the Logo95

16 Once you’re happy with the starting and ending framing of the dynamic zoom,
choose View > Viewer Overlay > Toggle On/Off or press Shift-` (grave accent) to turn off
the viewer overlays.
Excellent. By utilizing some of the built-in effects and controls in the Inspector, you havetaken a simple still image and used it to create an eye-catching opening for the promo.
You’ll learn more about how you can composite images in the edit page in Lesson 7.

Adding the Closing Titles
Next, it’s time to add the call to action using one of Resolve’s built-in Fusion Titles templates.
1

Scroll to the end of the timeline and play the final clip, ORGAN MOUNTAIN TIMELAPSE.
Using the audio waveforms as a guide, stop when you hear the final beat of the music.

2

In the Effects Library, select the Titles category and scroll through the list of Fusion
Titles to the Horizontal Line Reveal title.

TIP You can live preview each of the Fusion Titles.

96

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

You can’t open a title in the source directly from the Effects Library; you must edit
them directly to the timeline. But that doesn’t mean you can’t use three-point
editing techniques!
3

Drag the Horizontal Line Reveal title from the Effects Library to the timeline viewer toperform an Overwrite edit to the targeted video track (V2).

NOTE If your timeline is currently targeting the V1 track, you should use thePlace on Top edit.

4

Place the timeline playhead over the title clip in the timeline.

Adding the Closing Titles97

5

In the Inspector, select the SAMPLE UPPER text in the Upper Text Controls and typeorganmountainoutfitters.com.

6

Choose View > Safe Area > On.
The Safe Area is used to ensure that titles and graphics are properly displayed onscreens that have an overscan and is typically a requirement for broadcast programs.

7

98

Change the Upper Text Size to about 0.08 so the title fits within the inner title safe area.

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

TIP You can adjust the size of the action and title safe areas by enabling
Use Custom Safe Area Overlays in the Editing section of the User Preferences.

8

Scroll down in the Inspector to the Lower Text Controls, highlight the SAMPLE text andtype #experiencethesouthwest.

9

Adjust the Lower Text Spacing to about 1.09 so the text is about the same length
as the line.

TIP You can press Up Arrow and Down Arrow to adjust the values of a selected
field in the Inspector.

To make the text more eye-catching, you can adjust the colors.
10 Scroll back up to the Upper Text Controls.
11 Change the Type 1 option to Gradient.

Adding the Closing Titles99

12 In the Shading Gradient 1, click the left triangle control and change the color to arich orange.

13 Click the right gradient triangle and change the color to warm yellow.

14 Scroll to the bottom of the Inspector to the Line Color controls.
15 Change the Type menu to Gradient to reveal similar controls.
16 Click the left gradient control and adjust the color to a deep orange.

100

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

17 Select the right gradient control and adjust the color to a warm yellow.

18 Click the Settings tab at the top of the Inspector.
19 Change the Y Position value to about -360.00 to move the title down in the timelineviewer but still inside the inner title safe area.

Adding the Closing Titles101

20 In the timeline, use the title clip’s fade handle to apply a 12-frame fade out (-00:12 in
the tooltip).

21 Trim the end of the ORGAN MOUNTAIN TL.mov clip on V1 so it snaps to the end of
the audio clip on A3 and apply a 1-second fade out (-01:00 on the tooltip).

22 Choose View > Safe Area > On to toggle the safe area overlay off.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 02/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup 8.drt
and click Open.

Last Minute Changes
The edit for the OMO Promo is very nearly complete and nearly ready for the client toreview. In fact, you’ve just got the call that they are on their way to you now! But with a few
minutes to spare, you can make some final adjustments.

102

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough CutStabilizing Shots
You will start by stabilizing the shot of the guy on the rocks.
1

In the timeline, play the second clip of the guy standing on the rock looking out overthe mountains, PENA BLANCA JUMPING ROCKS.
This clip is looking great, but the shake from the handheld camera is quite noticeable
and is detracting from an otherwise great shot.

2

Place your playhead over the clip in the timeline and, in the Inspector, open the
Stabilize controls and click the Stabilize button.

Resolve analyzes the clip and attempts to stabilize the shot. Once the analysis hascompleted, play the shot to review the changes.
The shot seems to be a little less shaky, but it doesn’t completely smooth thecamera movement.
3

Increase the Smooth control to about 0.900 and click the Stabilize button again to
apply the changes.

The increased smoothing value helps to reduce the camera shake even further,resulting in a much-improved shot.

Last Minute Changes

103Changing Clip Speed
Another quick adjustment you can apply is to change the speed at which a shot plays back.
1

Place the timeline playhead over the clip PENA BLANCA FIRE DANCER and, in the
Inspector, open the Speed Change controls.

2

Change the Speed % value to 50.00 to play back the clip at 50%.

NOTE You’ll learn how to make more sophisticated speed changes in Lesson 7.

104

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Adding Transitions
Finally, just as you hear the client’s footsteps approaching, there’s just enough time to add
some video transitions to the final clips.
1

In the timeline, select the edit point between the last interview clip and the
ORGAN MOUNTAIN TIMELAPSE clip.

2

In the Effects Library, select the Video Transitions group and double-click the Cross
Dissolve transition to apply it to the selected edit point.

3

Select the transition in the timeline and press Command-D (macOS) or Ctrl-D(Windows) to open the Change Transition Duration window.

Last Minute Changes

105

4

Click the Change Duration field and type 12, and then click Change to change theduration of the selected transition to 12 frames.

5

Press Command-C (macOS) or Ctrl-C (Windows) to copy the selected transition.

6

Press T to switch to Trim Edit mode and click and drag a selection window across thetwo edit points between the final three cutaway clips on V2 to select them.

7

Press Command-V (macOS) or Ctrl-V (Windows) to paste the copied transition to theselected edit points.
Just in time! The client has arrived with lattes in hand and is taking their place, readyfor the big screening!

Full Screen Review
Congratulations! You have successfully edited a short but polished promotional clip for
Organ Mountain Outfitters. However, before you deliver the final file that will be uploaded
to their social media channels, there’s an opportunity to watch the whole thing back at fullscreen. This can be very useful because it will allow you (and the client) to see the results ofyour efforts without being distracted by the “editing paraphernalia” of the interface.

106

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

1Choose Workspace > Viewer Mode > Cinema Viewer or press Command-F (macOS) or
Ctrl-F (Windows).

DaVinci Resolve displays the current timeline in full screen. Simple onscreen navigationand playback controls are available as an overlay.

TIP You can still use the keyboard shortcuts you’re familiar with to navigate
around the timeline in the Cinema Viewer. Use Home to return to the start ofthe edit, J, K, and L for playback, etc.

2

Use the onscreen controls to return to the start and begin playback. The controls andyour mouse pointer will disappear after a few seconds.

3

When you’ve finished watching your masterpiece, move the mouse slightly to display
the controls again and click the Exit Fullscreen button, or press Esc (Escape), to returnto the full Resolve interface.
Playing back your timeline like this gives you an opportunity to see your edit the same
way as your viewers will. Watch carefully and see if there are any parts of the edit thatmight benefit from additional changes. If so, now is the time to make those adjustments.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lessons/Lesson 02/Timelines and select OMO Promo Catchup
FINISHED.drt and click Open.

Full Screen Review

107Quick Export
The client loves the edit and is happy to sign off on your work. Now, the only step left is
to export the edited timeline so it can be posted to popular streaming and social media
websites as quickly as possible. You can accomplish all this quickly using DaVinci Resolve’s
Quick Export feature.
1

Choose File > Quick Export.

The Quick Export window includes commonly used presets for creating a video file ofyour currently open timeline, including uploading directly to common social media andsharing sites including YouTube, Vimeo, Twitter, or Dropbox.

NOTE DaVinci Resolve Studio provides additional options for sharing via thevideo review services Dropbox Replay and Frame.io.

2

108

Select the YouTube option.

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

This preset contains all the settings needed to create a file and upload it directly toYouTube. However, if you haven’t already input your account information, you’ll just see
a Manage Account button.
3

Click the Manage Account button if you haven’t already input your account information
for YouTube.

Clicking the Manage Account button opens the DaVinci Resolve System Preferenceswith the Internet Accounts panel selected where you can enter account information toallow DaVinci Resolve to upload directly to these web services on your behalf.

TIP You can also access these preferences by choosing DaVinci Resolve >Preferences > Internet Accounts.

To sign in to any of your accounts for these sharing sites, click the Sign In button for
the appropriate service and follow the directions to enter your account informationand give DaVinci Resolve the relevant permissions. When you’ve completed the signin process, the Quick Export window will now show an Upload Directly checkbox.
Selecting this allows you to enter a title, privacy settings, and a description.
Instead of uploading directly to a video sharing service, though, you might just want tocreate a stand-alone file. You can then manually upload the file instead or distribute itin other ways.

Quick Export

109

4

Click Cancel to return to the Quick Export window and select the H.264 Master preset.

5

Click Export, choose a location where you want the movie to be saved on yourcomputer, and then click Save.

TIP By default, the exported file will have the same name as the timeline
you’re outputting, but you can also rename the exported video at this stage
if necessary.

A render progress window shows the time to completion and, if appropriate, theupload progress for the movie. Once the render progress bar has completed, close the
Quick Export progress window and you will find the exported video in the location you
chose for it, so you can open it in your computer’s default video player.
Congratulations! Over these first two lessons, you have successfully put together a short,
yet complex, promo using the editing toolset available to you in DaVinci Resolve’s edit
page. Hopefully, these lessons have given you some insights into how these tools function
and how you can start to use them in your own work. However, this is just the beginningof your editing journey. Throughout the rest of this book, additional lessons will help
you explore how to use DaVinci Resolve to edit a variety of genres—from interviews anddramatic footage to complex multicamera events.
For the moment though, take a breath….and enjoy that latte.

110

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Lesson Review
1Which timeline mode(s) allow you to trim the start or end of a clip in the timeline?
a) Selection modeb) Trim Edit modec) Blade Edit mode

2

Which timeline mode(s) allow you to slip a clip in the timeline?
a) Selection modeb) Trim Edit modec) Blade Edit mode

3

True or false? The Replace edit uses the position of the timeline and source viewer
playheads but always ignores In and Out points in the timeline.

4

Which modifier key is used to add keyframes to a clip’s volume bar in the timeline?

5

Where do you sign in to supported video sharing services to be able to upload yourvideo automatically?
a) Quick Export windowb) Sharing tab in the Inspectorc) Internet Accounts in System Preferences

Lesson Review

111

Answers
1a) and b). Selection and Trim Edit modes can be used to trim the start and end of a clip
in the timeline.

2b). Trim Edit mode allows you to slip a clip in the timeline by adjusting the In and Out
point of the clip at the same time.

3

False. The Replace edit will use In and Out points in the timeline to limit the amountreplaced, but will always ignore any In or Out points in the source viewer.

4

Option-click (macOS) or Alt-click (Windows) will allow you to add a keyframe to an audio
clip’s volume bar in the timeline.

5c). You sign in to supported video sharing services using the Internet Accounts sectionof the System Preferences, although you can access this part of the UI from the Quick
Export window.

112

Lesson 2

Refining the Rough Cut

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting
an Interview
Getting the very best out of yourinterviewee takes a lot of practice anda good ear for the spoken word.
When cutting interviews, it’s common

TimeThis lesson takes approximately
50 minutes to complete.

Goals

to initially create the best-sounding

Starting the Project

114

interview and almost completely

Using the Smooth Cut Transition117

disregard the visuals. This cut is

Importing a “Selects” Timeline

119

it’s similar to editing an audio-only

Working AcrossMultiple Timelines 	122interview. Once you have the interview

Refining the Radio Edit

128

Editing Between Timelines

132

Working with Stacked Timelines

139

Lesson Review

145

commonly called a radio edit because

audio cut properly, you can turn yourattention to the video edits, often
referred to as the paint because you
are illustrating, or “painting,” yourinterview with appropriate picturesfrom your B-roll rushes.
In this lesson, you’ll use advanced
audio and video trimming and other
DaVinci Resolve workflow features tofinish an engaging social media promo
piece for a 100% vegan restaurant,
Miss Rachel’s Pantry.

Starting the Project
You’ll begin this lesson by importing and opening a DaVinci Resolve project that has mostof the radio edit already edited but includes some clips in which the audio hasn’t been
examined for clarity. You’ll play the clips and then begin to identify and remove the small
stutters and stray “umms” to get the best sound bites from the interviewee.
1

In the Project Manager, right-click and choose Import Project.

2

Navigate to R17 Editing Lessons > Lesson 03 and select WELCOME TO THE PANTRY.drp.

3

Double-click the imported project in the Project Manager.

4

If necessary, click the Edit page button.

5

Click Relink Media in the Media Pool and relink the offline clips to their media files in
the R18 Editors Guide folder.

6

Choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout to reset the workspace.

7

Resize the timeline tracks and click the Full Extent Zoom button to see the entire timeline.
This timeline is the first part of the promo and has already been cut for you.

114

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

8Return your playhead to the start of this timeline and play through to review theedit so far.
This piece is being driven by an interview with the eponymous Miss Rachel, owner andhead chef at Miss Rachel’s Pantry. Notice how the interview has been edited so that it
sounds clean, without many distracting pauses, stutters, or poorly chosen words.

NOTE Feel free to review the rushes from the Interview Clips bin in the Rushes
bin to get a sense of how this edit was pieced together from the original clips.

You will also notice the gaps that were left intentionally to add short pauses between
thoughts or subjects and to allow the edit to “breathe.” Small audio clips of wildtrack or
atmos help to fill the gaps left in the audio with the ambient sounds of the restaurant.
Much of the distracting jump cuts have been covered by editing B-roll footage onto
the V2 track.
Two red markers are also present in this timeline referencing certain locations.

TIP You can add your own markers to any timeline by clicking the Markers
button in the timeline toolbar or by pressing M. Double-click an existing marker
to edit its color, name, or other properties.

To get a sense of how the cut interview would look without the cutaways, you candisable the V2 track.

Starting the Project

115

9

In the timeline track header for the Cutaways track (V2), click the Disable Video
Track button.

All clips on the V2 track are disabled.

10 Return the playhead to the start of the timeline and play through the edit once again.
Wow! The edited interview alone isn’t quite so polished. The jump cuts between theedited sound bites really distract from what Miss Rachel is saying! The gaps thatprovided a bit of pacing and breathing space now feel like yawning chasms!
It may not look pretty, but it does still sound good, which is why this is often referred
to as the radio edit; it’s effectively an edit that is focused on the audio, not the visual.
When creating a radio edit, you want to remove any large or small bits of audio thatmay detract from the message.

TIP To get a feel for how well a radio edit works, try closing your eyes during
playback to just listen to the spoken words. If you can’t hear any obvious edits,and the pacing of the speech sounds natural, that’s generally the key to a goodradio edit.

11 Re-enable the clips on the V2 track by clicking the Enable Video Track button in thetimeline track header.

116

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

Using the Smooth Cut Transition
Now that you’ve seen how the edit is currently shaping up, and how the B-roll clips havebeen used to cover the different jump cuts in the interview, it’s time to put the finishing
touches on this timeline by adding a few more sound bites from the interview and painting
them with appropriate B-roll.
First, though, you will fix a nasty jump cut at the start of the edit.
1

Click the Index button in the top left of the interface.

The Edit Index window opens below the media pool.

2

Click the Markers tab in the Index window to display a list of the markers in thecurrent timeline.

Using the Smooth Cut Transition

117

3

Double-click the thumbnail image for the first marker named “Jump Cut” to movethe timeline playhead to the first marker, at the edit between the first and second
interview clips.

TIP You can filter which colored markers are listed in the Markers Index using
the Options menu (three dots) at the top right of the window.

4

Click the Detail Zoom button and press / (slash) to preview the cut.
This is a classic jump cut that distracts from the story about the merits of this vegan
restaurant, but the director still wants to see as much of Rachel as possible before
having to resort to using the B-roll footage as cutaways.

5

Open the Effects Library, select Video Transitions and, in the Dissolve category, locate
Smooth Cut.

NOTE With the Index window open, the Effects Library opens in place of themedia pool.

6118

Double-click the Smooth Cut transition to add it to the edit point.

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

7

Trim the Smooth Cut transition in the timeline to 4 frames (00:04 in the tooltip’s
gray numbers).

TIP When trimming a transition, the gray numbers in the tooltip refer to theadjustment you’re making, whereas the white numbers refer to the transition’s
new total duration.

8

Click the Full Extent Zoom button and press / (slash) to play around the selected transition.
You should see that Resolve successfully manages to blend the two sides of the jump
cut into what appears to be a single take!

While this might seem like you’ll never have to worry about using cutaways on an interview
ever again, it’s worth remembering that you should use this transition with great care; you
don’t want to change or misrepresent the meaning of something your interviewee said
through your editing, no matter how subtly!

Importing a “Selects” Timeline
Now you’ll turn your attention to the rest of this edit, starting with the end of Rachel’sinterview. While you could sit and continue watching all the unused interview footage andslowly start to piece together the final part of the interview, it’s common for the director,
edit producer, or even edit assistant, to put together a selection of clips they would like you
to use or that they think might be useful. Often, they might work on their own systems,
reviewing footage before passing a “selects” timeline to you for the fine tuning and toincorporate into the main edit.
This is what has happened in this case. The director of the “Welcome to the Pantry” promo
has a cloned copy of the same media files you’re currently working with and has used
the free version of DaVinci Resolve 18 to pull together the final part of the interview with
Rachel, together with a few extra clips they’d like you to use as cutaways.
Rather than sending a copy of the whole project for you to open and find the correct
version of the timeline, they have simply sent you the relevant timeline as a .drt file.

Importing a “Selects” Timeline

119NOTE The extension .drt refers to a DaVinci Resolve timeline file and is an efficient
way of transferring timelines from one Resolve project, or Resolve system, toanother. Similar to an .xml or .aaf, a .drt file is a binary file that contains only therelevant information needed to rebuild a specific timeline within a DaVinci Resolve
project. DaVinci Resolve timeline files do not contain any media, so the recipientsystem would need a copy of the media to be able to play the imported timeline,
but this also means that the files are very small and therefore can be easilytransferred across a network, via cloud storage or even email. You can create a.drt file from your currently active timeline by choosing File > Export > Timeline orby pressing Shift-Command-O (macOS) or Shift-Ctrl-O (Windows) and choosing
DaVinci Resolve Timeline Files (*.drt)” from the file type menu.

1

In the media pool, select the Timelines bin. This is where you will import the .drt file
into your project.

2

Choose File > Import > Timeline or press Shift-Command-I (macOS) or
Shift-Ctrl-I (Windows).

3

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lessons/Lesson 03, select RADIO EDIT START.drt, andclick Open.

120

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

The imported timeline appears in the Timelines bin and automatically opens in thetimeline window.

This timeline contains a basic assembly of three interview clips followed, after a shortgap, by four additional B-roll clips. This is the footage that the director would like you
to incorporate into the main edit. However, since the directors aren’t skilled editors
themselves, they have left much of the detailed work to you.
A common workflow for many editors is to use multiple different timelines to work on
small sections of the overall edit; this could be the scenes of a feature film, the different
parts of a broadcast TV show, or different sections of a corporate video. These scenes
or parts often go through numerous iterations and changes themselves before beingedited together into a final timeline that will be the version delivered to the distributor,
broadcaster, or video streaming site.

Importing a “Selects” Timeline121Working Across Multiple Timelines
In the following steps, you’ll use the timeline you’ve just imported to refine the newinterview into a radio edit before incorporating it and the new B-roll into the main
“Welcome to the Pantry” (WTTP) timeline.
1

In the RADIO EDIT START timeline, click the Full Extent Zoom button to see the wholetimeline, and adjust the height of the audio tracks to reveal the clips’ audio waveforms.

2

Play the first three interview clips to review the parts of the interview the director
has chosen.
The first thing you’ll probably notice is that Rachel’s audio is only coming out of theleft speaker. This is a common issue with people like the director putting together
selects timelines like this because they are unaware of how Resolve is handling theaudio in the different tracks. In this case, the director has simply placed the clips in
the timeline without appreciating that the interview audio is mono, and the timeline
track has defaulted to stereo. While this is not a huge problem in terms of this edit, it’s
still annoying.

3

Right-click the track header for A1 in the RADIO EDIT START timeline and choose
Change Track Type To > Mono so the interview audio now plays out of bothspeakers correctly.

122

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

Whenever you’re editing an interview such as this, or any piece of dialogue, it’s useful
to have a clear view of the clips’ audio waveforms. To further enhance the height of the
waveform, you can always adjust the clip’s audio level. In this case, you can normalize
the clip audio for a better view of the waveform. Don’t worry; you can always normalize
it again later if necessary.
4

Select all the interview clips in the timeline, and then right-click them and choose
Normalize Audio Levels.

5

Using Sample Peak Program as the Normalization Mode, leave the Target Level set to-9 dBFS, but ensure that the Set Level is set to Independent, and then click Normalize.

TIP You can always adjust track heights directly in the timeline by dragging
the timeline track divider in the track headers or by using the Video and Audio
Track Height sliders in the Timeline View Options menu.

6

Play the first clip again and stop playback when you hear the first time that theinterviewee says, “Umm,” around 2 seconds from the beginning.

7

Click the Detail Zoom button in the toolbar or hold Option (macOS) or Alt (Windows)
and use the scroll wheel on your mouse, or scrolling function on your trackpad, tozoom in on the timeline.

You should be able to clearly identify the problematic “Umm” in the waveforms.

Working Across Multiple Timelines

123

8

Press the B key to switch to Blade Edit mode and click just before and just after theunwanted “Umm” to isolate the unwanted portion of the interview into a separate clip.

The dotted lines on the edit points represent through edits—that is, edits that are
visible on the timeline but play back smoothly because no frames have been removed
from either side of the cut. The edits were also added to both the audio and video
parts of the clip because the timeline-linked selection was active.

TIP To remove an unwanted through edit, in the timeline, place your playhead
after the through edit and choose Timeline > Join Clips or press Option-\(backslash) in macOS or Alt-\ (backslash) in Windows.

9

Press A to return to Selection mode.

10 Select the “Umm” clip, and press Shift-Delete (or Backspace) to perform a ripple delete.

11 Place the playhead over the new edit point and press / (slash) to play around the edit.
You’re aiming to have this audio edit be as inconspicuous as possible. When you playaround the current edit, try listening to the cut without watching the picture. Does itsound as if an edit is there? If it does, you’ll need to do a little finessing, which you’ll
look at soon.

124

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

TIP When you make a cut like this, you can’t really know just how successful
it will be until you play back your timeline. It’s highly doubtful that things will
be perfect, since most edits you perform will always need to be finessed insome way (although fortuitous editing accidents do happen occasionally).
Never worry about not getting an edit right the first time!

12 Continue playing what is now the second interview clip until you hear the next problem
where Rachel says, “We’re taking dishes and flavors.” She stutters and says the word“and” twice. It’s a simple task to tidy this up.
13 Use the JKL keys to play forward and backward to position the playhead just before
the first “and.”TIP Remember that you can jog the playhead back and forth by holding down
the K key and tapping the L or J key. It’s also useful to have audio scrubbing
turned on so you can hear the starts or ends of words. Choose Timeline >Audio Scrubbing or press Shift-S to toggle audio scrubbing on and off.

14 Press Command-B (macOS) or Ctrl-B (Windows) to cut the clip.

TIP Pressing this keyboard shortcut adds an edit point to a selected clip orclips at the playhead position without the need to activate Blade Edit mode.

15 Jog forward until the playhead is located before she says the second “and.” Press
Command-B (macOS) or Ctrl-B (Windows) again to add a second through edit.

Working Across Multiple Timelines125

16 Move your playhead over the isolated “and” in the timeline and press Shift-V to selectthe clip under the playhead.

17 Press Shift-Delete (or Backspace) to ripple delete the clip.
18 Press / (slash) to play around the new edit.
Once more, try listening to the edit without looking at the jump cut you’ve just created.
Again, although you’re trying to create a natural-sounding interview that won’t distract
the audience, don’t worry if the current edit is not as smooth as you would like; you’ll
finesse it soon.
19 Keep playing through the interview. The next portion you’ll remove is the “Umm” justafter she says “textures.” This time, you’ll place timeline In and Out points to remove
this unwanted portion of the interview.
20 In the timeline, place your playhead at the start of the “Umm” and press I to add
an In point.
21 Jog the playhead forward six or seven frames until you hear her start to say, “and reallymaking them.” Press O to set an Out point just before she says, “and.”126

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

TIP Because Resolve’s playhead is inclusive of the current frame, In points arealways added to the head of the frame, and Out points are added to the tail ofthe frame. When adding Out points, it’s often useful to find the frame you wantto keep (usually at the start of the next word) and then move the playhead one
frame back before adding the Out point. By doing so, you’ll be sure to keep theframe you wanted.

You’ve now set In and Out points around the portion of the interview you want
to remove.
22 Press Shift-Delete (or Backspace) to ripple delete the contents between the In and Out
points in the timeline.

23 Press / (slash) to preview your new edit.
Well done. You have just removed three small portions of the interview using threeslightly different techniques that have essentially achieved the same thing. As is often
the case when editing, there is no simple right or wrong way of doing things, just more
efficient or less efficient ways. As an editor, it’s up to you to decide which tools andtechniques suit your style and approach.

Extra Credit
The director has also asked if you could tidy up a specific part of the interview; shedoesn’t like the interviewee’s use of the word “palatable” to describe the food. Thisis a slightly more subjective cut, but when trying to put together the best radio
edit description of the food at the restaurant, it may be desirable to aim higher
than simply “palatable.” Do you think you’d be able to edit out the words “palatableand” so that she simply says, “making them delicious”?

Working Across Multiple Timelines

127

Refining the Radio Edit
As you know, DaVinci Resolve has very comprehensive trimming options easily performed
using the mouse. However, when you’re making small, subtle, but very precise changes
to an edit—often adding or removing single frames—it’s useful to perform most of yourtrimming using the keyboard. In doing so, you’ll exercise the most precise control overeach of your edits. Learning how to get the best from Resolve’s trimming options is an
important step in choosing the best technique for any given situation.
You’ll use keyboard shortcuts exclusively to select and trim the various cuts you’ve made in
the previous steps.
1

Press Home to position the playhead at the start of the interview clips.

2

Press the Down Arrow to go to the first cut in that clip.

3

Press / (slash) to preview the edit.
Listen closely to the audio edit you created in the previous steps. Does it sound like anatural, continual part of her speech pattern? Does she fully pronounce all the words
without having any part of what she’s saying cut off? If so, can you identify where theproblem lies by looking at the waveform?

Waveform indicates outgoing clip
might need trimming

Waveform indicates incoming
clip might need trimming

Identifying how to adjust the edit effectively, and whether to add or remove frames
from either the outgoing or incoming clips, is a skill that will come only with practice.
Don’t worry if this all seems a little overwhelming right now. For the moment, you will
simply learn to precisely adjust the cuts you made in the interview using the keyboard.

128

4

Press T to enter Trim mode.

5

Press V to select the edit point nearest the playhead.

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

6Press the U key to toggle the selection until only the outgoing (left) side of the cut isselected for ripple trimming.

7

With the outgoing side of the edit selected, press , (comma) to trim the selected edit
one frame to the left or . (period) to trim it one frame to the right, depending onwhether you need to add or remove frames, respectively.

NOTE In the example in the preceding images, one frame was trimmed fromthe end of the outgoing clip using , (comma) to remove the unwanted portion.

8

Press / (slash) to play around the selected edit to review the change.

9

If necessary, press U twice to change the trim to the head of the incoming shot.

Refining the Radio Edit

129

10 This time, because you have the incoming clip selected, press , (comma) to add a frameor . (period) to remove a frame as needed.

NOTE In the example in the preceding images, one frame was added to thebeginning of the incoming clip using , (comma).

11 Press / (slash) to play around the cut point and check your trim decision.
Continue to refine the edit until you are happy with the results. Then you can move onto the next cut.
12 Press the Down Arrow to go to the next cut in your timeline. This edit is selected in the
direction you last selected the previous edit.
13 Press / (slash) to play around the cut point and to determine what you need to trim.
14 Decide whether the edit needs to be refined, and press U to toggle to the appropriate
trimming operation.
15 Press the , (comma) or . (period) keys to refine the edit, adding or removing frames
from either the tail of the outgoing clip or the head of the incoming clip.
16 Don’t be afraid to press / (slash) to review your trim at any time, and continue to refine
the edit if necessary.
When the audio edit sounds good, you can move to the next cut.
17 Press the Down Arrow to go to the next cut in that clip.
18 Press / (slash) to play around the cut point and identify what you need to trim.
19 Press U to toggle the edit direction and press , (comma) and/or . (period) to refine theedit as required, pressing / (slash) to review your trimming.
20 When you have finished, press A to return to the Selection mode.

130

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

You have refined a small part of this interview using various techniques to remove
unwanted parts of what the subject says, and you’ve refined the rest into a succinct
description of her business. When chipping away at a longer cut with the goal of making it
shorter, these keyboard-oriented trim commands enable you to make tiny, precise trims as
you see and hear the results, which can be invaluable!

Completing the Radio Edit
Continue to edit the two additional interview clips the director has included in this timeline.
— Edit the next clip so that Miss Rachel says, “…vegan food is starting to get therecognition it deserves.”— Edit the final interview clip so she says, “Because it seems like it’s a diet or a lifestyle ofcutting things out when, in reality, we’re just doing things completely differently.”
Now that the radio edit is complete, it’s time to add the new interview clips into the main
timeline and complete the edit.

Subframe Audio Editing
While video trimming is limited to a project’s frame rate, audio is captured usingtens of thousands of samples each second. DaVinci Resolve lets you edit audio at
the subframe level in the edit page, which enables a much more detailed ability
to trim that means you can isolate subtle syllables or words that are slurred andmake the edits sound clean and clearer.
You don’t need to do anything to activate this feature; it’s how the edit pageautomatically works with audio. However, when trimming audio at the subframelevel, it’s best to have Snapping and Linked Selection turned off for the timeline.
Zoom in as far as you can and do all your trimming with the mouse.
If you need greater precision than that offered by subframe audio editing, you’ll
need to utilize the editing functions on the Fairlight page, where audio can betrimmed precisely to the sample level.

Refining the Radio Edit

131

Editing Between Timelines
Once you have a nice radio edit, you’ll want to incorporate it into the much longer interview
that’s already been cut. DaVinci Resolve provides numerous ways in which you can edit
footage from one timeline into another.
For consistency, a completed version of the radio edit timeline is available for you to import
into this project to complete the rest of the steps in this lesson.
1

Select the Timelines bin and choose File > Import > Timeline and navigate to DR18
Editors Guide/Lessons/Lesson 03 /RADIO EDIT FINISHED.drt and click Open.

As before, the imported timeline is added to the selected bin and automatically opens
in the timeline window.
2

Click the Full Extent Zoom button to see the entire timeline.
This is a version of the edited interview and the suggested B-roll clips, but with a short
gap added to the interview for pacing.

3

Press Home to return the playhead to the beginning of this timeline and play theedited interview.
You now need to incorporate this edited interview into the main WTTP FINE CUT timeline.
DaVinci Resolve provides several ways of moving these edited clips from one timeline
to another. For example, you could just copy the clips and paste them into thedestination timeline. However, in the next steps you’ll learn how you can use moresophisticated techniques to edit from one timeline into another.
To work across multiple timelines, you’ll start by opening an existing timeline in thesource viewer.

132

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

4

In the media pool, locate the WTTP FINE CUT timeline and drag it into thesource viewer.

Scrubbing through the source viewer now scrubs through the WTTP FINE CUT timeline.

Now that you have the two timelines open—RADIO EDIT FINISHED in the timelineviewer and WTTP FINE CUT in the source viewer—you no longer have a needfor the media pool, since the clips in one timeline will become the source for theother timeline.
You can now mark the clips you want to edit from the RADIO EDIT FINISHED timeline.

Editing Between Timelines

133

5

Select all the edited interview clips in the RADIO EDIT FINISHED timeline and press
Shift-A to mark their total duration.

Currently, the WTTP FINE CUT timeline is the source for the RADIO EDIT FINISHED
timeline, whereas you want them to be the other way around.
6

Choose Timeline > Swap Timeline and Source Viewer or press Command-Page Up(macOS) or Ctrl-Page Up (Windows).
The timeline in the source viewer—WTTP FINE CUT—is now open in the timelineviewer, and the timeline that was in the timeline viewer—RADIO EDIT FINISHED—
is now the source, together with the In and Out points of the marked clips.

7

In the Markers Index, double-click the thumbnail for the second red marker, named“New Interview Here”.

TIP You can quickly jump between markers by choosing Playback > Next >Marker or Playback > Previous Marker, or by pressing Shift-Down Arrow for the
next marker, or Shift-Up Arrow for the previous marker.

134

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

8

Ensure that the video and audio destination controls are set to V1 and A1, respectively,
and make an Overwrite edit.
The clips are edited from the source timeline into the destination timeline as a regularclip would. However, the clips are currently displayed as single compound clip.

NOTE You will learn more about compound clips and how you can work withthem in Lesson 7.

9

Select the compound clip in the timeline and choose Clip > Decompose in Place.
The original source clips from the RADIO EDIT FINISHED are now displayed and canbe edited as normal clips.

NOTE These clips are now completely independent from the clips in
the original source timeline, as if you had edited them into this timeline
separately.

Editing Between Timelines

135Decomposing Compound Clips on Edit
You can use the source timeline just like you would use any clip currently open in thesource viewer. Next, you’ll use the B-roll clips included in the RADIO EDIT FINISHED
timeline as cutaways for the main edit.
1

In the WTTP FINE CUT timeline, move the playhead to the edit between the first andsecond clips you’ve just edited into this timeline.

2

Choose Timeline > Swap Timeline and Source Viewer or press Command-Page Up(macOS) or Ctrl-Page Up (Windows).
The timelines switch viewers again.

3

Select the first two B-roll clips in the RADIO EDIT FINISHED timeline and press Shift-A
to mark the selected clips.

4

Choose Timeline > Swap Timeline and Source Viewer or press Command-Page Up(macOS) or Ctrl-Page Up (Windows) to switch the timelines back.

5

Choose Edit > Decompose Compound Clips on Edit.

6

In the timeline, click the V2 destination control or press Option-2 (macOS) or Alt-2(Windows) to target the V2 track.

7

Click the A1 destination control or press Command-Option-1 (macOS) or Ctrl-Alt-1(Windows) to disable track targeting for the audio.

136

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

8Make an Overwrite edit.
The clips from the source timeline are edited directly into the main timeline without
the need to decompose the compound clip as a separate step.

You can also add In and Out points without having to open the source timeline.
9

In the timeline, press Down Arrow to jump to the next edit, select the next two clips,
and press Shift-A to mark the selection.

10 Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and press the Down Arrow again until you
see the shot of the two customers talking to Rachel.
11 Press I to place an In point at the first frame of this clip.

Editing Between Timelines13712 Make and Overwrite edit.
Just like a regular three-point edit, the clip from the timeline in the source viewer isedited into the fine cut timeline as a cutaway on V2.

Filling in the Atmos
Now, you just need to fill the gaps in the interview with a bit of atmos or wildtrack.
Thankfully, since you already have sections of atmos used for this purpose on A2, it’s
simply a matter of copying those clips to the new gaps.
1

Select the third clip in the ATMOS audio track (A2) and press Command-C (macOS) or
Ctrl-C (Windows) to copy the clip.

2

Place your playhead at the start of the gap just before the last red timeline marker.

3

Press Command-V (macOS) or Ctrl-V (Windows) to paste the copied audio clip.

4

Choose Playback > Next > Gap or press Option-Command-’ (apostrophe) on macOS or
Alt-Ctrl-’ (apostrophe) on Windows to move to the next gap.

NOTE The Next Gap and Previous Gap commands move the playhead to theappropriate gap on any auto select-enabled track.

138

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

5

Again, press Command-V (macOS) or Ctrl-V (Windows) to paste another copyof the clip.

6

Zoom in to the timeline and move and trim the pasted audio clips so that they cover
the gaps in the interview audio.

7

When you’ve finished finessing the position of the new atmos clips, click the Full Extent
Zoom button to zoom back out to view the whole timeline.

Working with Stacked Timelines
The preceding steps are a useful technique for editing the content of one timeline
into another. However, it only allows you to see the content of one timeline at atime. Sometimes, though, you’ll want to be able to see the content of both timelines
simultaneously. Helpfully, the edit page timeline window can display multiple timelines indifferent tabs or stacked one above the other.
1

In the media pool, ensure that the Timelines bin is still selected and choose File >Import > Timeline or press Shift-Command-I (macOS) or Shift-Control-I (Windows).

2

If necessary, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lessons/Lesson 03/Timelines and selectthe CLOSING TITLES.drt file and click Open.

Working with Stacked Timelines

139

The CLOSING TITLES timeline is imported, added to the Timelines bin in the media
pool, and opens in the timeline window.

This timeline consists of four titles for the closing section of the “Welcome to the
Pantry” promo. Each title has a fade at the top and tail (with the exception of the first
title) and a dynamic zoom applied.
3

In the top left of the timeline toolbar, click the Timeline View Options menu and choose
the first option to enable stacked timelines.

Tabs appear above the timeline, with the timeline’s name. You can use the popup menu on this tab to access any other timeline from your project (similar to theTimeline Viewer pop-up menu) or open additional tabs using the plus button to display
multiple timelines.

140

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

TIP You can drag timeline tabs horizontally to change their order and close
existing tabs by clicking the X next to the name of each tabbed timeline or bymiddle-clicking the tab.

In addition to the tabs, another type of Add Timeline button appears in the top-rightcorner of the timeline window.
4

In the upper-right corner of the timeline, click the New Stacked Timeline button.

A second timeline window appears below your currently active timeline.
5

If necessary, resize the clips in the upper timeline window so you can still see theoverall structure of the clips.

6

In the upper timeline, close the tab for the CLOSING TITLES timeline.

7

In the lower timeline tab, click the Select Timeline pop-up menu and choose the
CLOSING TITLES timeline.

Working with Stacked Timelines

141

The CLOSING TITLES timeline reopens in the lower timeline window.

8

Take a moment to adjust the track heights of the upper timeline so you can see thecontents of the WTTP FINE CUT timeline clearly.

9

Select all the title clips in the lower timeline and drag them to the end of the lastinterview clip in the upper timeline.

142

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

The clips are instantly copied from the CLOSING TITLES timeline into the main
WTTP FINE CUT timeline.

Now that you have edited the titles into your main timeline, you can close all thetimeline tabs you no longer need.
10 With the WTTP FINE CUT timeline the currently active timeline (as denoted by the redtimeline tab), click the Timeline View Options menu and click the Stacked Timelines
option to turn the stacked timelines off and return to a single timeline view.

Now all you need to do is trim the new titles to the correct duration.
11 Using Selection mode, select the four title clips you’ve just added to this timeline.
12 With the clips selected, press T to switch to Trim Edit mode.

Working with Stacked Timelines143

13 Choose Clip > Change Clip Duration or press Command-D (macOS) or Ctrl-D (Windows).

14 In the Change Clip Duration window, type 300 in the Duration field and click Change.
All the clips are instantly trimmed to a duration of 3 seconds and, because youwere in Trim Edit mode when applying the change, have rippled the timeline so nogaps remain.
15 Return the playhead to the beginning of the timeline and review the final, completed
edit for the “Welcome to the Pantry” promo.

NOTE You can import a finished version of the WTTP FINE CUT timeline bychoosing File > Import > Timeline and navigating to R18 Editors Guide/Lessons/Lesson 03, selecting WTTP FINE CUT FINISHED.drt, and clicking Open.

Many complex edits are often broken down into different stages across multiple timelines,
each of which might go through several different versions before being assembled into
the finished timeline for delivery. By carefully managing each of these timelines, you’ll findthat it’s a more efficient way of working through an edit than trying to do everything in one
all-encompassing timeline.

144

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

Lesson Review
1

What is known as a “radio edit”?
a) When your edit will be used on radio as well as televisionb) A cut-down version of your film used by reviewersc) A technique of concentrating on the audio before editing the visuals

2

Which transition could be used to help make jump cuts less noticeable?
a) Smooth wipeb) Smooth dissolvec) Smooth cut

3

Where can you find the option to show stacked timelines?
a) Drag one timeline on top of another to display two timeline windows.
b) The Timeline View Options menuc) Clip > Decompose in Place

4

How can you open a timeline in the source viewer?
a) Double-click the timeline in the media pool.
b) Right-click the timeline in the media pool and choose Open in Source.
c) Drag the timeline from the media pool to the source viewer.

5

Which option stops DaVinci Resolve from automatically editing the content from one
timeline to another as a compound clip?
a) Clip > Decompose in Placeb) Timeline > Decompose Compound Clips On Editc) You cannot stop DaVinci Resolve from editing clips from one timeline to another as
a compound clip.

Lesson Review

145

Answers
1c) A “radio edit” is created when you focus on editing the audio of an interview to makeit sound smooth and natural before turning your attention to the covering visuals.

2c) Smooth cut is a special-purpose transition designed to make short jump cuts lessnoticeable by using optical flow processing to automatically morph a subject between
two positions across the duration of the transition.

1463b) The Timeline View Options menu

4c) Drag the timeline from the media pool to the source viewer.

5b) Timeline > Decompose Compound Clips On Edit

Lesson 3

Fine Cutting an Interview

Lesson 4

Cutting a
Dramatic Scene
Editing a dramatic scene is often
done by establishing the location andTime

cutting between shots as they wouldThis lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

play out in real time. Commonly known

Goals

as continuity editing, this technique isWorking with Separate Takes

148

Editing for Continuity

152

Comparing Different Takes

162

dialogue and reactions warrant. In thisTidying Up the Audio

167

lesson, you’ll apply this continuity

Utilizing Split Edits169

technique to a simple scripted scene.

Dynamic Trimming173

You’ll start with one of the most firmly

Filling the “Dead Air”

178

Lesson Review

181

centered around cutting between two
or more shots, alternating back andforth between each character as theirestablished conventions in cinema—
the shot/reverse-shot—and see how
the editing and trimming tools in
DaVinci Resolve 18 can speed up thisclassic editing style.
In this lesson, you’ll edit a shortdialogue scene between two
characters from the short sci-fi
film Sync about human-like robots
going rogue—written, produced, anddirected by Hasraf “Haz” Dulull.

Working with Separate Takes
Although a project like this is often scripted, rehearsed, and shot under controlled
conditions, there are still a number of creative choices that need to be made when editing.
Watching each take and choosing the parts that feature the best performances is often
the most time-consuming part of your entire editing process, but it is also a criticalstep in becoming familiar with the available content and identifying which shots andperformances might or might not work. Often, you might need to work with different partsof different takes to get the best performances.
You’ll start by importing the project for this lesson and relinking the necessary media files.
1

Open DaVinci Resolve and, in the Project Manager, click the Import button.

2

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 04, select the SYNC SCENE.drp project file, andclick Open.

3

Once the project has been imported, double-click to open it and, if necessary, selectthe edit page.

4

In the media pool, click the Relink Media button and relink the media files.

5

Choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout.

6

In the timeline, click the Full Extent Zoom button and resize the timeline tracks so you
can comfortably see all the clips in the timeline window.
The project is organized in a series of bins for either Agent Jenkins or Doctor Kominsky,
referred to as AGENT J or DR K, respectively.

148

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

7

In the timeline, return the playhead to the start of the timeline and play through toreview the scene.
The first shot in the timeline shows Dr K walking off stage after speaking at aconference of cybersecurity experts, shown in a previous scene. The main part of
the timeline features the whole scene as shot from Agent J’s camera angle; this isoften referred to as the master shot because it lays out the structure of the scene.
It is, however, missing the reverse shots of Dr K that not only show her speaking herlines but, crucially, also show the interaction between the two characters and otherelements in this scene.

NOTE Although it may appear that this scene has been shot across multiple
cameras, it is not a multicamera shoot. Instead, the scene was shot single
camera—a typical filming technique that requires the scene being run multiple
times and filmed from different camera angles. The takes from these different
camera angles are then edited together in a seamless scene, provided that
continuity is maintained of course. Shooting single camera is a cost-effective
method of production since it requires the minimum amount of crew andequipment, but it requires much more time on set since each scene needs tobe shot multiple times from all the different angles required by the director.
Similarly, the edit needs to be pieced together carefully and, because eachangle and take is highly unlikely to have exactly the same pacing, multicamera
editing techniques will not be appropriate. You’ll learn more about how to edit
multicamera productions in Lesson 5, “Multicamera Editing.”

8

Select the DR K CAM bin.

Working with Separate Takes

149

This bin contains the various takes featuring Doctor Kominsky.
9

Select all three clips in this bin and drag them into the source viewer.

By dragging these clips into the source viewer at the same time, you can access themusing the Recent Clips dropdown menu at the top of the viewer, providing an easy way
to switch between the last 10 clips you loaded in the source viewer without having tolocate them in the media pool.
10 In the source viewer options menu, select Show Full Clip Audio Waveform to help you
see where the dialogue starts and stops.

150

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

11 Select B_S6_T5 Doctor K WS in the Recent Clips menu to load it into the source viewer.

12 Play the clip to review it.

This is the first of three takes of the scene from Doctor Kominsky’s camera angle.

NOTE The naming convention for the clips in this project are based on thecamera setup (“A” for Agent Jenkin’s angle and “B” for Doctor Kominsky’s angle),
the slate or shot number (e.g., S5), the take number (e.g., T1), a shot description(e.g., “WS” for wide shot or “CU” for close up), and finally which character theclip features—e.g., B_S6_T5 WS DOCTOR K. You’ll learn more about how toorganize and name your clips in Lesson 6, “Project Organization.”

Working with Separate Takes

151

Editing for Continuity
You will use the single take in the timeline as a reference for editing dialogue and action
from other takes, and you’ll use some editing functionality that is unique to DaVinci Resolve
to add close-ups and reaction shots that build both time and space continuity.
The chosen master shot focuses on the FBI agents (though it could just as easily have been
Dr K’s angle), so it’s up to you to add reverse-angle shots of the doctor. As with the initialsteps in the previous lesson, you are focusing on the pacing of the dialogue from thesedifferent takes in an attempt to hide the artifice of filmmaking and sell the idea of thesecharacters having a seamless conversation shown from different camera angles. You willrefine this rough cut further in later steps.
1

If necessary, play the timeline again to remind yourself of the scripted dialogue
between these characters. Remember that the more familiar you are with the footage,
the better you will be able to assess how each take will cut together and the morecreative your choices are likely to be.
Currently, after the doctor has left the stage to applause, the scene “opens” on an
empty shot before the FBI agents walk in. You’ll start by showing the doctor being
interrupted by the FBI agents.

2

In the timeline, place the playhead at the start of the clip A_S8_T2 WS Agent J andmark an In point.

3

Play the clip in the timeline and mark an Out point just before Agent Jenkins’s line,“I’m Agent Jenkins….”

TIP You can use the waveforms in the timeline to see where each of thecharacters starts and stops speaking, with Dr K on the A1 track and Agent J on
the A2 track.

152

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

4

Press Q to switch to the source viewer and clip B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K.

5

Play the clip until after the man has walked away from Dr K, just as the woman isapproaching her (at about 01:02:55:00).

6

Mark an Out point just before Agent J delivers his line, “I’m Agent Jenkins….”

Editing for Continuity

153

Hold on. You have now managed to add a total of four points: an In and Out point in
the timeline and another In and Out point in the source viewer. Also, while all four
marked points are well placed, the resulting durations of your two selections differ:in the upper-left corner of both the source and timeline viewers, you have the current
marked duration—around 7 seconds for the source and just short of 5 seconds for thetimeline (depending on where you actually placed your timeline Out point).

As you are now no doubt aware, many of the editing functions in DaVinci Resolve
follow the standard rules of three-point editing; therefore, only three of these four
points would be valid for a standard Overwrite or Insert edit. You can, however,preview which marks Resolve will use.
7

Choose View > Show Preview Marks.
The preview marks display a blue indicator in the source viewer to highlight the shorter
duration marked in the timeline, meaning the Out point in the source viewer will not behonored in a standard three-point edit.

8

Press F10 or click the Overwrite Clip button above the timeline and preview the edit in
the timeline.

154

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic ScenePerforming an Overwrite limits the edit based on the shorter duration marked in thetimeline. This leaves a jarring cut from the Doctor K shot to Agent Jenkins introducing
himself. If you were to proceed with this edit, you would have to trim the outgoingclip of the doctor to correct for the continuity of the scene and recover the missing
dialogue from Agent Jenkins.
Fortunately, Resolve provides a unique edit that helps when editing scenes such as this.
9

Choose Edit > Undo or press Command-Z (macOS) or Ctrl-Z (Windows).

10 Drag the clip in the source viewer to the timeline viewer and over the Ripple Overwrite
option in the edit overlays.

Ripple Overwrite overwrites the marked duration of the clip in the source viewer tothe marked duration in the timeline, rippling the timeline automatically in order totake into the account the differences in the two marked durations. And, yes, Ripple
Overwrite has used all the In and Out points you have marked, which means it is a fourpoint edit.

In the timeline, play over the edit to verify that you have successfully overwritten theunwanted part of the clip with a shot that introduces the doctor. This time, the framesthat were previously ignored in the source viewer by the usual Overwrite edit have now
been included by the Ripple Overwrite edit, with the timeline becoming a few seconds
longer as a result.
Using Ripple Overwrite, you can continue editing this scene.

Editing for Continuity

155

11 Play the timeline and add an In point after Agent Jenkins says, “We need you to comewith us right away,” and an Out point as Agent Jenkins turns away, just before Dr
Kominsky says, “Yeah, yeah”—a duration of just over 3 seconds.

12 Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and play clip B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K,
adding an In point just after Agent Jenkins’s line, “We need you to come with us rightaway,” and an Out point as Doctor Kominsky turns to her associate and before shesays, “Yeah, yeah. I’m sure it’s fine.”

13 Make a Ripple Overwrite edit using the timeline viewer overlays or by pressing Shift-F10.

156

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

14 Continue playing the timeline, setting the next In point just before Doctor K mutters,“OK,” and the Out point just before Agent J says, “We need your help.”

15 Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and set an In point after the doctor’s
associate starts to walk away and an Out point just before Agent Jenkins says,“We need your help….”

16 Make a Ripple Overwrite edit.
As you can see, by using the unique Ripple Overwrite edit, you can quickly block out
the scene, using the dialogue as a guide to the pacing. Of course, there’s more toconsider, but at the moment you’re only interested in getting a rough cut together
in this timeline.

Editing for Continuity

157

Using Alternate Takes
1

Continue playing the timeline, setting the next In point just as Doctor K says, “My
help?” and the Out point just as Agent K turns back and before he says, “OK, we don’t
have a lot of time….”

2

Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and play back to listen to the equivalentline from the doctor’s camera angle.
Ouch! That’s awful audio on this take! Obviously, the actor playing Doctor Kominsky
is wearing a microphone, and as she grabs the lanyard, she also catches the mic.
Obviously, this makes the take unusable and is one of the many reasons why
additional takes are recorded!

3

From the source viewer Recent Clips menu, choose B_S6_T3 WS Doctor K.

4

Place the playhead about three-fifths of the way through the clip and find the line
you’re looking for, when Doctor K says, “My help? You’ll have to do better than that.”(at about 01:05:45:00).

158

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

5

Add an In point just before she says, “My help” and an Out point just before Agent J
says, “OK, we don’t have a lot of time here….”

You might still hear the actor catching the microphone, but it’s not nearly as bad as theprevious take. It’s also isolated from her actual dialogue, so it should be easily edited
out later.
6

Perform a Ripple Overwrite edit.

7

Continue playing the timeline and mark an In point just after Agent J says, “…deadly,
weaponized package,” and an Out point just before he says his next line, “Well, it’s
possible Doctor Kominsky….”

8

Press Q to switch back to the source viewer and select B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K from the
Recent Clips list.

Editing for Continuity

159

9

Add an In point just after Agent J says, “…deadly weaponized package.”

NOTE You might want to take note of Doctor Kominsky’s reaction to this line.
It’s a nice shake of the head in disbelief that you might want to include.

10 Set an Out point in the source viewer just before Agent J says, “Oh, it’s possible….”

11 Make a Ripple Overwrite edit.
The final edit you will make will be a standard reaction shot from Doctor Kominsky.
12 Play the timeline and set In and Out points around Agent J’s line, “We need you to tellus everything you know about the Sync: the routes, their drop points….”

13 Press Q to switch to the source viewer, play forward, and set an Out point after Agent J
says, “…their drop points”.

160

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

14 Choose Mark > Clear In or press Option-I (macOS) or Alt-I (Windows) to remove the
In point.

Removing the In point in the source will enable you to backtime the reaction shot
when you edit it into the timeline.
15 In the timeline, click the track destination controls for A1 and A2 to disable audio fromthe source clip.

Editing for Continuity

161

16 Make an Overwrite edit.

Fantastic! With the help of the Ripple Overwrite function, you have been able to quickly
put a rough cut of this scene together. As always, though, this is only the first stepwhen editing; next, you’ll learn how to work with evaluating different takes before
polishing the scene in Trim Edit mode.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lesson 04/Timelines and select SYNC SCENE ROUGH CUT CATCHUP 1.drt
and click Open.

Comparing Different Takes
When cutting dialogue, you can easily fall into the trap of cutting based solely on words.
But dialogue editing is trickier than that. You must pay attention not only to the words
but also the eyes, the mouths, and the body language of the performers. All these
performance elements are essential to establishing the emotional pacing of a scene
and establishing the scene’s storyline. So, even though your cut may maintain dialogue
continuity, you might want to search out alternate takes that feature superior performanceelements, alternative looks, or body or camera movements.
Comparing different takes often means repetitively revising your timeline. For example,
imagine that the director wants to see what a wide shot of the doctor would look like
instead of the close-up. Sounds simple enough to edit one take in place of another, doesn’tit? However, most editors will tell you that a director is rarely satisfied with that and often
wants to see multiple choices in quick succession or switch back and forth between
alternate takes. DaVinci Resolve can make this process a lot easier with the Take Selector.
Before you start this process, though, it would be prudent to duplicate thecurrent timeline.

162

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

1

Select the TIMELINES bin and right-click the SYNC SCENE ROUGH CUT timeline andchoose Duplicate Timeline to create a copy of the timeline.

2

Return to the current timeline and position the playhead at the start of the fourth clip
in your timeline, the second instance of B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K.

The director wonders aloud how this wide shot compares with an alternate close-up
take that was shot.
3

From the source viewer clips list, select B_S5_T1 CU Doctor K to open the close-up
take in the source viewer.

Comparing Different Takes

163

4

Mark an In point just before Doctor K says “Ummm” (at around 01:01:00:00) and an Out
point just before she says “yeah, yeah…” (about 2 or 3 seconds later).

To audition this take in the timeline, without actually replacing the current take, you will
enable Resolve’s Take Selector.
5

In the timeline, right-click B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K where your playhead is and choose
Take Selector or select the clip and choose Clip > Take Selector.

164

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

The Take Selector is activated on the selected timeline clip.

The Take Selector acts as a container for multiple clips. While you’ll see only one ofthose clips when you play the timeline, you can switch between the clips at any time.
6

From the source viewer, drag B_S5_T1 CU Doctor K anywhere into the timeline toautomatically add it to the activated Take Selector.

TIP You can add as many takes as you need to the Take Selector.

The Take Selector now shows the two clips stacked on top of each other.

Comparing Different Takes

165

The most recently added take is the active take, but you can change that by clicking theclip you want to view in the timeline. However, you’ll notice that the close-up take you
just added has a slightly different duration than that used for the wider take.
7

In the upper-right corner of the Take Selector, click the Ripple button.

The timeline adjusts to fit the shorter take’s duration.
8

Play the timeline to review the alternative take.
The director decides that the close-up is a better reaction shot to use at this point, so
you’ll make the new take a permanent part of the timeline.

9

In the Take Selector, click the upper clip to choose that take.

10 In the upper-left corner of the Take Selector, click the Close button to collapse the Take
Selector stack.

TIP At this point, you can always reopen the Take Selector and continue
reviewing the different takes for this opening shot by double-clicking the Take
Selector icon in the lower-left corner of the clip in the timeline.

11 Right-click the clip and choose Finalize Take.

Finalizing the take removes the Take Selector and all the alternate takes from the timeline,
leaving the director’s final choice as a stand-alone clip.

166

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

Tidying Up the Audio
Before you turn your attention to finessing this scene, there’s now an opportunity to tidy
up the audio for the dialogue clips. This will help you eliminate any unwanted or unneeded
parts of the audio clips, leaving you with just the words spoken by the actors.
1

In the timeline, ensure that Snapping and Linked Selection are disabled. This will makeit easier when selecting and trimming the audio clips.

2

Ensure that you are in Selection mode and trim the start of the first audio clip on A2
forward by about 5 seconds (+05:00 in the tooltip) so it starts when Agent J says his
first line.

3

Trim the end of the same clip backward by about a second to the end of Agent J’s line.

4

On the next clip, select the clip on A1 and press Delete (Backspace) to remove it.

Tidying Up the Audio167

This leaves just Agent J’s dialogue track for this clip.
The next two clips are for dialogue spoken by Dr K, even though you see Agent J for
one of them.
5

Select the next three audio clips on A2 and press Delete (Backspace) to remove themfrom the timeline.

6

Continue working through the rest of the timeline, removing the unneeded audio clips
on A1 when Agent J is speaking, and the clips on A2 when Dr K is speaking.

When you’ve finished, you should have a timeline that features only the audio that you
need, with each character on their own separate track. This will also make it easier
when trimming the different clips in the timeline, since you don’t have to worry about
clips that are not needed. You’ll complete the audio mix for this scene in Lesson 8,“Editing and Mixing Audio.”

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, selectthe TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lesson 04/Timelines and select SYNC SCENE ROUGH CUT CATCHUP 2.drt
and click Open.

168

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

Utilizing Split Edits
A straight cut, with which audio and video start and end simultaneously, can be quite
abrupt and a little jarring. A split edit, often referred to as an L-cut or J-cut because of theimplied shape it creates in the edit, delays either the audio or video cut of a clip. Staggering
the cuts in this way can create a more natural rhythm between shots.
The most common split edit is the J-cut, with which you first introduce the sound of thenext shot and then cut to the picture slightly later. This is the way that most of us perceive
the world around us. For example, when you hear a car horn in the street, you look for thesource of that sound a fraction of a second later.

An L-cut leads with the picture edit before the audio edit and is often used when you want
to show a character’s reaction to something happening or being said, before their response.

Resolve provides multiple ways to create J-cuts and L-cuts. You’ll start by creating a J-cut inwhich you hear upcoming clip audio first before letting the picture cut.

Utilizing Split Edits

169

Extend Edit
Extend edit is a common way to create a split edit, since it automatically trims a selectededit point to the playhead position.
1

Ensure that both Snapping and Linked Selection are still disabled in the timeline
toolbar, and then place the timeline playhead between the second and third clips
and click the Detailed Zoom button, adjusting the zoom as appropriate so you have a
comfortable view of the clips in the timeline.

2

Press the / (slash) key to review this edit.
As the FBI agent introduces himself, it might be better to hold on to the shot of thedoctor so you can see her reaction. Also, hearing Agent J’s voice is a good motivation
for the cut to the next shot since we’ll want to see them in vision once they start talking.

3

Select the edit point between the video clips B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K and
A_S8_T2 WS Agent J.

4Now, move the playhead to the frame where Agent J begins to turn his head to
introduce his partner.

170

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

5

Choose Trim > Extend Edit or press E.

The extend edit trims the selected video edit point to the position of your playhead in
the timeline. Because you had both sides of the edit selected, this resulted in a roll trim
and created a split edit. Press / (slash) to review the new split edit.
That edit now feels very natural in that you see the doctor react to the FBI agent’s
introduction, while the FBI agent’s line of dialogue motivates the picture cut a secondor so later. However, the edit now feels like it could be a bit tighter.
6

Press T to activate Trim Edit mode.

7

Press U twice to toggle the selected edit to an outgoing ripple edit.

8

Using , (comma), remove about 10 frames from the outgoing edit, reducing theamount of time between Doctor K’s line and Agent J’s response.

9

Press / (slash) to review the changes, making sure you’re happy with the pacing
between the two shots.

TIP Don’t forget that you can always add frames back on to this clip bypressing . (period).

When you’re satisfied with this edit, you can turn your attention to the next edit.
10 Press the Down Arrow key to move to the next edit.
11 Press the / (slash) key to review the edit.
Now you’ll trim this edit so that you see Doctor Kominsky’s reaction sooner.

Utilizing Split Edits

171

12 Select the video edit and position the playhead just as Agent J says, “Come with us.”13 Press E to perform the extend edit.

Again, the extend edit moves the selected edit point to the position of your playhead in
the timeline.
14 Press / (slash) to review the new split edit.
Now, you see much more of Doctor K’s reaction to the news. You can make much moreof this moment by slowing down the pace.
15 Press U to toggle the selection to an incoming ripple edit.
16 In the timeline viewer timecode field, type -12 (-00:12) and press Enter (Return).

The selected edit point ripples back by half a second, giving Doctor K that extra beat torealize what Agent J is telling her.
17 Press / (slash) to review the change.
Creating simple split edits like this is a quick and straightforward editing technique that isused all the time, not just in dialogue scenes such as this but in editing across all genres.

172

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

Dynamic Trimming
Another mode you can use in conjunction with either the Selection or Trim Edit modes is
the Dynamic Trim mode. Many editors like to use dynamic trimming because it allows you
to trim in real time as you are playing back. It takes a bit of practice to use effectively, but it
can be a very fast way of making even precise adjustments to a timeline.
1

In the current timeline, click away from any clips to deselect all clips and/or edit points.

2

Place the playhead over the next edit: the cut between B_S5_T1 CU Doctor K and
A_S8_T2 WS Agent J.

3

Press / (slash) to review this edit.
The pacing feels a little too tight, and you would like to see more of Agent J’s
exasperated reaction to the doctor’s flustered reaction.

4

Press T to ensure that you are in Trim Edit mode.

5

In the timeline toolbar, click the Dynamic Trim mode, or press W.

NOTE Dynamic Trim can be enabled when you are in Trim Edit or
Selection mode.

Dynamic Trimming

173

When Dynamic Trim mode is enabled, several things happen. First, the edit pointnearest the playhead is automatically selected, and the timeline playhead and Dynamic
Trim button turn yellow to indicate that you are now in Dynamic Trim mode.

However, other changes are not as obvious. Your familiar keyboard shortcuts have now
also changed their functions! If you’ve been using Spacebar to start/stop playback, thisnow becomes the equivalent to the Play Around Current Frame function, while the J
and L keys now adjust the edit point in real time!
6

Press U to toggle to a rolling selection, with both sides of the video edit being selected.

7

Press and hold the K then J keys together to begin trimming slowly backward until
before Agent J turns his head.

174

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

8

Press Spacebar to review the edit and adjust as necessary by holding K and L or J,
depending on whether you want to trim forward or backward.

TIP If you want to trim a frame at a time, the familiar , (comma) and . (period)
shortcuts will continue to work. Alternatively, you can hold down K and
tap J or L.

When you’re happy with the edit, press Down Arrow twice to jump to the edit point
between A_S8_T2 WS Agent J and B_S6_T5 WS Doctor K.
The audio and video edit points are automatically selected.
9Click the video edit to select it separately from the audio edit or press Option-U(macOS) or Alt-U (Windows).

10 Press L to roll the edit forward as Agent J watches Doctor K’s associate walk away andhis eyeline returns to look at the doctor.

Dynamic Trimming

175

11 Press Down Arrow to jump to the next edit point.

12 Press Option-U (macOS) or Alt-U (Windows) to toggle the selection to just the video edit.
13 Press K and L to roll the edit forward slightly until Agent J says, “…matter of national
security” and begins to step away in the incoming clip.

14 Press Down Arrow to select the next edit between A_S8_T2 WS Agent J and
B_S6_T3 WS Doctor K and press Option-U (macOS) or Alt-U (Windows) to selectthe video edit.

176

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

15 Press L to roll the edit forward as Doctor K says, “My help?” and Agent J begins to stepaway from her.

TIP All the trimming functions you’re familiar with, including slip and slide, areavailable to you in Dynamic Trim mode. To slip or slide a clip using dynamic trim,
select the clip and start trimming using the JKL keys. To switch between slip andslide edits, press S or right-click the Dynamic Trim button in the timeline toolbar.

Putting Yourself to the Test
Continue to finesse this edit using any of the techniques you prefer to adjust thepacing and cuts between each shot. Remember, there are really no right or wrong
ways to cut a scene like this, but these techniques have been used by editors
around the world for decades, so they are a good place to start.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the
TIMELINES bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/
Lesson 04/Timelines and select SYNC SCENE ROUGH CUT CATCHUP 3.drt
and click Open.

Dynamic Trimming

177

Filling the “Dead Air”
Once you’ve finished finessing the pacing of this scene, you’ll probably have short gaps
between some of the audio clips, particularly if you added pauses between the reactions
and the next line of dialogue. To help fill this “dead air,” you’ll add an audio clip of some
general background noise. This atmos, or wildtrack, could have been recorded on location
at the time of the shoot, or it could be a piece of audio from a sound effect library.
1

Press N to enable snapping in the timeline.

2

Return the timeline playhead to the first shot of Doctor K talking to her associate.

3

From the Audio bin, select the clip Atmosphere wild sound and open it in the source
viewer and add an In point near the start.

4

Ensure that the audio destination control in the timeline is active next to the DR K
audio track.

NOTE If the audio track selection control is disabled, Resolve won’t let you edit
this audio-only clip into the timeline in the next step.

178

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

5

Drag the audio clip to below A3 in the timeline.

The clip is automatically edited onto a new A4 audio track, but it’s too short to reachthe end of the scene.
6

Drag another instance of the same audio clip to this new track, starting about halfway
through the scene.

7

Trim the end of the second version of the atmos clip to just before the final shot in
the timeline.

Filling the “Dead Air”

179

8

Using the fade handles, add a short fade to the start of the first clip and the end of thesecond clip on track A4.

9

Return your playhead to the beginning of the timeline and play back the scene toreview your hard work.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the TIMELINES
bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 04/
Timelines and select SYNC SCENE ROUGH CUT CATCHUP FINISHED.drt andclick Open.

Well done! You have managed to edit a short dramatic scene between two charactersusing a variety of editing techniques, including Ripple Overwrite, extend edits, split edits,and dynamic trimming.
While this lesson has ostensibly been about editing drama, its underlying theme iscontinuity. Continuity editing involves matching screen direction, position, and temporal
relations from shot to shot in support of the story. Hopefully, you now have a deeper
understanding of how the editing tools in DaVinci Resolve can support this importantunderlying principle of editing.

180

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

Lesson Review
1

What do the preview marks on the timeline indicate?
a) They show where you can add markers.
b) They help determine where clips will be placed when making three-point edits.
c) They show where text and graphics will align on the timeline viewer.

2

True or false? Ripple Overwrite is a three-point edit.

3

True or false? All clips in the Take Selector should have the same duration.

4

Which of the following are commonly types of split edits?
a) J-cutsb) K-cutsc) L-cuts

5

True or false? Dynamic Trimming can only be used when the timeline is in Trim
Edit mode.

Lesson Review

181

Answers1b) Preview marks help you determine where clips will be placed whenever you executea three-point edit.

2

False. Ripple Overwrite is a four-point edit that you use when the duration of themarked source clip is different from the duration marked in the timeline, and when
you want the timeline to ripple to accommodate the difference in duration.

3

False. The Take Selector can contain clips of different durations. When switching
between these clips, you can enable the Ripple Take button in the upper-right corner(to the left of the trash can button).

4a) and c) J-cuts are when audio edits precede video edits, and L-cuts are when video
edits precede audio edits.

5

False. Dynamic Trimming can be used when the timeline is in either Selection or
Trim Edit mode.

182

Lesson 4

Cutting a Dramatic Scene

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

Multiple cameras runningsimultaneously are used for manyTimetypes of productions, including music

This lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

videos and reality TV programs, withGoals

even simple interviews benefitting

Editing a Multicamera Interview

184

Switching Multicam Angles

192

The multicamera editing workflow in

Editing a Multicamera
Music Video 	

197

the edit page allows you to initially

Real-Time Multicamera Editing203

synchronize multiple clips and then

Adjusting the Multicamera Edit

210

Adjusting a Multicam Clip214

Lesson Review

221

from being shot on more than
one camera.

easily cut between different camera
angles without any further concern
about sync issues. Utilizing the powerof metadata provides even more
flexibility when it comes to naming
and ordering camera angles.
In this lesson, you’ll explore thepower of multicamera functionality
in the edit page across two
projects and learn how to solve somecommon challenges.

Editing a Multicamera Interview
Accurately establishing the sync relationship between multiple camera angles is critical fora successful multicamera edit in the edit page.
1

Open Resolve, and in the Project Manager, right-click and choose Import Project.

2

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 05. Select the OMO MULTICAM INTERVIEW.drp
project file and choose Open, and then double-click the project in the Project Manager
to open it.

3

Switch to the edit page, if necessary, and then relink the media files using the Relink
Media button.
This project contains footage from the interview with Chris Lang from Organ
Mountain Outfitters.

4

In the timeline, review the current edit, OMO_Multicam_EDIT.

This simple timeline has the opening timelapse shot and logo from the Organ
Mountain Outfitters promo video you edited in Lessons 1 and 2, followed by a B-rollfeaturing the “Buy a Shirt, Give a Lunch Forever” promise.
The director wants to insert the interview between the logo and the “Buy a Shirt…” sign.

184

5

Position your timeline playhead on the first frame of SHIRT SIGN clip.

6

In the media pool, select the Interviews bin in the OMO bin and review the footage.

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

This bin contains three interview clips with Chris in which he introduces himself andexplains the Organ Mountain Outfitters “Buy a Shirt, Give a Lunch” concept. Thankfully,
because this interview was shot on more than one camera, you can cut between the
different cameras instead of adding B-roll cutaways to cover jump cuts or patching
the interview with the Smooth Cut transition. However, before you start editing thisinterview, you need to sync the clips.
There are several ways you can sync multicamera footage on the edit page. In this firstexercise, you’ll manually sync the footage in a normal timeline so you can appreciate
how multicam clips are organized.
7

In the media pool, right-click the Interviews bin and choose Create Timeline Using
Selected Bin.

8

In the New Timeline window, name this timeline OMO Interview, deselect Use
Selected Mark In/Out, and click Create.

Editing a Multicamera Interview

185

A new timeline is added to the Interview bin and automatically opens in the timeline.

9

In the timeline, select the second clip, B 0002.mov, and drag it up to create new V2and A2 tracks.

10 Move the third clip – C 002.mov – up to create new V3 and A3 tracks.

186

Lesson 5

Multicamera EditingNext, you’ll get Resolve to automatically synchronize these three clips in the timeline.
There are two main ways you can do this: if you have accurate timecode across allthese clips, then you can synchronize using the timecode. Alternatively, you can use
the audio waveforms.
Because this footage has accurate timecode recorded across all three clips, that’s what
you’ll use to sync the clips.
11 In the timeline, select all three clips, and then choose Clip > Auto Align Clips > Basedon Timecode.
After a brief analysis, Resolve correctly synchronizes the two clips in the timeline.

Now that you have the angles synchronized, you need to convert the OMO Interview
timeline into a special multicam clip.
12 In the Interviews bin, right-click the OMO Interview timeline and choose Convert
Timeline to Multicam Clip.

Editing a Multicamera Interview

187

The timeline closes (because it’s no longer a timeline), and its bin icon changes to thatof a multicam clip.

TIP You can identify a multicam clip in the timeline by the multicam icon next
to the name of the clip.

You’re now ready to insert this interview into the main timeline and start editing
between the different angles.

Viewing and Trimming the Multicam Clip
You can work with a multicam clip just like any other source clip. However, because it
contains multiple angles in a single clip, you can switch between them at any time.
1

Click the Options menu (three dots) in the source viewer and choose Show Full Clip
Audio Waveform.

NOTE If you have a multicam clip already open the source viewer, you will not
be able to access the waveform displays. If this is the case, simply open one of
the regular interview clips in the source viewer to enable the waveforms, andthen reopen the multicam clip.

188

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

2

Double-click the OMO Interview multicam clip to open it in the source viewer.

Because this is a multicam clip, Resolve automatically displays the angles
simultaneously. The angle with the red outline represents the currently active angle—
the angle that you will see and hear.

NOTE The names of these angles are “Video 1,” “Video 2,” and “Video 3”
because these were the names of the video tracks in the original timeline fromwhich the multicam clip was created. You’ll learn how to rename angles later inthis lesson.

3

Play the multicam clip in the source viewer. All angles should be in sync.

4

In the source viewer, set an In point just before Chris says, “My name is Chris Lang…”
and an Out point after Chris says, “…our communities that we live in.”Editing a Multicamera Interview

189

5

Press F9 to Insert or click the Insert Clip button in the timeline toolbar (or however you
prefer to perform an Insert edit) to insert this multicam clip into the timeline at theplayhead position.

When you play this multicam clip in the timeline, you’ll see only the currently active
angle. The other angles are hidden.
Now that you have the interview in the timeline, you can start to edit toimprove the flow.
6

If required, resize the audio track so you can easily see the waveform of theinterview audio.

7

In the timeline, play through the interview until just after Chris says, “…Organ Mountain
Outfitters.” Press I to add and In point.

8

Continue to play through the interview until after the next question and just before
Chris says, “…a lifestyle and outdoor brand.” Press O to add an Out point.

190

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

9

Press Shift-Delete (or Shift-Backspace) to ripple delete the marked section.

10 Press / (slash) to preview the edit.
11 If necessary, enter Trim Edit mode and refine the edit so Chris says, “My nameis Chris Lang, and I’m the founder of Organ Mountain Outfitters, a lifestyle andoutdoor brand….”
12 Continue to play the interview and mark In and Out points around the breath after
Chris says, “…outdoor brand” and before he says, “That not only promotes….”

13 Again, press Shift-Delete (or Shift-Backspace) to ripple delete the marked portionof the interview, press / (slash) to review the edit, and refine using Trim Edit mode
if required.

By now, this process should be second nature to you. You can treat this multicam clip
exactly like any other clip you’ve worked with previously. However, once you have theradio edit working to your satisfaction, you’re ready to put the additional angles ofyour multicam clip to work.

Editing a Multicamera Interview

191

Switching Multicam Angles
Not all multicamera edits must done on-the-fly, cutting between angles in real time as the
footage races past. You can switch between the different angles within a multicam clipat any time.
1

In the OMO Multicam EDIT timeline, place the playhead on the first edit in the interview.

2

Press / (slash) to review the cut.
Ouch! You’ll no doubt agree that this is a rather nasty jump cut!

3

Right-click the second multicam clip in the timeline and choose Switch Multicam Clip
Angle > Video 3.

4

192

Press / (slash) to review the new edit.

Lesson 5

Multicamera EditingBy switching the multicam clip to the third video angle, you have successfully covered
the jump cut between the two parts of the interview!

You can continue to use this technique to help tighten and make the interview morevisually engaging.
5

Continue playing the multicam clip in the timeline and stop after Chris says, “…
gives back….”

6

Press Command-B (macOS) or Ctrl-B (Windows) to add an edit at this point in themulticam clip.

7

Right-click the incoming clip to the right of this new edit and choose Switch Multicam
Clip Angle > Video 2.

Switching Multicam Angles

193

8

Using Trim Edit mode, trim the incoming multicam clip by about 21 frames, to where
Chris says, “…to our communities…” to further tighten the interview.

9

Return to the start of the multicam clips in the timeline and review the changes you’ve
just made.

NOTE The above techniques will switch the video part of the multicam clip in thetimeline. If you want or need to switch the audio, right-click the audio clip andchoose Switch Multicam Clip Angle, where you will find the audio angles available.

Finessing and Flattening the Multicam Clips
Now that you have the interview sitting amid the rest of the footage, and utilizing thedifferent angles, it’s time to begin finessing how you may move into an out of the interview.
1

Press Shift-Command-L (macOS) or Shift-Ctrl-L (Windows) or click the Linked Selection
toolbar button to disable your timeline’s Linked Selection feature.

2

Make sure you are still in Trim Edit mode.
To begin with, you’ll adjust the cut between the interview and the last clip in the timeline.

3

194

Select the outgoing video edit between the fourth multicam clip and the SHIRT SIGN clip.

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

4

Trim the video edit back by about 10 frames to create a slight L-cut over Chris’s final
words: “…live in.”5

Press / (slash) to preview the selected edit.
That simple change has created a nice split edit that helps soften the end of theinterview going back into the B-roll footage.
Now you’ll turn your attention to the incoming part of the interview.

6

With Trim Edit mode still active, select the incoming side of the video of first interview clip.

7

Position the timeline playhead over the first interview clip, at the point where Chris
says his name, “…Chris Lang….”

Switching Multicam Angles

195

8

Press E to make an Extend Edit and quickly create a spilt edit.

9

Press / (slash) to preview the edit.
Offsetting the edits by even a small number of frames can make a big improvement in
the way the edits are perceived.
When editing multicamera footage, the final steps are to flatten the multicam clips
used in the timeline to remove all the additional angles and leave just the active angles
as normal timeline clips.

TIP Once you’ve flattened a multicam clip, you will no longer be able to switch
to the alternate angles. Therefore, a good technique is to duplicate the timelineprior to flattening the multicam clips so that you have an unflattened version
you can change later if required.

10 Press A to switch to Selection mode and select all the multicam clips in your timeline(both audio and video). Right-click any of the selected clips and choose Flatten
Multicam Clip.

Flattening the multicam clips is an important step for several reasons. First, it meansthat clips can be graded individually in the color page. If left unflattened, then themulticam clip itself is graded, rather than the individual angle. Second, if your multicam
clips contain complex audio channel configurations, flattening the multicam clip
means that you will regain access to those channels.

196

Lesson 5

Multicamera EditingBy shooting this interview with more than one camera, you can cut the interview
effectively without having to paint it entirely with B-roll or relying on the SmoothCut transition.

NOTE If you wish to view the finished version of this edit created using thesteps detailed in this section, select the TIMELINES bin, choose File > Import> Timeline and navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 05/Timelines and open
OMO MULTICAM EDIT FINISHED.drt.

Editing a Multicamera Music VideoFor the next multicamera exercise, you’ll concentrate on editing a live music video, which will
enable you to explore some of the more in-depth features of multicamera editing in the edit
page. You will begin this exercise by importing a different project in the Project Manager.
1

Choose File > Project Manager or press Shift-1 to open the Project Manager window.

2

Click the Import button or right-click in an empty area of the Project Manager window
and choose Import Project.

3

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 5, select the MISERABLE GIRL MULTICAM.drp
file, and click Open.

4

Once the project has been imported, double-click it in the Project Manager to open it.

5

Click the Relink Media button and relink the offline media files.
This project contains footage of the band Jitterbug Riot performing their song
“Miserable Girl.”

6

Select the Miserable Girl bin and review the footage.

Editing a Multicamera Music Video

197

This bin contains eight separate video clips of the band performing their song. Each of
the video clips has guide audio recorded on the in-camera microphones. A separate.wav audio file contains a clean, mixed version of the track that the band is performing.

TIP You can turn audio scrubbing on and off by pressing Shift-S.
7

Click the clip JBR_01.mov to select it in the bin.

8

Open the Inspector and select the File tab.
The File Inspector displays some commonly used metadata for the selected clip.

Notice that this clip has Camera metadata identifying it as Camera “01” in theFile Inspector.

198

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

9

At the bottom of the File Inspector, click the Next Clip button.
The next clip in the bin, JBR_02.mov, is selected and its metadata is displayed in theFile Inspector.

Notice that this clip has Camera metadata identifying it as “08.” The other clips in thisbin are similarly identified with different Camera # metadata.
10 In the bin, select Miserable Girl Final Mix.aif.

Editing a Multicamera Music Video199

11 Again, notice that this audio-only clip has Camera metadata identifying it as “MUSIC.”

Creating the Multicam Clip
As in the previous exercise, the first step in editing multicamera footage on the edit pageis to synchronize the clips. In the previous exercise, you achieved this in a manual way byarranging the clips on different tracks in a timeline and getting Resolve to synchronize
them using timecode. In this example, you’ll let Resolve organize the multicam clip for you
using the camera metadata you just reviewed.

200

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

1

In the bin list, right-click the Miserable Girl bin and choose Create New Multicam Clip
Using Selected Bin.

NOTE You can also create a new multicam clip from individually selected clips
instead of an entire bin.

The New Multicam Clip window opens, in which you can select how Resolve will
synchronize the clips and create the multicam clip.

Editing a Multicamera Music Video

201

2

In the Multicam Clip Name field, type MISERABLE GIRL SYNC.

3

In the Angle Sync pop-up, choose Sound.
Selecting Sound synchronizes the clips based on their audio content.

NOTE Other options for synchronizing multicam clips include using existing In
or Out points and matching timecode or markers.

4

Change the Angle Name menu to Metadata – Camera.

NOTE The Angle Name option dictates the order in which the angles are
sorted. When you choose Sequential, Resolve labels the angles and sorts
them as Angle 1, Angle 2, and so on, based on their starting timecode values,
with the earliest timecode becoming the first angle. Choosing Clip Namesorts the clip names in ascending alphanumeric order and labels the angles
appropriately. Similarly, choosing Metadata – Angle or Metadata – Camera
sorts the clips based on information in their respective metadata fields.

202

5

Ensure that the option Move Source Clips to ‘Original Clips’ Bin is selected.

6

Click Create to create the multicam clip.

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

Resolve analyzes the clips’ audio and, once completed, creates the new multicam
clip in the selected bin. A new bin also appears called Original Clips that contains theindividual camera source clips.

This multicam clip is now ready to be edited.

Real-Time Multicamera Editing
The fun aspect of working with a multicamera edit in the edit page is that you can cut
between the different cameras in real time as if you were sitting in in front of a live video
switcher. Often, this will save you hours because you can cut the material in the time ittakes to play the timeline.
1

Double-click the Miserable Girl SYNC multicam clip to open it in the source viewer.

Real-Time Multicamera Editing

203

The multicam clip appears in the source viewer and displays each of the nine different
clips—or angles—as a separate box, each displaying the appropriate Camera
metadata information. This view organizes the angles from left to right and from top
to bottom. So, the first angle (in this case, JBR_01.mov and identified as “Camera 01”)
appears in the upper-left window and the ninth angle (Miserable Girl Final Mix.aif
and identified as “Camera MUSIC”) appears in the lower-right window. Notice that theangle names have inherited the Camera # metadata information.

NOTE If the playhead is at the start of the multicam clip, you will see blankframes for most of the angles because not all the cameras began rolling at thesame time. Simply move the playhead to later in the multicam clip to see thefootage for all the angles.

2

Play the multicam clip in the source viewer to verify that all the angles arecorrectly in sync.
Because Camera 01, in the upper-right quadrant of the viewer, is selected by default,that is the angle that you will hear when you begin playing the clip.

3

Return the playhead to the start of the multicam clip and set an In point just before themusic starts (around 01:00:19:00).

204

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

4

Perform an Overwrite edit to edit this clip into the empty MISERABLE GIRL EDIT
timeline, and press Home to return the playhead to the beginning of the timeline.

5

Click the Media Pool and Inspector buttons to hide the respective panels and giveyourself a little more space to view the multicamera footage in all its glory.

In the timeline viewer, only the first angle, Camera 01, is displayed because that is
the active camera. To be able to effectively switch camera angles and keep the source
viewer in sync with the timeline clip, you need to enable multicam mode for thesource viewer.
6

In the source viewer mode pop-up menu, choose Multicam to display themulticam viewer.

Enabling multicam mode replaces the transport controls under the viewer withmulticam-related controls. Transport controls are not necessary in the multicam

Real-Time Multicamera Editing

205

viewer because moving the timeline playhead will also move the source clips in themulticam viewer, so they maintain their synced relationship.

7

Play the timeline and see how the different angles in the multicamera viewer play insync with the timeline viewer.

206

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

8

In the timeline, right-click the audio for the multicam clip and choose Switch Multicam
Clip Angle > Camera MUSIC.

The audio for the multicam clip is changed so that it plays the audio from theMiserable Girl Final Mix.aif file as indicated by the clip’s name in the timeline.

The multicam viewer also displays a green box around the MUSIC angle to indicatethat this is the currently active audio.

Real-Time Multicamera Editing

207

9

In the timeline, right-click the video for the multicam clip and choose Switch Multicam
Clip Angle To > Camera 04.
The video in the timeline viewer updates to display the video clip for Angle 4, and themulticam viewer now also displays a blue box around the same angle to denote that
this is the currently active video angle.

You will now tell Resolve that you want to edit only the video from this multicam clip,
since you don’t want to edit between the different audio from the different cameras.
In the multicam viewer, three buttons control which parts of this multicam clip cut
when you switch angles: video, video and sound, or sound only.

10 Click the Video button to the left to edit only the video of this multicam clip.

Now for the fun part…

208

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

11 With the playhead at the start of the timeline, start playing, and begin clicking each of
the video clips in the source viewer to cut between the angles of the multicam clip in
real time. As you do so, you will see the edit points appear in the timeline as you cut
between the angles. Keep going until you reach the end of the timeline.

NOTE You can also press the 1, 2, and 3 keys along the top of your keyboard
to cut between the angles instead of clicking on the boxes in the multicam
source viewer.

12 Once you’ve reached the end of the song, return the playhead to the start of thetimeline and click Play to review your multicamera masterpiece!
How cool is that?
Unfortunately, while it’s great fun, this first attempt at a real-time multicamera edit willprobably not result in a perfect edit. It’s very rare that you would cut to the exact angle atexactly the right time on your first try.
Instead, think of this as your rough cut, which you will now need to refine.

Real-Time Multicamera Editing

209

Multicamera Editing Techniques
When editing multicamera material like this, don’t try to make every cut perfect on
the first pass. Instead, try to get a feel for the pacing of the music and the different
angles you have to work with. It can be useful to watch the multicam clip back a
few times before making a single cut. When you do start editing, try to make cuts
according to when you feel they work best with the music, and don’t be afraid tomake mistakes. You’ll learn how to refine the edit further in the next steps.
If you find it difficult to concentrate on so many angles at once, it’s often useful to
reduce the number of angles you’re viewing at any one time. In this case, click theMulticam Display pop-up menu in the bottom-right of the multicam source viewer
and choose an option such as “2x2.” This option displays only the first four anglesof the multicam clip, with the other angles then available on different “pages,”which can be accessed using the Multicam page buttons that now appear.
By reducing the initial number of angles you’re working with, you might find it
easier to begin your multicamera edit. You can then introduce the other angles
once you have the initial rough cut down. It can also help maintain real-timeplayback for slower systems.
You can use metadata (as you’ve done here) to identify the most important clips
as angles 1 through 4 (or see the section “Adjusting a Multicam Clip” later inthis lesson) and then order your clips appropriately when you create your own
multicam clips.

Adjusting the Multicamera Edit
Now that you’ve completed your rough cut, when you review it, you might notice two
common issues: you’ve made a cut at the wrong time, or you’ve cut to the wrong angle.
Even worse, it could be both issues at the same time!
Fear not. You’re not directing live television here; this is post-production, so you canchange your mind before anyone has seen your previous “creative choices.” Solving thefirst issue where you cut at the wrong time is easy. You already know how to change anexisting cut point by simply performing a rolling trim using any number of techniques.
The second issue, where you use the wrong angle, is just as easy to fix by switching angles
in the source viewer.

210

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

TIP When working with a multicamera edit, you need to be very mindful of the sync
between the angles. For this reason, it’s probably not advisable to begin rippling,slipping, or sliding shots until you are confident that you have mastered thosetechniques and are very familiar with the source footage.

1

In the timeline, play your multicam edit until you see a shot you want to change, andthen stop playback.
As the edit plays, the source viewer will also update because in Multicam mode thesource viewer is automatically ganged to the timeline playhead position.

2

In the multicam viewer, Option-click (macOS) or Alt-click (Windows) a different image
to switch the active angle to the new angle.

When you’re switching the active angle, the mouse pointer changes to a replace
edit icon.
It’s just as easy to add further cuts to your multicam edit, too.

Adjusting the Multicamera Edit

211

3

In the timeline, move the playhead to the middle of one of the multicam clips, and in
the source viewer, click any other angle.

A new (through) edit point appears at the playhead position in the timeline andchanges the rest of the multicam clip after the cut to the new active angle.

TIP Pressing the number keys at the top of your keyboard (1, 2, 3, and so on)
makes a cut at the playhead position in the timeline. Holding down Option (macOS)
or Alt (Windows) and pressing a number key switches the multicam clip angle atthe playhead position in the timeline. You can perform either of these operations
during playback or when the playhead is stationary.

Excellent. Now you have a real taste of how much fun multicamera editing is, and how it
works in Resolve. But before you start making further adjustments to this edit, you’ll lookat other ways you can adjust the multicam clip itself.

212

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

Multicam Editing with the Speed Editor
DaVinci Resolve 18 has improved Speed Editor functionality for multicamera
editing in the edit page.
Sync Bin button activates source
viewer Multicam mode

Double-press and hold to resize
timeline with scroll wheel

CAM# buttons to change angles:
Press # to cut to angle number
Double-press # to switch to angle number

Adjusting the Multicamera Edit

213

Adjusting a Multicam Clip
A multicamera clip is actually a type of container timeline, similar to a compound clip. You’ll
work more with compound clips in Lesson 7, “Compositing in the Edit Page,” but for now
it’s useful to know that you can open a multicam clip in its own timeline when you need tomake changes, such as changing the order of the angles or an angle’s name.
1

In the Timeline View Options pop-up menu, select Stacked Timelines.

The current timeline appears as an individual tab along the top of the timeline window.

2

Select any of the multicam clips in the timeline and choose Clip > Open in Timeline orright-click any of the multicam clips in the timeline and choose Open in Timeline.

214

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

The multicam clip opens in its own tabbed timeline.

3

To view such a large number of timeline tracks effectively, reduce the video andaudio track heights to their minimum and increase the size of the timeline window bydragging the line between the viewers and the toolbar area upward.

You can see how Resolve has structured and organized the multicam clip; it’s very
similar to the way you arranged the clips of Chris’s interview in the timeline before
creating the first multicam clip in this lesson. The organization is simple: any content
on the video and audio 1 tracks is displayed as the first angle in the multicam viewer.
If content is present on the video and/or audio 2 tracks, it is displayed as angle 2, andso on. Notice that the track names follow the names of the angles as displayed in theMulticam source viewer.

Adjusting a Multicam Clip215

NOTE Notice how the V9 track is empty. This is because the Miserable Girl
Final Mix.aif audio occupies the A9 track, meaning that the music for this edit
is available as Angle 9.

You will now add an additional angle and change the order of the angles in thismulticam clip.
4

Right-click any of the timeline video track headers and choose Add Angle.

A new angle is added, V10 and A10, both called “Angle 10.”5Open the media pool and select the Extra Angle bin.

A tenth, currently unused angle, is in this bin, called JBR_09.mov.

216

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

6

Drag the JBR_09.mov clip into the new V10 in the multicam clip timeline.

7

Close the media pool.
You will now need to sync this new angle to the other angles in this multicam
clip timeline.

8

Ensure that Link Selection is enabled, select the clip on V10/A10, and Shift-click anyother clip in the timeline.

9

Right-click on any of the video clips and choose Auto Align Clips > Based on Waveform.

Adjusting a Multicam Clip217

Resolve instantly syncs the new angle to the existing angles!

You will now rename the new angle to ensure that you keep your multicam cliporganized and tidy.
10 Right-click the track header for V10 and choose Move Angle Down.

Resolves changes the order of angles V10 and V9 (as well as A10 and A9).

However, notice that this new angle is still named Angle 10.

218

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

11 Click the angle name and type Camera 09 in keeping with the other angle names forthis multicam clip.
Now you can start to use this new angle in your multicamera edit.
12 Middle-click the timeline tab for the MISERABLE GIRL SYNC to close the multicam
clip’s timeline and return to the main timeline for this edit.
13 Resize the timeline window to make it shorter now that you no longer have lots oftracks to view.
14 In the source viewer pop-up menu, choose Multicam to switch the source viewer to themulticam viewer.
The multicam viewer now displays the additional camera angle as Camera 09.
15 In the Multicam view pop-up, choose 3x3 to view all nine video angles in the multicam
clip. The additional “MUSIC” angle can be accessed using the multicam page controlsthat appear to the left of the multicam view pop-up when the total number of angles ismore than the current view allows.

NOTE Even though your multicam clips can contain an unlimited number ofangles, the maximum number of angles you can view at the same time is 25
using the 5x5 view. Any more angles in your multicam clip will be shown insubsequent “pages” in the multicam viewer.

Adjusting a Multicam Clip

219

16 Finally, watch your multicam edit through again, making any further adjustments you
think are necessary. Don’t forget to include the new camera angle and flatten themulticam clips once you’ve finished!

NOTE If you wish to view finished versions of this edit created using thesteps detailed in this lesson, select the TIMELINES bin, choose File > Import >Timeline, and navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 05/Timelines. Here you willfind two versions of the finished timeline. MISERABLE GIRL FINISHED.drt isan edited version that you can use to practice your multicamera editing skills.
This timeline will also import the associated multicam clip used in this edit
because it’s a different multicam clip than the one you’ve created as part of thislesson. MISERABLE GIRL FINISHED_FLATTENED.drt is the same edit but has
been flattened so the alternative angles are no longer available.

Congratulations! You should now have the skills necessary to tackle even the most complex
multicamera editing tasks in DaVinci Resolve’s edit page.
Remember, when editing multicamera projects and playing back in real time, you are reallytrying to assess the rhythms and themes of the music and capture those characteristics
as you are cutting. Sometimes you might cut a multicam clip in three or four ways toexperiment with various pacing strategies and later decide which one is showing themost love. However you approach your multicamera projects, though, as with all editing,each cut requires constant revisiting and reworking to ensure that your audience sees thebest possible results.

220

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

Lesson Review
1

What options do you have for synchronizing angles in a multicam clip from video clips
without sound?
a) In or Out pointsb) Markersc) Timecode2What is the maximum number of angles you can view simultaneously in a
multicam clip?
a) 9
b) 16
c) 25

3

Which modifier key is held down to switch the entire multicam clip to another angle
instead of adding a new edit point?
a) Command (macOS) or Ctrl (Windows)b) Option (macOS) or Alt (Windows)c) Shift

4

True or false? You cannot change the angle names, add additional angles to, or change
the current order of the angles of an existing multicam clip.

5

True or false? When you choose to flatten a multicam clip, you lose all the othersynchronized angles from the multicam clip(s) in the timeline.

Lesson Review

221

Answers
1a), b), and c) You can choose to synchronize angles using In points, Out points,
timecode, or markers instead of sound.

2c) 25. You can have multiple pages of more angles, but the maximum number ofangles you can view in any one page is 25 (5x5).

3b) Option-click (macOS) or Alt-click (Windows) an angle to switch the existing angle.

4

False. Right-click a multicam clip and choose Open in Timeline to adjust an existing
multicam clip.

5

True. Flattening a multicam clip removes all the unused angles and leaves only the clipthat was used as the active angle in the timeline.

222

Lesson 5

Multicamera Editing

Lesson 6

Project Organization

While DaVinci Resolve is a superior
editing, audio mixing, visual effects,Timeand color grading system, it can alsoThis lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

play a key role on set before a single

Goals

edit is made. In this lesson, you’ll
focus on some of the powerful yet
lesser-known and often overlookedfunctions that will help you organize
and optimize high-resolution,
camera‑original media and generally
prepare everything for your edit.

Creating a New Project
and Project Settings

224

Importing Media

230

Generating Proxy Files

234

Syncing Audio to Video

246

Configuring Metadata Presets

252

Importing and Using Metadata

257

Creating Subclips

281

Power Bins

290

Lesson Review

293With that in mind, DaVinci Resolve has a specific page dedicated to helping you focus on
preparing and organizing the media for your project: the media page. It is here that you
have the most space to explore the clips you have to work with, without the distraction oftimeline windows, color grading controls or audio mixers.
Yet project organization isn’t something that happens only after you import the clips
into your project; rather, it’s something that’s constantly being refined as you work on
a project, often right up until the point you’re ready to deliver it. As such, although thislesson is designed to highlight this functionality in the media page, many of the steps
discussed in this lesson can be applied directly in the edit page so you can implement
them alongside your editing.
In order to explore these steps so that you can begin applying them to your own projects,
you’ll set up a new project and import the Organ Mountain Outfitters’ footage you worked
on in Lessons 1 and 2.

Creating a New Project
and Project Settings
The first step for any project is to actually create a new project in the Project Manager.
1

Open DaVinci Resolve and, in the Project Manager window, click the New
Project button.

2

In the Create New Project window, type My Project as the name for this new project.

3

Click Create.

4

Click the Media page button and choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout.
As mentioned previously in the introduction to this chapter, the media page isdedicated to the reviewing and organizing of your source media—principally video,
audio, and graphics files.

224

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Media Storage
Locations

Bin Lists

Media Storage
BrowserMedia Pool

Viewer

Audio

Metadata

When you create a new project in DaVinci Resolve, the project itself has some default
settings it draws upon. The next step when creating a new project should be to checkthese basic settings.
5

Choose File > Project Settings or press Shift-9 to open the Project Settings window.

Creating a New Project and Project Settings225

As an editor, the main settings to be concerned with are in the Master Settings. This
group of settings primarily deals with the Timeline Settings and Video Monitoring forthis project.
By default, all projects have a timeline resolution of 1920 x 1080 HD and a timeline
frame rate of 24 frames per second (fps). This means that this is the resolution andframe rate used whenever you create a new timeline using the Project Settings option.
These settings can be changed when you create a new timeline, so each timelinein any project can have completely different settings, but as most projects tend
to use the same timeline settings, it’s useful to set a general setting in the Project
Settings window.
So, what timeline settings should you use? Well, that depends primarily on where you
will deliver your final edited timeline. For example, if you’re working on a feature-film
project, you’ll probably want to deliver a 3840 x 2160 Ultra HD timeline at 24 frames
per second; if it’s a broadcast TV show, then the timeline might be 1920 x 1080 HD at
29.97 frames per second (or 25 frames per second for the UK and Europe); whereas if
you will deliver a file to a streaming site such as YouTube or Vimeo, then your choices
aren’t quite so limited and you may need to make a judgement call based on thesource footage itself. If in doubt, it’s always worth talking to the director to determine
the best settings for your project.

NOTE If you’re working for broadcast TV, you may still be required to workwith an interlaced timeline, which DaVinci Resolve fully supports. To enableinterlaced processing for a timeline, select the “Enable interlace processing”
option in the Timeline Format section of Project Settings or in the Format
tab of the New Timeline window. The frame rates for interlaced timelines
are measured in fields per second and can only be set to 50, 59.94, or 60,
equating to 25, 29.97 and 30 frames per second, respectively. Everything in aninterlaced timeline, including graphics, Fusion compositions, and video clips,
are processed at the field level for high-quality compositing and titling forinterlace delivery.

Although the footage for this project for Organ Mountain Outfitters, which is destined
to be uploaded to different streaming sites, was shot at different resolutions andframe rates, the main footage was shot at 1920 x 1080 HD and at 23.976 frames
per second. Therefore, this is the resolution and frame rate you will work with forthis project.

226

Lesson 6

Project Organization

6

Select 1920 x 1080 HD from the Timeline Resolution dropdown menu and 23.976
frames per second from the Timeline Frame Rate dropdown menu.

NOTE When you change the frames per second option, the Playback frame
rate and Video Format in the Video Monitoring section change to match.
Normally, this is what you would want; however, in very rare instances you canadjust these separately, especially if you’re working with a timeline resolution orframe rate that is unsupported by the video monitoring hardware.

Saving Project Presets and theSetting Default Preset
If you frequently work with projects that require different Timeline Format settingsor you need a specific setting for your timelines for all projects beyond the standard
1920 x 1080 HD and 24 fps, it can be useful to save different project presets that can beeasily recalled, or even set the current project preset as a default for all newly createdprojects in the current Project Library.

Creating a New Project and Project Settings

227

1

In the Project Settings window, click the Options (three dots) menu and choose Save
Current Settings as Preset.

2

In the Preset Name window, type 1080p23.976 and click OK.

All the settings for the current project are now saved as a preset you can quickly load.
3

Click the options menu again and choose Default Preset > Load Preset to reload thedefault project settings, returning the Timeline Format settings to their starting values.

4

Click the options menu and choose 1080p23.976 > Load Preset to reload the saved
preset you’ll use for this project.

NOTE Saving a project preset saves all the settings in the Project Settings
window, not just those in the Master Settings (a full discussion of which isbeyond the scope of this editing training guide).

You can also export a project preset that you can use to quickly load the same projectsettings onto another DaVinci Resolve 18 system.

228

Lesson 6

Project Organization

5

Click the options menu and choose 1080p23.976 > Export Preset.

6

In the Save As field, type 1080p23.976, choose a location, and click Save to save theexported .preset file.

NOTE To import this project .preset file onto another DaVinci Resolve 18
system, select the options menu in Project Settings and choose Import Preset.

You can also set any saved preset as a default for all new DaVinci Resolve projects forthe current Project Library.
7

Click the Project Settings options menu and choose 1080p23.976 > Set as
Default Preset.

A window appears confirming that you want to set the 1080p23.976 preset as thedefault for all future projects.

8

Click Set.
Now all future projects created in the current Project Library will use this presetby default.

Creating a New Project and Project Settings229

Importing Media
There are numerous ways to import files into a DaVinci Resolve project. For instance, you
could choose File > Import > Media on any page that has access to the media pool (thatis, every page except the deliver page). You can also simply drag and drop files from theFinder (macOS) or File Explorer (Windows) directly into the media pool! However, both ofthese techniques offer limited options, whereas the media page has much more flexibility
when it comes to importing clips.

NOTE Whenever you import media, DaVinci Resolve creates a link to the original
clips on your hard drive. At no point does this import process copy, move, convert,
or in any way alter the source media.

1

In the media storage, navigate to the R18 Editors Guide > Media > Organ Mountain
Outfitters folder.

The media storage browser displays four folders containing the clips used in the Organ
Mountain Outfitter’s promo.
2

Double-click to open the INTERVIEW folder.
This folder contains two additional folders, AUDIO and VIDEO.

230

Lesson 6

Project Organization

3

Open the VIDEO folder and move your mouse across any of the clips to Live Preview inthe viewer.

TIP You can disable and enable Live Preview in the viewer’s options(three dots) menu.

4

Select any of the video clips to display the clip in the viewer.
When a clip is selected, the Metadata panel gives you some information regarding thatclip, including the file’s codec, resolution, frame rate, and number of audio channels.

Importing Media

231

5

Press Spacebar or L to play the clip in the viewer.
As the clip plays back, the Audio panel displays the levels of the embedded
audio channels.

NOTE The media page supports the same keyboard shortcuts for playing clips
that you’ve been using on the edit page.

6

In the media storage browser, click the Back button twice to return to the Organ
Mountain Outfitters folder level.

232

7

Double-click the B-ROLL folder to display the clips inside that folder.

8

From the top of the browser, click the List View button.

Lesson 6

Project Organization

The List View displays more information about the individual files than the Thumbnail
View does. Here, you can see at a glance that these clips have a resolution of 3840 x
2160 and frame rates of either 23.976 or 59.94 fps. Therefore, using the media storagebrowser, you can assess the footage you have prior to import and even choose which
specific clips you want to import into your project. Other import methods aren’t quite
so helpful.
9

Click the Back button to return to the previous folder level.

10 Select the four folders in the Organ Mountain Outfitter’s folder.
11 Right-click any of the selected folders to reveal the importing options.

There are three main options for importing clips from the media storage browser:— Add Folder into Media Pool will import the contents from one level inside thecurrent folder.
— Add Folder and SubFolders into Media Pool will import the contents of thecurrent folder and any folders contained within it. This is the same as when you
drag a folder into the media pool either from the media storage browser, orfrom the Finder (macOS) or File Explorer (Windows). This is a useful option whenimporting numerous files from different folders from a camera card that uses acomplex directory structure.
— Add Folder and SubFolders into Media Pool (Create Bins) will import thecontents of the current folder and any folders contained within it, preserving thefolder structure as a series of bins in the media pool. This option is most usefulwhen you want to import several clips that are already organized into folders on
your hard drive.

Importing Media233

12 Choose Add Folder and SubFolders into Media Pool (Create Bins).

NOTE If Resolve presents a dialog asking whether you want to change theproject frame rate and you have already set the current project to 23.976
frames per second, click Don’t Change; otherwise, Resolve will change theproject frame rate to 59.94 frames per second!

The clips are added to the media pool in a series of bins that reflect the folder
structure of the Organ Mountain Outfitters folder.

Generating Proxy Files
Modern digital video files are highly complex assets that contain huge amounts of
information, as attested to by their file sizes, with many individual files easily measuring in
the tens of gigabytes (GBs) and many projects in the terabytes (TBs) in size!
Working with camera-original content is ideal when color grading but, when it comes toediting, these large, complex files can slow you down if they overtax the hardware you’re
working on. As you try out different shots, trimming and adjusting clips, you need a proper
feel for the pacing of a scene and the changes you’re making. A computer that cannot
process media efficiently, or a drive that is not fast enough to play high-resolution or highframe rate media, can result in a frustrating editing experience.
Resolve includes a convenient method for creating lower-resolution clips as proxy media
while retaining a relationship with the camera originals. Generating proxy media enables
the speed you want when editing yet leaves you only one click away from the cameraoriginal media when you need it for color grading or VFX work.
You can choose to generate proxy files directly from DaVinci Resolve or by using theBlackmagic Proxy Generator. Both have advantages, depending on your workflow.

234

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Using the Blackmagic Proxy Generator
The Blackmagic Proxy Generator is a separate program that is installed alongside
DaVinci Resolve and can automatically create proxy media from source video files placedin a designated watch folder. The Proxy Generator is a lightweight application that can beleft running in the background, and DaVinci Resolve will automatically recognize and use
the proxy media as it becomes available. Moreover, the Proxy Generator can be used to
manage proxy files quickly and effortlessly.

NOTE If you’re using the free version of DaVinci Resolve, the Proxy Generator
program will be called “Blackmagic Proxy Generator Lite.”

1

Open the Blackmagic Proxy Generator application. If a file browser window also opens,click Cancel.
The Proxy Generator is a simple program that has no complex settings.

The first step in using the Proxy Generator is to set a “watch folder.” A watch folder issimply a normal folder on your system that contains your source media files.

Generating Proxy Files

235

2

Click the Add button to add a watch folder location.

3

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Media/Organ Mountain Outfitters/B-ROLL andclick Open.

The watch folder is added to the list, detailing the volume, the specific folder, and thecurrent status of the folder. You can add as many watch folders to this list as required.

TIP You can drag folders directly into the list of watch folders from the Finder(macOS) or File Explorer (Windows).

You can choose one of four preset settings (three for Windows users) for your proxy
media. A value at the bottom right of the list of watch folders indicates the amount ofstorage required to generate the proxies for the selected location(s).
4

In the Proxy Format section, choose the H.264 8 bit 4:2:0 Half Res 1080p option.
This option will create proxy media at one-half the resolution of 1080 HD media (960 x 540)
and using the H.264 video codec. This will be useful for editing but not for grading,mainly due to the 8-bit and 4:2:0 chroma subsampling properties of these files.

236

Lesson 6

Project Organization

5

Click Start.

The Proxy Generator begins processing the source video clips in the watch folder,placing the generated proxy media in a Proxy subfolder in the same location as thesource media. This allows Resolve to automatically see the relevant proxy media forclips in this source folder.
6

Return to DaVinci Resolve and select the B-ROLL bin in the media pool.

Generating Proxy Files

237

NOTE Unless you click the Stop button, the Proxy Generator will continue
to monitor the watch folder(s) you’ve chosen. Should any new source files
be placed in these folders, the proxy media will be automatically generated
without you needing to restart the process.

The clips in this bin have a new icon indicating that these clips have proxy media
associated with them. This icon will remain displayed on any clip in the media pool, theedit page, or color page timelines whenever Resolve is using the proxy media of a clip,
as opposed to the original source file.

7

In the media pool, click the List View.

8

Right-click the top of the Clip Name column and, in the list that appears, select theProxy column.
The Proxy column appears to the right of the Clip Name column and details the proxy
file resolution. Resolve will now use the lower resolution H.264 proxy file when playing

238

Lesson 6

Project Organization

these clips, which means your real-time performance will increase, allowing you to
focus on the editing at hand.

NOTE The columns still display the camera-original resolution and codec.
Remember, the proxy media did not replace the camera-original files. They still
exist on your hard drive and are linked to these clips. So, Resolve continues todisplay the camera-original parameters.

Generating proxy media using the Proxy Generator is efficient and easy, without any
complicated set up needed. Using lower-quality proxy media files will help improveyour editing workflow, especially when using very high-resolution or high frame rate
source media. However, you don’t want to inadvertently use the proxy media when
grading, but you can easily switch from the proxy media back to the original files in
the Playback menu.
9

Choose Playback > Proxy Handling > Disable All Proxies.
The icons for the clips in the media pool return to normal, indicating that the proxyfiles are no longer being used, but the proxy media remains available.

Generating Proxy Files239

10 Choose Playback > Proxy Handling > Prefer Proxies to re-enable the proxies forthe project.
You can also use the Proxy Generator to manage your proxy media.
11 Return to the Blackmagic Proxy Generator application and click Stop.
12 Select the B-ROLL folder in the list of watch folders and click Show.

A Finder window (macOS) or a File Explorer window (Windows) opens to reveal the
B-ROLL folder.

240

Lesson 6

Project Organization

13 Open the folder to reveal the Proxy subfolder with the generated proxy media files.

14 In the Proxy Generator, click Delete Proxies.

Generating Proxy Files241

15 A warning appears confirming that you want to delete all the proxy folders and clips.

Don’t worry! This warning refers to the proxy media files and folders only. Your original
source clips are safe from being deleted.
16 Click Delete, and then click Done.
The proxy media and subfolder are instantly removed from your system.

17 To recreate the proxy files for the watch folder, click Start.

NOTE The Proxy Generator also has a button to Extract Proxies. This will copy
the proxies for the selected watch folder(s) to a location of your choice. Thisis useful for creating a separate proxy-only folder that you can hand over toanother editor via a portable hard drive or cloud storage.

242

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Generating Proxy Media from the Media Pool
The Proxy Generator is a handy, intuitive way to quickly create proxy media. However, analternative way of creating proxy media is directly from the media pool in Resolve. This canbe useful if you only need to generate proxy media for a limited number of clips since theProxy Generator application will generate proxies for all the media in a watch folder.
1

In Davinci Resolve, press Shift-9 to open the Project Settings.

2

In the Master Settings, scroll down to the Optimized Media and Render Cache group ofsettings, which also includes settings for creating proxy media.

3

Change the Proxy media resolution dropdown menu to Quarter.

Generating Proxy Files

243

This will create proxy media that is one-quarter the resolution of the source media file.
This setting is relative, so proxies for 1080 HD media will be 480 x 720, and proxies for
UHD clips will be 960 x 540.
4

Change the “Proxy media format” dropdown menu to H.264.

5

Scroll down to the Working Folders section.

The “Proxy generation location” specifies where the proxy media will be created forthis project. You will leave this unchanged.

244

6

Click Save to save the changes to the Project Settings.

7

Choose DaVinci Resolve > Preferences.

Lesson 6

Project Organization

The System Preferences window opens to the media storage settings. Here, you’ll
find three “Proxy Generation Location” options:— Proxy subfolders in media file locations will create the proxy media in a “Proxy”
folder in the same location as the source media file.
— Use project setting creates the proxy media in the location specified in the Project
Settings.
— Ask when creating allows you to manually select the location where the proxy
media will be created.

NOTE Choosing the “Proxy subfolders in media file locations” generates
the proxy files in the same location as the Proxy Generator application
does. Choosing this option also means that the proxy files can be deleted
and extracted by the Proxy Generator if the enclosing folder is added asa watch folder.

8

Choose “Proxy subfolders in media file locations” and click Save.

9

Select all the clips in the B-ROLL bin, right-click and choose Generate Proxy Media.

The proxy media will be generated for the clips. Unlike using the Proxy Generator,
though, you will have to wait until all the proxies have been generated before you cancontinue working.

Generating Proxy Files245

Syncing Audio to Video
Now that you’ve imported the rushes into your project and generated proxy media, you
can really start to organize the footage by syncing any audio and video clips that wererecorded on separate devices.
Many productions record audio on dedicated digital audio devices to capture the highest
quality audio or when it’s not practical or desirable to record audio directly to a camera.
Thus, when the files come in from the day’s shoot, you’ll need to sync the appropriate
audio and video clips—a process often referred to as “syncing the dailies.” Thankfully,
Resolve has a fantastic way of making this process as painless as possible. And, similar to
the multicamera syncing you did in the previous lesson, you can use either the timecode or
the audio of the clips to help achieve the perfect sync!
1

In the bin list, select the AUDIO and VIDEO bins inside the INTERVIEW bin to display
the contents of both bins in the media pool.

2

246

Play the first clip, A 0002.mov, in the viewer.

Lesson 6

Project Organization

This is one of the interview clips with Chris Lang that you worked with in Lesson 1.
Unfortunately, the audio isn’t very well recorded. From the meters in the Audio panel,
you can see that this clip has two audio channels that are very low.
3

Right-click the clip and choose Clip Attributes.

The Clip Attributes window for the selected clip opens. This is where you can altercertain video, audio, timecode, and naming properties of a clip or clips.
4

Select the Audio tab.

As you can see, the audio tab of clip attributes tells you that this clip has two
embedded audio channels, configured as a stereo audio track.

Syncing Audio to Video

247

5

Click Cancel to close the Clip Attributes window without saving any changes.

6

Select the first audio clip, A-002.WAV, and play it.

This audio clip has four audio channels, displayed as separate waveforms in the audio
viewer, all with healthy audio levels showing in the meters.
7

Right-click the audio clip and choose Clip Attributes.

The Clip Attributes window opens, displaying the Audio tab. This clip has four individual
mono channels labelled “Mix-L,” “Mix-R,” “Boom,” and “Chris.” This indicates that aboom mic was recorded on channel 3, Chris’s personal mic was recorded on channel 4,
and channels 1 and 2 are a mix of both.

NOTE The track names have been imported as part of the audio files’
metadata. You can view specific track names (or add your own) by choosing
Audio Tracks from the Metadata panel’s Sort menu.

248

Lesson 6

Project Organization

8

Click Cancel to close the Clip Attributes without making any changes.
Now that you understand how the audio for these clips has been recorded, you can
sync them together and choose the most appropriate channels to work with.

9

In the media pool, select all the clips in the selected bins, right-click them, and choose
Auto Sync Audio > Based on Waveform and Append Tracks.

After a short analysis, Resolve has synchronized the audio with the video clips!
10 Select the first video clip again, A 0002.mov, and play it.

Now this clip has six audio channels, the last four of which are much higher in themeters than the first two.

TIP You can verify that there is synced audio with each of the clips in List View
in the Synced Audio column.

Syncing Audio to Video

249

Modifying Audio Channels in Clip Attributes
You could continue using the audio of these clips as is. Having multiple audio tracks ona clip gives you the opportunity to choose which microphone to use at any given time.
However, it can be just as simple to configure the audio of a clip so that it is using just the
track(s) you need.
1

In the bin list, Command-click (macOS) or Ctrl-click (Windows) the AUDIO bin todeselect it, leaving just the synced interview clips in the media pool.

2

Select all the interview clips, right-click them, and choose Clip Attributes.

Now the Audio tab of the Clip Attributes window is showing that these clips all have a
total of six audio channels: the first two being the embedded audio channels, and thelast four being the linked audio clips. Since you only need the audio recorded fromChris’s personal mic, you can remove the audio channels you don’t need.

250

Lesson 6

Project Organization

3

Click the trash can icon of the embedded stereo track to remove it.

4

Repeat for the next three linked mono tracks—Mix-L, Mix-R, and Boom.
This leaves just Chris’s personal mic as the only remaining mono audio track.

Syncing Audio to Video

251

5

Click OK to accept the changes and close the Clip Attributes window.
The interview clips are now correctly configured with the correct mono audio channel.

NOTE The process of removing the channels from the Clip Attributes has
not “deleted” the audio at all. Instead, it simply disables the tracks for the clip,
allowing you to reconfigure them again at any time by reopening the clip’s Clip
Attributes.

While Clip Attributes encompasses several useful configuration features, ideally, you’ll
want to configure most of them before you edit a clip into a timeline. Once clips areplaced into a timeline, any changes you make to a clip’s attributes in the media pool
will only affect new instances of that clip added to a timeline, with existing instances of
the clip in any timeline remaining unchanged. However, you can adjust these existing
clips within the timeline by right-clicking the clip and choosing Clip Attributes from thecontextual menu.

Configuring Metadata Presets
Metadata has quickly become an important part of the editing process, not least in thesorting and finding of specific clips in the morass of media in any given project. However,as useful as metadata is, it can often seem overwhelming at first.
Resolve has several metadata categories you can use to reduce the amount of metadata
displayed at any one time to a manageable subset of the whole. However, you cancustomize metadata presets to display only the information you most need or want to see.
1

Choose DaVinci Resolve > Preferences, or press Command-, (comma) in macOS or Ctrl-,(comma) in Windows.

252

Lesson 6

Project Organization

2

In the Preferences window, click the User tab and select the Metadata
category to the left.

Using the Metadata Presets, you can create, modify, and delete custom
metadata presets.
3

Click the New button to create a new metadata preset, and name it
Favorite Metadata. Click OK.

Configuring Metadata Presets

253

The newly created Favorite Metadata preset appears in the Metadata Presets list.

In the lower half of the Metadata pane, under Metadata Options, you’ll see all the
metadata you can add to the preset.
4

Select the checkboxes for Description, Keywords, Comments, Camera #, People, Scene,
and Shot. These are the metadata fields you will need throughout the rest of this lesson.

254

Lesson 6

Project Organization

5

At the upper right of the Metadata options, click Save to save your changes tothe preset.

6

Click Save at the bottom of the Preferences window to save and close thePreferences panel.

7

In the media pool, select any clip from the B-ROLL bin.

8

In the Metadata panel, click the Sort menu and choose All Groups.

Configuring Metadata Presets

255

9

Next, click the options menu (three dots) and choose the new Favorite
Metadata preset.

TIP Your preset will appear blank in the Metadata Editor unless it is set to show
all groups or a subset that contains the fields of your preset.

Only the selected metadata fields for the Favorite Metadata preset appear in the
Metadata Editor.

You could continue entering the metadata manually or, if the information exists
outside of DaVinci Resolve, you could simply import it.

256

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Importing and Using Metadata
You have many ways to populate your clips with useful metadata. It may be entered on thecamera during production (although detailed metadata is rarely a priority for the camera
operator or an assistant); you can enter it manually yourself, which very few people want(or have the time) to do; or someone on set can be assigned to be responsible for entering
metadata in their favorite spreadsheet program or in any of the smart slate apps that canbe used to log metadata such as shot, scene, take, and more. You can then import thisdata into Resolve using the simple CSV (comma separated value) format and save yourself
hours of work in the cutting room!
1

Choose File > Import Metadata To > Media Pool.

2

In the File dialog, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 06 and select the file
OMO metadata.csv.

This .csv file was exported from a simple spreadsheet program.
3

Click Open.
The Metadata Import dialog opens. This window allows you to choose how you want
Resolve to match the clips with additional metadata. In this case, you can match clips
based on their filenames but not their timecodes because that information is notincluded in the .csv file you’re importing.

4

Deselect the “Match using clip start and end Timecode” checkbox since the .csv filedoes not contain this information.

Importing and Using Metadata

257

5

In the Merge Options, select “Update all metadata fields available in the source file.”

Importing metadata in this manner will replace any existing metadata in the fields
detailed in the .csv file. Metadata fields not listed in the .csv file will remain unchanged.
6

Click OK.

A confirmation window appears stating that the information within the .csv file has
been imported and added to 24 clips.

258

Lesson 6

Project Organization

7

Verify that the information from the .csv file has been added to the media pool clips by
selecting a few clips and viewing their newly added metadata in the Metadata panel.

Your clips now include scene, shot, description, and keyword information. This
metadata will help as you organize and rename the clips to something more usefulthan the cryptic filenames given to them by the camera.

Importing and Using Metadata259

Exporting Metadata and Bins
In addition to importing metadata to clips in your media pool, as detailed in thepreceding steps, you can also choose to export the metadata from your media
pool or from selected clips from the media pool. To do so, simply select File >Export Metadata From > Media Pool, or File > Export Metadata From > Selected
Media Pool Clips (as appropriate). Your chosen clip metadata will then be exported
as a .csv file and will provide a way of easily transferring metadata from one
project to another that uses the same media, even if that project is on another
Resolve system.
You can also export an entire bin by choosing File > Export > Export Bin.
This command will export the clip metadata (not the media) from the currently
selected bin to a .drb file. As with exported metadata, you can use this option totransfer bins between different Resolve projects or systems by choosing File >Import > Import Bin.
Any clips listed in the .drb file will be automatically imported into the current
project, together with their associated metadata. If the source media is in thesame location as the system the bin was exported from, it will be automaticallylinked to the newly imported clip. If the media is in a different location, you will
have to manually relink it.

Searching Using Metadata
You also can use metadata to find clips quickly and easily. Being able to find the material
you want or need as rapidly as possible means that you can more effectively focus on thestory and the flow of your edit.
1

In the bin list, select the Master bin.

2

At the top of the media pool, click the Search button (the magnifying glass) to reveal
the search field.

By default, the search will only look in the current bin and will search only acrossclips’ filenames.

260

Lesson 6

Project Organization

3

Click the Search menu and choose All Bins.

4

In the “Filter by” dropdown menu to the right of the Search field, choose All Fields.

Resolve will now search all the bins and across all the available metadata fields.
5

In the search bar, type chris to display all the shots that have “Chris” as part oftheir metadata.

Importing and Using Metadata

261

6

In the search bar, highlight “chris” and type Pine to reveal two shots that include “pine”
somewhere in their metadata (in this case, it’s from the “PINE TRAIL” in the scene field).

7

Click the Search button again to close and clear the search field.

Resolve’s powerful and responsive search feature lets you leverage the flexibility of
metadata to instantly find media pool clips in even the largest project.

Using Automatic Smart Bins
Another advantage of adding metadata to your clips is that you can use it to create Smart
Bins. Keywords, scene, and shot metadata can be used to automatically create a series ofSmart Bins.
1

In the Smart Bins area of the media pool, click the disclosure arrow for the Keywords
Smart Bin folder to view the list of Smart Bins.

These Smart Bins were automatically created based on the keywords applied to eachclip in this project. If you adjust the Keyword metadata of any clips within this project,
this list of Smart Bins will update accordingly.

262

Lesson 6

Project Organization

To show additional automatic smart bins for other metadata, you need to open theUser Preferences.
2

Choose DaVinci Resolve > Preferences, click the User tab, and then click the Editing
category on the left side of the window.

The editing preferences allow you to display other automatic Smart Bins beyond
Keywords, such as scene, shot, and people metadata.
3

Select the Automatic Smart Bin for Scene metadata and People metadata checkboxes,
and then click Save to save the change and close the Preferences window.

Scene and People folders appears in the Smart Bins list.

Importing and Using Metadata

263

4

Click the disclosure arrow for the Scene smart bins to reveal the appropriate scene
metadata from the clips in the project.

TIP You can drag and drop clips onto an existing automatic smart bin to quickly
add the clips to that bin by automatically assigning the metadata properties of thesmart bin to the clips. For example, dragging a clip onto a keyword smart bin willautomatically add the keyword to the clip.

Analyzing Clips for People (Studio Version Only)
NOTE Smart Bins for People Metadata is available only in DaVinci Resolve Studio.
If you’re using the free version of DaVinci Resolve, you may read over this exercise,but you won’t be able to perform the steps.

Another subset of metadata that you may find useful when organizing clips in your projectis to have Resolve analyze clips for people’s faces. This can then be used to generate People
Keywords, which in turn will appear as a series of automatic smart bins and can be useful inlocating clips containing certain people, whether this is an actor, interviewee, or presenter.

264

Lesson 6

Project Organization

1

Select all the clips in the B-ROLL bin, right-click, and choose Analyze Clips for People.

The clips are analyzed by the DaVinci Resolve Neural Engine, the results of which are
stored in the project’s Face database.

Once the analysis is complete, the dominant faces that have been identified are
displayed in the People window, allowing you to manage the People metadata.

Importing and Using Metadata

265

2

In the People window, select the clips identified as “Person 1.”

This collection contains three clips featuring the same person, with a red box
identifying the specific face that the analysis has identified. You can add a name forthis person to make it easier to identify them.
3

Return to the People collection and select the first icon displaying the face of “Person 1.”

4

Click the area underneath the selected face where it says “Enter name here” and type
Bobby as the guy’s name.

You can also remove a face that you’re not interested in—if they are a backgroundartist or passerby, for example.

266

Lesson 6

Project Organization

5

Select the Person 2 group, right-click the clip, and choose Not Person 2 > Remove.

6

Repeat for Persons 3, 4, and 5.

7

Rename the remaining Person 6 as Fire Dancer.

8

Select the Other People group.

Importing and Using Metadata

267

This group contains faces that could not be identified by the analysis, including thoseyou have subsequently removed.
9

Select the first two clips, which are shots of Bobby on the rocks, and then right-click
and choose Tag As > Bobby.

NOTE You won’t see any additional clips appear in Bobby’s group since theseclips have already been tagged as Bobby. However, Resolve identified a face ina different part of the clip that it could not identify. Confirming this as Bobby
rather than a different person helps prevent misidentification.

10 Right-click the other instance of the fire dancer clip and choose Tag As > Fire Dancer.

You can also add new persons to the People window.
11 Select the two faces of the girl carrying the T-shirt.
12 Right-click them and choose Tag As > New Person.

268

Lesson 6

Project Organization

13 In the Input New Name window, type Kayleigh to name this person, and click OK.

14 Click Close to close the People window.

NOTE To further refine the people metadata, choose Workspace > People. To
reset the Face database for the current project, open the People window andchoose “Reset Face Database” from the options menu (three dots).

15 In the Smart Bins list, click the disclosure arrow for the People group to reveal the
People smart bins.

Importing and Using Metadata

269

You can also view the People tags associated with each clip in the Metadata panel.

Renaming Clips with Metadata
Clip names from a camera, or almost any capture device, are often an alphanumeric stringthat typically includes the date and time that the clip was created. They are not always themost descriptive names and often need to be changed for editing purposes. Entering clip
names manually is one way to address this, but it is not the only way (or even the mostefficient way) to rename them.
Variables are references to other metadata that exist on the clip, such as scene, take, andshot number—so called because variables are not the same for each clip. You can enter avariable into the clip name, and Resolve will reference the correct information for each clip
(provided the information is present). You will use the metadata you’ve imported to change
the generic names of the clips in the media pool to more descriptive names.

270

Lesson 6

Project Organization

1

Select the B-ROLL bin and press Command-A (macOS) or Ctrl-A (Windows) to select all
the clips in the media pool.

2

Right-click any of the selected clips, choose Clip Attributes, and select the Name tab.

3

In the Clip Name field, type % (percentage sign).

Entering % indicates that you are about to enter a variable. When you enter that %,a list of variables appears.
4

Type sc.

Importing and Using Metadata271

A list of potential variables appears that contain the letters “sc.”5

In the dropdown menu, click Scene to add it to the Clip Name field.

6

Press the Spacebar to add a space after this variable, and then type %comm andchoose Comments from the list of variables.

272

Lesson 6

Project Organization

7

Click OK to apply the changes you’ve just made.

The clip names now show a combination of keywords and descriptions pulled from theclips’ various metadata fields.

Importing and Using Metadata

273

NOTE Changing the clip names in this way does not change the names ofthe original media files. Clip names are often used by editors within a project
to provide a more user-friendly way of identifying a clip or series of clips. If
you wish to see the original filename instead of the clip name, choose View >Show File Names, or you can always search for a specific filename if required.
EDLs, XMLs, or AAFs generated from within Resolve will always reference theoriginal filename.

You can also combine text that you enter along with the variables to create a more
descriptive clip name.
89

Select all the clips in the VIDEO bin, right-click them, and choose Clip Attributes.
In the Name tab, select the name field and type LANG %Keywords %CAM # %Take,
selecting the options for Keywords, Cam #, and Take as they appear, and then click OK.

274

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Now all of Chris’s interview clips have been renamed with his surname, the clip’s
keywords, camera #, and take number.

TIP To reset any custom names you’ve applied to any clips, open the Clip
Attributes window, delete the text in the Clip Name field, and click OK. Becausea clip can’t not have a name, the original filename is used.

Importing metadata and using it to rename clips with variables can save hours ofmanual typing and provide clear, descriptive information.

Creating Custom Smart Bins
Using the various automatic Smart Bins options is a great way to help add order to yourprojects, but the true power of Smart Bins comes to the fore when you can set your own
rules for what a Smart Bin will contain. In this exercise, you’ll create your own Smart Bins tobe able to find and work with certain media from this project.
1

Choose File > New Smart Bin.
The Create Smart Bin window appears. You’ll use this smart bin to easily locate all theinterview clips from a particular angle.

2

Name this Smart Bin INTERVIEW A CAM.

Importing and Using Metadata

275

3

Click the second dropdown menu (currently File Name) and choose Keywords.

4

Ensure that the third dropdown menu is set to “contains” and type interview in the
final field.

This means that any clip that has the “interview” keyword applied will be currently
included in this Smart Bin.
5

Click the Add Criteria (plus) button to add another set of criteria.

6

Change the first dropdown menu from “Media Pool Properties” to “Metadata –Shot & Scene.”

276

Lesson 6

Project Organization

7

Change the second dropdown menu to “Camera #,” the third to “is,” and type A in the
final field.

TIP To navigate quickly through the list of options, type the first letter of themetadata field you need. This will move to the next option in the list startingwith that letter. You can then select it from the list with your mouse. Keeppressing the same letter to jump to the next option starting with that letter.

This sorts the contents of this smart bin to include only interview clips from the“A” camera.
8

Click Create.
The new smart bin is added to the Smart Bins list.

An alternative is to create a smart bin for a particular set of clips that you might want touse for a multicam edit.

Importing and Using Metadata

277

9

Right-click the INTERVIEW A CAM smart bin and choose Duplicate.

10 Change the name of the duplicated smart bin to INTERVIEW TAKE 2.

11 Right-click the INTERVIEW TAKE 2 smart bin and choose Edit.
12 In the Edit Smart Bin window, change the “Camera #” option to “Take” and ensure thatthe third menu is set to “contains.”

278

Lesson 6

Project Organization

13 In the final field, type 2 and click OK.

The smart bin now contains the three clips for the second take from the interview.

To organize your smart bins, you can add them to folders, similar to how the Keyword
and Scene Smart Bins are grouped.
14 Right-click in an empty space of the smart bins list and choose Add Folder to create a
new folder named “Folder 1.”

Importing and Using Metadata279

15 Highlight the name for Folder 1 and type My Smart Bins.

16 Shift-click the INTERVIEW A CAM and INTERVIEW TAKE 2 smart bins and drag theminto the My Smart Bins folder.

As you can see, coupled with an understanding of metadata, Resolve has some flexible
and powerful searching functions, so you should always be confident that you’ll beable to find your media. One word of caution, however, is that metadata searches are
only as good as the quality of the metadata provided in the first place. Sometimes a
simple spelling mistake can thwart all these potential benefits.

TIP To make a Smart Bin available across different projects, click the Show In
All Projects checkbox. While this doesn’t make the contents of the Smart Bin
available in other projects (see the “Power Bins” section later in this lesson), it will
enable you to reuse the rules for that Smart Bin in another project (including old
projects). This is very useful if you often use the same rules for Smart Bins acrossmultiple projects. These Smart Bins are available in a Smart Bin folder called “User
Smart Bins.”

280

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Using Additional Match Options
Custom smart bins can be created using the options to Match using All or Any ofthe listed rules you choose. However, for added flexibility you can choose to add
additional match options by Option-clicking (macOS) or Alt-clicking (Windows) the
Add Filter Criteria button. This will add a new subset of rules that have their own
All/Any options.

For example, in the preceding image, the smart bin is set to include any media
pool content that has a resolution of 3840 x 2160. However, because using only
this value may include unwanted items that could have the same resolution (suchas timelines or multicam clips), an additional set of rules has been added, set toAny, that specifies the contents should be video clips, video clips with audio, or still
images that match that resolution.

Creating Subclips
Another technique commonly used by editors dealing with large amounts of footage,
especially long clips, is to create a series of subclips. You encountered subclips in Lesson 1
when you edited soundbites from the interview, and the subclips made it easier to work withsmaller portions of footage rather than the very long interview clips they were taken from.
The important thing to remember about subclips is that, while they are created from alonger clip, they refer to the same source media files on your system. As a result, they don’ttake up any more space on your system, irrespective of how many subclips you create.
Also, while subclips will initially inherit the metadata of the clip they are created from,the subclip itself is a completely independent clip. This means that you can store them in
different bins, and they can each have their own metadata.

Creating Subclips

281

You will create a series of subclips from the main interview camera you used in Lesson 1.

NOTE In this exercise, you’ll create subclips in the media page. However, the same
techniques can be used to create subclips from clips in the source viewer on theedit page.

1

In the INTERVIEW bin, create a new bin and name it SUBCLIPS.

2

Select all the clips in the INTERVIEW A CAM smart bin and drag them into the viewer.

3

Select the SUBCLIPS bin.

4

Ensure that LANG INTERVIEW A 002 is active in the viewer, click the viewer’s options
menu, and choose Show Full Clip Audio Waveform.

282

Lesson 6

Project Organization

5

Set an In point just before Chris says, “My name’s Chris Lang…” and an Out point after
he says, “…Las Cruces, New Mexico.”

TIP You don’t need to be accurate when setting In and Out points for
subclips. In fact, setting them to include a little more than you intend to use isa recommended technique (see the sidebar “Adjusting Subclip Limits” later inthis lesson).

6

Choose Mark > Create Subclip or press Option-B (macOS) or Alt-B (Windows).
The New Subclip window opens, asking you to confirm the name of this subclip, whichis the same filename as the original clip but with the word “Subclip” added to the end.

7

Click Create to add the subclip to the current bin.

Creating Subclips

283

8

From the viewer dropdown menu, choose the clip LANG INTERVIEW A 005 and set an
In point just before Chris says, “That’s what really inspires us…” and an Out point after
he says “…the design process starts.”

9

Right-click the scrub bar and choose Create Subclip.

10 Click Create in the New Subclip window.
11 From the viewer dropdown menu, choose the clip LANG INTERVIEW A 008.

284

Lesson 6

Project Organization

12 Set an In point just before Chris says, “We want people to experience…” and an Out
point after he says “…the landscapes.”

13 Drag the clip from the viewer into the SUBCLIPS bin.

14 Again, click Create in the New Subclip window.

Creating Subclips

285

15 Continue playing the clip in the viewer and set another In and Out point around Chris’s
final soundbite: “That’s why we say experience the southwest.”

16 Choose your preferred method for creating a subclip from this last soundbite and click
Create in the New Subclip window.

You now have four subclips in the SUBCLIPS bin.

286

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Modifying Subclip Metadata
Now that you’ve created the subclips, you can take advantage of some of the metadata
tricks you learned throughout this lesson.
1

Select the first subclip and, in the Comments field in the Metadata panel, type intro.

2

Select the second subclip and, in the Comments field, type inspires us.

3

Select the third subclip and type so unique in the Comments field.

4

Select the final subclip and type tagline in the Comments field.

Creating Subclips

287

5

Select all the clips in the SUBCLIPS bin and, in the Metadata panel, delete the
INTERVIEW keyword and type SUBCLIP the Keyword field.

6

Click Save at the bottom of the Metadata panel.

7

Right-click the subclips and choose Clip Attributes.

8

In the Clip Name field, type LANG %Keyword - %Comments, selecting the metadata
options from the menus as they appear.

288

Lesson 6

Project Organization

9

Click OK to rename the subclips.

You can now edit using these subclips just like any other clip, as you did in Lesson 1.

Adjusting Subclip Limits
One limitation of a subclip is that, even though it is referencing the original
source media file, it is limited to the initial In and Out points you used to create it.
Therefore, it’s good practice to set your initial In and Out points a little before andafter the portion you want to subclip, thereby leaving a little bit of wiggle room
when you later trim the clips in the timeline.
However, when you find that you need a few extra frames not included in yoursubclip, you can always extend the limits of a subclip by right-clicking a subclip andchoosing Edit Subclip.

This allows you to adjust the start and end timecodes for the subclip, updating thelimits of the subclip in both the media pool and the timeline simultaneously.

Creating Subclips289

Power Bins
Throughout this lesson, you’ve been using both regular bins and Smart Bins, both of which
are great organizational tools to use within a project. However, a third bin type available
in DaVinci Resolve is the Power Bin. Unlike regular bins or Smart Bins that exist only within
the current project, Power Bins are available across every project within the current Project
Library. They are useful for storing elements you want to reuse across separate projects,
such as graphics, titles, sound effects, or music files.
1

Click the media pool’s options menu and choose Show Power Bins.

Power Bins are displayed in the media pool above the Smart Bins.

290

Lesson 6

Project Organization

2

Select the Power Bin’s Master bin, and press Shift-Command-N (macOS) or Shift-Ctrl-N(Windows) to add a new Power Bin. Name the bin LOGOS.

3

Select the Graphics bin that’s currently in your project, which contains a graphic filecalled OMO LOGO.png.

4Drag this clip to the LOGOS Power Bin.

Power Bins are accessible from every project in the current Project Library, so thisimage file (plus its associated metadata) will now be easily accessible for any otherproject. The next time you find yourself with a series of projects that share elements,
whether they be sound effects, graphics, or common video elements, you can use
Power Bins to save time manually importing clips and any required metadata into
different projects.

Power Bins

291

NOTE Multicam clips, compound clips, timelines, and Fusion clips cannot be placedin Power Bins.

You should now have a good understanding of just how powerful Resolve is at helping
you organize your projects. Remember, while some projects may require much moreorganization than others, the techniques demonstrated throughout this lesson can beapplied at any point you’re working on a project and in many cases can be applied as readilyin the edit page as they can in the media page. Project organization doesn’t just occur once,at the start of a project; it is something that you will constantly refine as you are editing.

292

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Lesson Review
1

True or false? You can save a preset of your current project settings to make future
project configuration easier.

2

Which application can be used to easily create proxy media for editing?
a) Resolve Proxy Makerb) Blackmagic Proxy Generatorc) Blackmagic Proxy Creator

3

True or false? Proxy media replaces the source media files used in your project.

4

What method(s) can you use to auto sync sound to video files in the media page?
a) Waveformb) Timecodec) Markers

5Which type of bin allows you access to its contents across different projects in thecurrent project library?
a) Smart Binsb) Super Binsc) Power Bins

Lesson Review

293Answers
1

True. Project presets are saved in the Presets panel of the Project Settings.

2b) Blackmagic Proxy Generator.

3

False. Proxy media files are created alongside your source media files. Your original,
full-resolution media files remain intact. Proxy media can be disabled by choosing
Playback > Proxy Handling > Disable All Proxies.

2944a) Waveform and b) Timecode.

5c) Power Bins.

Lesson 6

Project Organization

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Building graphics sequences is avaluable skill in any editor’s arsenal.

Time

Multilayered composites that combine

This lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

video, audio, graphics, and text, often

Goalswith animated elements, are regularly
incorporated into an edit. And it
often falls to the editor to build thesecomposites and apply some level of
keyframed animation, either as pre-viz(previsualization) for motion graphics
or as the final content.
This lesson will introduce thecompositing and animation features
available to you in DaVinci Resolve
18’s edit page, together with somespecialized effects to help you achievecommon tasks quickly and effectively.

Setting Up the Project

296

Compositing Using
Traveling Mattes

298

Variable Speed Changes

309

Creating Freeze Frames

318

3D Keyer FX

325

Transform FX

334

Video Collage

339

Creating Tiles with Video Collage

350

Lesson Review

361

Setting Up the Project
To begin this lesson, you will import a DaVinci Resolve project and configure the edit pageworkspace for working with effects.
1

Open DaVinci Resolve, and in the Project Manager, right-click an empty area andchoose Import Project. Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 07.

2

Select the EDIT PAGE EFFECTS.drp project file and choose Open.
The Project is imported and added to the Project Manager.

3

Open the project, click the Edit page button, and relink the media files.

4

If necessary, choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout to reset the interface to its
default setting.
This project contains several different bins with timelines for the different exercises
you’ll follow throughout this lesson.

5296

Click the Select Timeline pop-up menu above the timeline viewer.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

The Timeline pop-up menu lists all timelines in the current project and can be a useful
way of easily switching timelines. By default, Resolve arranges this list of timelines in
Recently Used order, so recently accessed timelines appear at the top of the list.
6

Click the timeline viewer Options menu and choose Timeline Sort Order > Alphabetical.

7

Click the Select Timeline pop-up again to view the sort order change and ensure thatthe 01 Title Composite timeline is currently open.

TIP You can also access the timeline sort order options in DaVinci Resolve> Preferences > User > UI Settings and change the Timeline Sort Order
pop-up menu.

You’re now ready to start the first exercise in this lesson.

Setting Up the Project297

Compositing Using
Traveling Mattes
A common task that many editors face is the need to resize clips. This could be as simple achanging the framing of a shot to exclude a microphone that’s unintentionally wandered
into the frame, or it could be to build something a little more creative.
In the first exercise in this lesson, you’ll composite a shot with a traveling matte and thenresize and position the result into the overall composite.
The 01 Title Composite timeline is a short sequence of archive footage composited overa background image. Each of the archive clips has a stylized “painted” edge to it. After asecond or so, an animated Fusion title animates in, announcing the title of the film: Living
In The Age Of Airplanes.
Your job is to use the compositing functions available in the edit page to stylize the finalarchive image and place it in the bottom-right corner of the timeline viewer.
First, you’ll need to create a new video track in the timeline to accommodate the new clip.
1

In the bin list, select the Archive bin and open the clip AOA Archive 4 in thesource viewer.

This clip is a short archive clip from the early days of powered flight.

298

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

2

Right-click any of the track headers in the timeline and choose Add Tracks.

The add tracks window appears. You want to add a new track above the current V4
but below V5.
3

Leave the Number of Video Tracks set to 1 and change the Insert Position to Above
Archive 3. Change the Number of Audio Tracks to 0 and click Add Tracks.

A new, empty V5 track is created in the timeline.

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

299

4

Rename the new V5 track Archive 4.

You now need to mark a duration for the new clip and target the new track.
5

Select the clip on the track below the track you have just added and press Shift-A to
mark the duration of the selected clip.

6

In the track header, click the destination control for V5 to target the new track.

You have currently marked a duration of 5 seconds in the timeline, but you only havejust over 3 seconds of the source clip.

For the source clip to correctly fill the marked duration in the timeline, you’ll use a Fit toFill edit.

300

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

The Fit to Fill edit is the final type of edit you can perform in DaVinci Resolve’s edit pageand is another four-point edit. Fit to Fill uses the duration of the In and Out points inthe timeline and source viewers and adjusts the speed of the source clip to match.
7

Drag the clip from the source viewer to the Fit to Fill option in the timelineviewer overlays.

The clip is edited on to the targeted track, and its speed is automatically adjusted asindicated by the speed icon next to the clip’s name in the timeline.

8

To check the new speed of the clip, select the AOA Archive 4 clip in the timeline, open
the Inspector, and reveal the Speed Change controls.

The clip is now running at about 65% of its original speed.
9

Close the Inspector.

NOTE When editing a longer source clip to a shorter timeline duration, thespeed of the source clip is increased proportionately with the shorter duration.

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

301Creating a Compound Clip
To create the “painted edge” effect to this clip, you need to combine the clip with a matte
clip on another timeline track. However, to keep this timeline as neat as possible and not to
add tracks unnecessarily, you will nest the clip in its own compound clip.

NOTE You briefly encountered compound clips in Lesson 3 when editing footage
from one timeline to another. Compound clips are a useful way of grouping clips
together into one timeline element, much like a multicam clip, and are often used incompositing tasks such as this to achieve certain results.

1

In the media pool, select the Compound Clips bin.

This bin already includes several compound clips that were already created forthis project.
2

In the timeline, ensure that the AOA Archive 4 clip is still selected and choose Clip >New Compound Clip.
The New Compound Clip window opens.

302

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3Name the compound clip you are creating Archive 4 and click Create.

The selected clip is now nested into the new Archive 4 compound clip, as indicated by
the compound clip icon next to the compound clip’s name in the timeline.

The new compound clip has also been added to the selected bin in the media pool.

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

303

Adding the Traveling Matte
Next, you’ll create the stylized edging for this clip. To do so, you’ll add an image file to use
as a matte inside the compound clip.
1

In the Timeline View Options menu, enable Stacked Timelines and display thetimeline tabs.

2

Ensure that the Archive 4 compound clip is still selected in the timeline and choose
Clip > Open in Timeline.

The compound clip opens in its own timeline tab, much like the multicam did in
Lesson 5. Similar to that multicam clip, any changes you make in this timeline will beseen in the compound clip in the main 01 Title Composite timeline.

304

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3

Select the AOA Archive 4 clip in the compound clip timeline and move it up toautomatically create a new V2 track.

4

With the AOA Archive 4 clip still selected, press Shift-A to mark its duration.

5

From the Mattes bin in the media pool, open the matte 4 alpha.png clip in thesource viewer.

This image was created using a graphics package and was saved as a PNG file with analpha channel that you will use to composite it with the AOA Archive 4 clip.

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

305

NOTE An alpha channel is an extra black-and-white channel saved alongside
the usual RGB channels of an image and can be used to aid compositing inimage and video editing software. If an image doesn’t have an alpha channel,
you can still use it as a matte by using the luminance, or luma, of the image.

6

Drag the matte from the source viewer to the Fit to Fill overlay, or press Shift-F11,
to edit the clip onto the currently targeted track in the timeline, track V1, at thecorrect duration.

You now need to tell Resolve how these two layers should interact with each other inthe timeline.
7

Select the matte 4 alpha.png clip in the timeline, open the Inspector and, in the
Composite controls, change the Composite Mode pop-up menu to Alpha.

NOTE If you were using matte without an alpha channel, you can use Lum (forLuma) instead of Alpha.

8

Select the AOA Archive 4 clip in the timeline and change the Composite Mode toForeground.

306

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

The Foreground clip is now composited with the matte clip using the lower clip’s
alpha channel.

9Close the Archive 4 timeline tab to close the compound clip’s timeline and return to
the 01 Title Composite timeline.

You can now see that the clip is composited within the main 01 Title
Composite timeline.

Compositing Using Traveling Mattes

307Resizing the Composited Image
The final stage is to adjust the size and positioning of this clip in the overall composite.
1

Select the Archive 4 compound clip in the timeline and choose View > Viewer
Overlay > Transform to enable the onscreen controls.

2

Use the corner handles to resize the selected image to about a third of its original size.

TIP You can use the Zoom controls in the Video tab in the Inspector to specify
precise values if required.

3

308

Drag the image into the lower-right corner of the timeline viewer.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Finally, you will add a slight sense of perspective that’s been added to all the previously
composited clips.
4

In the Inspector, adjust the Yaw of the selected clip to about -0.05 to add a slight“twist” to the image in the timeline viewer.

5

When you’ve made your adjustments, choose View > Viewer Overlays > Toggle On/Offor click the timeline viewer’s overlay control to turn off the onscreen controls and playback the composited titles to review your work.

Variable Speed Changes
Making changes to the speed at which a clip plays back in the timeline is a common taskthat can be easily achieved in the Speed Change controls in the Inspector. However, many
editors are often called upon to make more creative speed change adjustments that often
involve changing the speed of a clip over time, so that one part of a clip plays at a different
speed than another part. This technique is commonly referred to as variable speed
changes, which can be achieved using Resolve’s Retime controls.
1

From the Timeline pop-up menu, choose the 02 Speed Changes timeline.

2

From the top of the timeline viewer, select Single Viewer Mode.

Variable Speed Changes

309

The current timeline contains two clips to which you will apply different speed changes.
The first clip, DISPLAYING SHIRT, is a long clip that follows the journey of an Organ
Mountain Outfitter’s T-shirt on its journey from having been printed in the backroom
to being displayed and ready to buy in the shop.

Currently, the clip is running at around 40 seconds from start to end. You can makethis much more visually interesting, and also reduce the duration of the shot, by
adjusting the speed of the clip.
3

In the Inspector’s Speed Change controls, select the Ripple Timeline option and thenchange the Speed% to 800.

Because you changed the Ripple Timeline option before you adjusted the speed of theclip, the rest of the footage in the timeline has rippled to accommodate the clip’s new,retimed duration.

310

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Adding the Speed Points
To create a variable speed change, you need to add one or more speed points.
1

In the timeline, place the playhead somewhere around the point where the first girl is
passing the T-shirt to the second girl (around a third of the way into the clip).

2

Select the clip in the timeline and choose Clip > Retime Controls or press Command-R(macOS) or Ctrl-R (Windows) to display the clip’s retime controls in the timeline.

3

Click the Clip Speed pop-up menu (the black triangle next to the clip’s speed) andchoose Add Speed Point.

Variable Speed Changes

311

A Speed Point is added to the clip at the location of the playhead, and the retime
controls now display two 800% speed segments on this clip.

4

Move the playhead forward until the second girl has taken the T-shirt and is reachingfor the clothing hanger.

5

Click the Clips Speed pop-up menu for the second speed segment and choose Add
Speed Point to add an additional speed point at the playhead’s location in the clip,
thereby creating a third speed segment.

6

312

Add a third speed point where the second girl hangs the T-shirt in the shop.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

By adding three speed points, you have created a total of four distinct speed segmentson this clip. Each of these segments can have their own speed settings.
7

Press T to enable Trim Edit mode.
With Trim Edit mode enabled, any adjustments you make affecting the clip’s overall
duration will ripple the timeline.

8

Click the Clip Speed pop-up menu for the second speed segment (after the first speed
point) and choose Change Speed > 400%.

This segment of the clip, between the first and second speed points, will now play backat 400% of the clip’s original speed.

9

Click the Clip Speed pop-up menu for the fourth speed segment (after the third speed
point) and choose Change Speed > 200% to adjust that part of the clip.

You can also manually adjust the speed of the individual segments.
10 Select the top part of the second speed point and drag to the right to decrease thespeed of the preceding speed segment to about 300%.

NOTE Manually adjusting the control points like this always affects the speedof the segment of the clip to the left of the speed point. To adjust the speed of
the final speed segment of a clip (after the final speed point), select and dragthe right edge of the Change Speed name bar at the top of the clip.

Variable Speed Changes

313

You can also refine the position of each speed point, adjusting the starting frame foreach speed segment.
11 Select the lower part of the first speed point and drag to the left until the viewer shows
the girl behind the door to the store.

This changes the location of this speed point (between the first and second speed
segments) to an earlier frame.
12 Drag the same control to the right until the girl is just about to hand the T-shirt over tothe second girl.

Again, this refines the position of the speed point to a slightly later frame.

314

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Adjusting the Retime Curve
You can make further changes to the speed of the segments between the speed points, aswell as the interpolation between each of the speed sections, using the clip’s Retime Curve.
1

Right-click the DISPLAYING SHIRT clip in the timeline and choose Retime Curve todisplay the retime curve below the clip in the timeline.

You can use two retime curves to finesse the speed of the clip. By default, the Retime
Frame curve appears below the timeline clip. A diagonal line represents the speeds
at which the various parts of the clip progress, with steeper parts of the curve
representing faster speed sections. Moving any of the control points horizontallychanges the location of the speed point within the clip. Moving any of the control
points vertically will change the speed of the preceding and subsequent segments:
moving a speed point up will increase the speed of the preceding speed segment anddecrease the speed of the subsequent segment; moving the control point lower willslow the preceding segment and speed up the subsequent segment. The overall result
will not adjust the duration of the clip and is useful if you don’t want the clip to change
duration in the timeline.
2

Click the Curve pop-up menu in the top left of the retime curve.

Variable Speed Changes

315

3

In the curve pop-up menu, uncheck Retime Frame and check Retime Speed.

This changes the curve to display the speed as a horizontal line, with the relative
speeds of the segments indicated depending on how high the bar is on the curve:
segments with a higher line on the curve are playing back faster than segments at alower point.

4

Drag the horizonal curve between the second and third speed points up toaround 900%.

316

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

5Click to select the first speed point in the Retime Curve.

6

Click the Bézier Curve button to add Bézier handles to the selected speed point.

Adding the Bézier handles changes the way in which the different speeds of the twosegments are interpolated. Now, instead of an instant change from one speed toanother, the change happens gradually over several frames.
7

Drag the Bézier handles further apart to make the interpolation more gradual or dragthem closer together to make the change more abrupt.

8

Select the other two speed points in the Retime Curve in turn and add Bézier handles
to each, adjusting the interpolation between each speed segment to your liking.

NOTE To close the Retime Curve when you’re finished, choose Clip > Show
Curve Editor or press Shift-C.

Variable Speed Changes

317

9

When you’ve finished making the adjustments, right-click the clip and choose Retime
Curve to close the retime curve and press Command-R (macOS) or Ctrl-R (Windows) toclose the clip’s Retime Controls.
The different speed controls can be used either in conjunction with each other or
independently, depending on your needs. For example, you might want to add andadjust the speed points using the intuitive Retime Controls before refining theirinterpolation using the Retime Speed curve. Alternatively, you might want to add
and adjust the speed points for a clip using only the Retime Frame curve. The choice
is entirely yours.

Creating Freeze Frames
Another common requirement when dealing with speed changes of a clip is to havethe clip slow to a freeze frame. This technique is just as frequently used as a dramatic
introduction for a character in a film, or as a teaching aid as part of a training video.
1Zoom and scroll the timeline to the next clip, called ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD.

2

Place the playhead on a frame where the undercarriage of the airplane isclearly visible.

318

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3

Select the ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD clip in the timeline and press Command-R(macOS) or Ctrl-R (Windows) to display the Retime Controls for the clip.

4

Click the Clip Speed pop-up and choose Freeze Frame.

Two Speed Points are added to the clip, with a 2-second freeze frame between them.

5

Right-click the clip ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD and choose Retime Curve.

6

In the Curve pop-up menu, deselect the Retime Frame curve and select the Retime
Speed curve.

7

Add Bézier handles to each of the speed points in the Retime Speed curve.

8

Play back the ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD clip to review the interpolation from 100% to
0% speed and back to 100% again.

Creating Freeze Frames319

Changing Retime Processingand Motion Estimation
You’ll no doubt notice that the change between the speed segments isn’t quite as smoothas you’d probably like. This is due to the Retime Process used by the clip.
1

At the bottom of the Inspector, reveal the Retime and Scaling parameters.

Currently, the clip is using Project Settings for any retime processes you apply to it,which, for this project, is set to the Resolve default of Nearest. This option essentiallyrepeats video frames as necessary when slowing a clip’s speed below its original frame
rate and accounts for the somewhat stuttering playback of this clip as it approaches
and leaves the freeze frame. Two other options are available in this menu: Frame Blend
and Optical Flow.
2

Change the Retime Process to Frame Blend and play back the clip to review the change.

Frame Blend applies short dissolves between the duplicated frames in an attempt tosmooth out the movement within the slowed clip. Depending on the footage, it canoften create a smoother result than using Nearest.
3

Change the Retime Process option to Optical Flow and, again, review the change.

TIP For less powerful computers, you may need to choose Playback > Render
Cache > Smart for the next few steps to allow Resolve to cache the speed
changes in the timeline since Optical Flow processing is a very processorintensive computation.

320

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Optical Flow is a high-quality but processor-intensive process that uses motion
estimation to generate new frames from the original source frames. It can often
produce vastly superior results when playing back a clip at speeds slower than its
original frame rate as long as you don’t have one object passing in front of anotherwithin the frame. If this is the case, you may notice “rippling” artifacts around theedges of objects, which to a degree are still visible in this clip.
DaVinci Resolve, however, provides further settings to help minimize this problem byallowing you to adjust the Motion Estimation being used by the Optical Flow process.

NOTE Motion Estimation will only be applied if the Retime Process is set to
Optical Flow in the clip or Project Settings.

Again, Motion Estimation has several settings that become increasingly demanding:Standard Faster and Standard Better are processor-efficient processes that often yield
good-quality results for most situations. The default for Project Settings is Standard Faster.
Enhanced Faster and Enhanced Better should yield superior results in cases where
the standard options exhibit artifacts. Both of these options are more computationallyintensive that the Standard options, so they take longer to process.
Finally, Speed Warp allows for even better results when reducing the speed of a clip
below its original frame rate. Speed Warp uses the DaVinci Resolve Neural Engine to
reduce visual artifacts to a minimum. Due to its high processor demands, it is only
available on a clip-by-clip basis and cannot be set as an option in the Project Settings.
As always, results for each setting will vary depending on your footage.
4

Change the Motion Estimation setting for the ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD clip to
Enhanced Better.
Even at this setting, you should notice a slight problem with the way the wing tips arebeing interpolated.

Creating Freeze Frames

321

5

Choose Playback > Render Cache > User.

6

Right-click the ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD clip in the timeline and choose Render Cache
Color Output.

NOTE Render Cache format settings and other controls are available under
Optimized Media and Render Cache in the Master Settings category of the
Project Settings window.

7

Change the Motion Estimation setting to Speed Warp.

8

Allow the Speed Warp process to complete and the timeline to automatically cache theresults. Once completed, play back the results.

With Speed Warp enabled in the Motion estimation settings for this clip, the results arevastly superior. Speed Warp, however, is such an intensive process that it should only
be used sparingly on the most high-spec machines.

NOTE If you’re using the free version of DaVinci Resolve, any clip using the
Speed Warp motion estimation setting will be watermarked.

322

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Render In PlaceThe edit page has an additional feature for assisting you if you’re dealing with processorintensive effects, such as this Speed Warped clip. Render in Place allows you to easily
render out selected timeline clips to an entirely new media file on your hard drive, together
with any “baked in” effects. The rendered media is then automatically added to the media
pool and used to “replace” the original timeline clip. This is useful when you need to gradea clip with multiple effects since it means you don’t have to keep caching that portionof the timeline.

NOTE Render in Place can be applied to multiple selected timeline and compoundclips. Selecting multiple clips will result in each clip being rendered in place
separately, but as part of a batch operation.

1

In the media pool, select the Speed Change bin and, in the timeline, right-click the
ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD clip and choose Render in Place.
The Render in Place window opens displaying the options that will be used for creating
the new media files.

2

Leave the options set to their defaults and click Render.
You’ll be asked where the new media should be placed on your system.

Creating Freeze Frames

323

3

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 07, select the Render in Place folder, andclick Open.
The new media file is immediately created in the chosen location.

Once the process is complete, the original ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD timeline clip has
been replaced with the newly created file called ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD Render 1.mov,which is also added to the selected bin in the media pool.

Because this clip now has the speed ramp “baked in,” it will now play without the needto cache the clip in the timeline. However, the speed changes you’ve made are nolonger accessible.
Thankfully, Render in Place is not just a one-way operation. Once a clip has been
rendered in place, you can always revert the process if you need to refine theeffects further.
4

In the timeline, right-click the ST MAARTEN OVERHEAD Render 1.mov clip andchoose Decompose to Original.
The original clip, along with the editable speed changes, is returned to the timeline but therendered version remains in the media pool and on your hard drive. This allows you torefine the effect further before creating an additional rendered in place clip, if required.

TIP It can be useful to color code clips as you render them in place so thatyou can quickly identify which clips can be decomposed to original later.
Alternatively, you can simply place the new clip on a video track above theoriginal clip in the timeline.

324

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3D Keyer FX
A common effects task many editors are faced with is having to work with green- or bluescreen footage. This footage is designed to be keyed against a background plate and is acommon technique used in fantasy and science fiction films, as well as in many TV shows andonline videos, where you may want your talent to appear against a virtual background.
Alternatively, even if the shot will be finalized later by a dedicated visual effects artist, theeditor may still need to create a temporary version of the composite to see how effectively
the foreground and background elements will work together. If the shots can’t be readily
combined as planned, it is so much easier for the editor to swap takes or edit around theidentified problems than it would be for the VFX artist.
In this exercise, you’ll use the new 3D Keyer effect to composite a shot from the short sci-fi
film Hyperlight.
1

From the timeline viewer pop-up menu, choose the 03 3D Keyer timeline.

2

Play the timeline to review the short scene that’s been edited for you, and then return
your playhead to the start of the clip on Video 2.

This is a short sequence of shots from the sci-fi short Hyperlight. Obviously, thesecond shot of the man against the green screen somewhat ruins the conceit thatthese two characters are supposed to be in a spaceship orbiting a planet.

3D Keyer FX

325

3

Select the clip on Video 2 and press D to disable the clip in the timeline and reveal thebackground plate of the planet.

This is the view that the man should have outside the window of the spaceship. To
achieve this, you need to apply the 3D Keyer filter.
4

Press D again to re-enable the clip in the timeline.

5

Click the Effects button to open the Effects Library, select the Open FX > Filters group,and scroll through the list of filter categories to locate the Resolve FX Key filters.

326

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

NOTE Each of the Resolve FX Key filters is based on the appropriate color pagequalifiers; indeed, these filters are effectively the respective controls from thecolor page packaged and made available in the edit page. There are two color
key filters you can choose to work with. For this exercise, you’ll use the 3D Keyerbut, even though the controls are broadly the same, the HSL Keyer is useful if
you want to specifically target different combinations of hue, saturation, andbrightness for a more refined key. The Luma Keyer is used for performing keys
on just the luminance (brightness) of a clip and is often used in conjunction
with composite modes. The Alpha Matte Shrink and Grow filter can be used tofurther refine the keys created using the other filters.

6

Double-click the 3D Keyer filter to apply it to the selected green-screen clip of the man
on Video 2.
The only indications that the effect has been applied is the appearance of the FX
badge in the timeline clip’s information and the Effects tab of the Inspector being
highlighted.

7

Select the Effects tab in the Inspector to reveal the control for the 3D Keyer filter.

To begin the process of compositing this shot with the background plate, you’ll need toenable the viewer’s onscreen effect controls.

3D Keyer FX

327

8

Choose View > Viewer Overlay > Open FX Overlay.
This enables the onscreen controls for any effects that have controls you can access inthe viewer.

9With the first Eyedropper tool selected in the 3D Keyer controls, click and drag acrossthe center area of the green screen.

This process samples the main hue, saturation, and luminance values of the green
screen highlighted by the blue onscreen control. However, you’ll notice that someparts of the green have fallen outside of this selection.
10 Click the disclosure arrow for the Usage Options and select the Show Paths option todisplay the selection path you have chosen.

NOTE Selecting Show Paths automatically deselects the Smart Show
Paths option.

328

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

11 In the Effects Inspector, click the Add Eyedropper control to add additional areas of thegreen screen that fell outside of your initial selection.

12 Click and drag again to create additional selections for the key across the areas ofgreen not included in your initial selection.

TIP If you find that you have been too aggressive in your selection and partsof the shot outside the green have been selected, you can attempt to remove
those areas from the selection by using the Subtract Eyedropper control.

3D Keyer FX

329

With additional parts of the green screen added to your selection, you’ll probably
notice that a green edge remains near the side of the window. To refine the key
further, you’ll want to see a bit more detail as to what you are selecting.

13 Deselect the Show Paths option in the Usage Options.
14 At the bottom of the 3D Keyer controls in the Effects Inspector, change the Output
pop-up menu to Alpha Highlight B/W.

In this view, the alpha channel you’re creating for this clip is displayed. White
represents a solid area where you won’t see the background plate, black represents
areas of transparency where the background plate is fully visible, and any areas of grayrepresent areas of partial transparency.

330

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

15 Change the Output pop-up menu to Alpha Highlight.

Alpha Highlight displays the selected part of the key as a flat, gray area and enables
you to easily identify the areas of green that remain around the edges of the window.
To refine the key, you need to access the Matte Finesse controls.
16 In the Effects Inspector, click the disclosure arrow to collapse the Usage Options
controls, and then click the disclosure arrow for the Matte Finesse controls.

The Matte Finesse controls contain familiar parameters for adjusting the cleanlinessof the key. In this case, you just want to clean up the black areas of the key.

3D Keyer FX

331

17 Increase the Clean Black slider to about 18.0 to further refine the key and include thefinal, wayward portions of the green screen in your selection.

TIP Use the scroll wheel on your mouse to zoom in and the middle mousebutton to pan around the clip in the timeline viewer to get a better look at thematte refinements you’re making. Press Z to fit the whole of the shot back inthe timeline viewer when you’re happy with your results.

18 Change the Output pop-up menu back to Final Composite to see the results so far.

Adjusting Despill
So far, it seems that you have achieved an acceptable result, and the director is at least
happy that the foreground and background elements work together as planned. However,as always, there are ways this composite can be improved to help sell the shot further,mainly by removing some of the spill from the green screen.

NOTE As most keying filters rely on selecting a range of hue, saturation, andluminance values to create the key, the process of selecting the correct HSL values
can be made slightly easier by having the green screen flooded with light when
it is filmed. Unfortunately, depending on the rest of the shot’s proximity to thegreen screen, this can result in unwanted reflection, or spill, of the green on theforeground elements.

332

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

1Play through the clip on Video 2 until the man turns away from the window.

Look carefully and you should see that the man’s face is reflecting some of the green.
Moreover, the upper-right portion of the man’s uniform (where the USEF logo is) isn’t
supposed to be that green because it also is reflecting light from the green-screen
background.
2

In the Effects Inspector, increase the Despill slider in the Keyer Options controls to
reduce the amount of spill falling onto the man’s face and uniform (you might have tobe quite aggressive for this particular example).

The Despill control quickly eliminates the spill from the image while retaining theimage’s original color.
Excellent job! You’ve now seen how easy it is to create a composited shot directly in the edit
page using the 3D Keyer filter.

3D Keyer FX

333

Garbage Mattes
Another common technique used in compositing shots using color keyers like thisis to use a garbage matte to exclude portions of the shot. This is especially useful
if the green screen doesn’t cover the full area within the frame, or you have anerrant light or microphone in shot. This shot from Hyperlight you’re working on
has no requirement for a garbage matte, but the Resolve FX Keyer filters do have
options for adding simple rectangular or circular mattes.

Transform FX
Another common compositing task many editors need to undertake is adding elements toenhance shots such as logos on the side of trucks or placing content on screens to makethem more relevant to the scene. Earlier in this lesson, you quickly scaled and positioned
a clip for a picture-in-picture effect, applying a small change to the yaw parameters fora slight change to the perspective of the clip. However, in many cases you’ll need more
control over the clip than the pitch and yaw can easily provide. In those cases, you’ll
need to use the Transform filter to be able to corner pin the image into place.
You’ll explore this technique by adding a logo to a shop window.
1

From the timeline viewer pop-up menu, select the 04 Transform timeline.

This timeline contains three shots. The first shot has a .png version of the “Citizen
Chain” logo edited over the top of it.

334

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

2

In the timeline, select the CC-Logo.png clip and, from the Effects Library, locate the
Resolve FX Transform group of filters.

3

Double-click the Transform filter to apply it to the CC-Logo.png clip in the timeline andclick the Effects tab in the Inspector.

Transform FX

335

At first glance, you’d be forgiven for thinking that the Transform filter has very similar
controls to the standard transform parameters available in the Video Inspector of
any clip. However, this filter does add some additional controls over the standardtransforms by offering advanced options that include motion blur, edge behavior,and cropping controls.
4

Change the Control Mode pop-up menu to Interactive – Canvas.

The Interactive – Canvas mode moves many of the Transform filter’s controls from theInspector to the timeline viewer, as represented by the white outline and red vertices.
You can drag these onscreen controls to distort the image in a variety of ways.

NOTE You may need to choose View > Viewer Overlay > Open FX Overlay
if you don’t see the onscreen controls you activated in the previous 3D
Keyer exercise.

5

Ensure that your playhead is at the start of the timeline and, using the corner areas,drag the controls so that the corners and edges of the graphic align with the corners
and edges of the window in the underlying video clip.

336

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

NOTE You will need to judge where the top-left corner will sit based on how
the graphic’s edges align with the edges of the window because, of course, thetop-left corner of the window is not visible in this shot.

6

When you’re happy with the way the graphic aligns with the window, start playback.

Oh dear. Now you can see that although the graphic is aligned perfectly, because thecamera tracks right as Sasha arrives, the window doesn’t stay still within the frame, but
the graphic does.
No problem. A couple of keyframes should help.
7

Return your playhead to the start of the timeline and, in the Effects Inspector, click thedisclosure arrow to open the Animation controls, and then click the keyframe button
for the Canvas Keyframe control.

The keyframe button turns red to indicate that a keyframe has been applied at thestart of the clip.

Transform FX

337

8

Press ‘ (apostrophe) to move your playhead to the last frame of the CC-Logo.png
clip in the timeline and adjust the corner areas of the onscreen controls to align thegraphic with the window once more.

Another keyframe is automatically added at the end of the clip.
9

Press Shift-` (grave accent) to disable the timeline viewer’s onscreen controls andreview the results of the keyframing.
Perfect! The graphic now looks like it’s part of the shop’s window display. The keyframes
allow the graphic to follow the movement of the camera. Thankfully, the camera
movement is smooth and consistent. If it wasn’t, then more keyframes would havebeen needed.
One final touch will really help sell this effect. You can change the composite modeof the graphic to better integrate it with the background clip.

10 Click the Video tab in the Inspector for the CC-Logo.png clip and, in the Composite
controls, change the Composite Mode pop-up to Overlay.

The Overlay composite mode increases the contrast of the underlying video clip where
the graphic is the brightest (there is no change to the contrast of the clip where the.png is transparent).

338

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

11 Reduce the Opacity slider to about 60.0 to reduce the intensity of the graphic andintegrate it further with the video clip.

NOTE The final control mode for the Transform filter is Interactive – Pins. Adjusting
the image in this mode is done by manually placing control points, called pins,in the timeline viewer. Adding one pin only gives you position control. At least
two points are required for scaling and rotation. Dragging on one of the pins
scales or rotates the image around the other pin. Using three pins, you can create
perspective distortions by dragging any one of the pins. You can add up to fourpins for unique corner-pinning distortions that don’t rely of the regions specified by
the Interactive – Canvas mode.

Congratulations! You have now learned how you can distort and keyframe a clip tocomposite onto other shots. While more comprehensive tools for this sort of task,
including trackers, are available in the Fusion and color pages (both of which are outside
the scope of this book), knowing how to accomplish a simple version in the edit page is a
useful technique for any editor to have up their sleeve!

Video Collage
The final Resolve FX you will work with in this lesson is the Video Collage filter. Previously,
you saw how the Transform parameters in the Video Inspector are used to adjust theZoom and Position of a clip to create a composited effect. The Video Collage filter isdesigned to make it easier to create uniform, grid-based, picture-in-picture and other splitscreen layouts. It is ideal for quickly creating a “video wall” effect, which can require thescaling and positioning of many clips.
The Video Collage filter works in two main ways. The default is Create Background, which
you’ll explore first.

Video Collage

339

1

From the timeline viewer pop-up menu, select the 05 Video Collage Background timeline.
This timeline consists of several video clips stacked on top of each other on different tracks.

Typically, to create a picture-in-picture effect, all the clips on the upper video tracks
would need to be scaled and positioned accordingly. However, the Video Collage filter
uses the topmost clip as the background, using this clip as a “frame” and creating holes
in this frame to reveal the clips on the lower tracks—“cookie-cutter” style.
2

From the Effects Library, locate the Resolve FX Transform group of filters and doubleclick the Video Collage filter to apply it to the clip on Video 4.

The clip on Video 3 is now displayed within four boxes. These four boxes are the holes
created in the Video 4 clip by the Video Collage filter.

340

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Setting the Layout
The first step in configuring the Video Collage filter is to arrange the “holes” (referred to as
tiles) using the controls in the Inspector.
1

Click the Effects Inspector to reveal the Video Collage controls.

2

Click the Preview Layout checkbox.

Each of the tiles is now clearly highlighted and denoted by a number. The actual
number of tiles is dictated by the Columns and Rows controls in the Inspector. The tile
with the shaded lines indicates the currently selected tile.
3

By default, the number of Columns is set to 2, and the number of Rows is also set to 2.
This is the correct layout for this exercise.

4

In the Inspector, click the Tiles button to switch to the tiles controls.

These controls allow you to customize the tiles either as a group or individually. Since
you won’t be needing Tile 4, you might as well remove it from the layout.

Video Collage

341

5

In the Active Tile pop-up menu, choose Tile 4.
In the layout, Tile 4 becomes the active tile, as indicated by the shaded lines in
the layout.

6

Click the Manual Tile Management checkbox.

7

Click Delete Tile to remove Tile 4 from the layout completely.

With no Tile 4, Tile 3 now becomes the currently active tile by default.

342

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

8

From the Active Tile pop-up menu, choose Tile 2 to make it the currently active tile.

9

Click the disclosure arrow for Custom Size/Shape to reveal the controls.
Currently, Tile 2 is occupying only one part of the grid: Column 2 and Row 1.

10 Change the End Row value to 2 to expand Tile 2 into the space formerly occupied by
the deleted Tile 4.

With the layout of the tiles now set, you will customize their look all together.
11 Click the disclosure arrow next to Tile Styling to reveal the controls.
12 Increase the Tile Border to about 0.025 to add a consistent border around all the tiles.

TIP You can uncheck the Apply To All Tiles checkbox to further customize theborder settings for the currently selected tile, if required.

Video Collage343

13 Click the disclosure arrow for the Drop Shadow controls and increase the Strength
value to around 0.50 and the Drop Angle to about 90.0, the Drop Distance toabout 0.03, and the Blur to about 0.50 to customize the drop shadow around each tile.

Finally, one of the more powerful aspects of the Video Collage filter is the ability tocreate animated intros and outros quickly and easily for each tile. These animations
can be either manually keyframed or automatically generated over a customizable
duration. There are four types of animations to choose from: Fade, Fly, Shrink, andRotate. In Create Background mode, however, only the holes created by the tiles are
animated, rather than their content, so Fade or Shrink are good choices here.
14 Click the disclosure arrow to reveal the Tile Animation controls, change the Animate
pop-up to Intro Only, uncheck the Shrink checkbox, select the Fade checkbox, andchange the Duration slider to 24 to create a 1-second fade for the tiles (this timeline
is set to 24 fps).

15 Play the timeline to preview the effect so far, including the fade in and fade out
uniformly applied to all tiles.
With the parameters of the Video Collage effect set, now it’s time to fill the tiles.

344

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Resizing the Content
Now that you have used the Preview Layout to set up the grid, look, and animation of theVideo Collage effect, it’s time to turn off the Preview mode and scale the underlying clips tofill the holes in the background clip.
1

Position your playhead about halfway through the timeline (at about 2:00) so that you
can clearly see the three tiles, after their 24-frame fade in.

2

At the top of the Video Collage controls, uncheck Preview Layout.

Once again, the clip on Video 3 becomes visible through the holes created by each tile.
You now need to scale the clip to fit the hole created by Tile 1.
3

Select the clip on V3 and choose View > Viewer Overlay > Transform or click thetimeline viewer’s onscreen Transform controls.

4

Use the onscreen controls to adjust the zoom and position of the clip on V3 so it fits in
the hole created in the top left of the grid.

Video Collage

345

5

Select the clip on V2 and, again, use the onscreen controls to size and position the clip
in the hole created by Tile 3, with the girl dominant in the frame.

6

As the clip’s edges extend untidily beyond the edges of the tile, choose View > Viewer
Overlay > Crop, or change the onscreen controls to Crop, and use the onscreen
controls to remove the excess from around the outside of the tile.

346

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

7

Finally, choose View > Viewer Overlay > Transform, or change the onscreen controls backto Transform, select the clip on V1, and resize the interview in the hole created by Tile 2.

8

When you have each clip placed correctly within the correct holes, choose View >Viewer Overlay > Toggle On/Off, or press Shift-` (grave accent), to turn off the onscreen
controls and review the timeline.
Awesome! However, as always, there’s one last final touch to add.

Stacking and Reordering Effects
The effect you’ve built using the Video Collage filter is looking great, but to really emphasize
the foreground clips you may want to add a slight amount of blur to the background.
1

Deselect all clips in the timeline and, in the Effects Library, scroll to the top of the Filters
list to the Resolve FX Blur category. Double-click the Gaussian Blur filter to the clip on V4.

Video Collage

347

Ah…By adding the blur filter, you’re simply blurring everything on that clip—including
the edges of the tiles and the drop shadow!
You’ll need to reorder the effects on the clip to keep those elements sharp and justblur the image of the mountains.
2

Click the Effects tab in the Inspector.

Notice that the Gaussian Blur filter is listed below the Video Collage filter because
it was applied after the Video Collage.

348

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3

Click the Up Arrow control for the Gaussian Blur filter to move it above the Video
Collage filter.

The background image remains blurred, but now the edges of the tiles are not blurredbecause you have now specified that this is the order in which these effects should
be applied.

4

Click the Gaussian Blur filter in the Effects Inspector to access its controls and adjust
the amount of blur to your liking.

NOTE In the edit page, only the controls for one filter can be displayed in the
Effects tab at any one time; however, you can always access the controls forother effects by clicking their names as you have just done for the Gaussian
Blur filter.

Excellent. You’ve seen how the Video Collage filter can be used to create effective picturein-picture effects over and above just using the transform controls available in the Video
Inspector in Create Background mode. Next, you’ll explore how you can use it in Create
Tile mode.

Video Collage349

Creating Tiles with Video Collage
An alternative way of employing the Video Collage filter is to use it to create and animate
clips as individual tiles, much like you did in the first exercise in this lesson. This follows
much more the traditional way of laying out a composite by having the background layeron the lowest video track and subsequent layers edited above this.
As before, it’s best to set up the Video Collage on one clip using the Layout Preview mode.
Once you’re happy with the layout and animations, you can simply copy the effects to otherclips where you can then adjust them further.
Much like editing in general, there may seem to be many complex steps involved, but once
you have things set up, the payoff is well worth it!
1

From the timeline viewer pop-up menu, select the Video Collage Tiles timeline.

This timeline has been set up with the same “background” clip on Video 1, and a logothat fades in on Video 2. Video 3 through 5 are currently disabled, but all have clips
that you will use to build a custom animated intro for Organ Mountain Outfitters.
2350

Enable track V3 in the timeline and review the shot of the girl in the hat.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

3Move your playhead to the point at which she has turned to look at the camera(at about 3:00).

4

From the Effects Library, locate the Resolve FX Transform group of filters and apply theVideo Collage filter to the clip on V3.
As before, the filter defaults to showing a 2 x 2 grid displaying the clips on the lower
two video tracks.

Creating Tiles with Video Collage

351

5

Select the clip on V3 and click the Effects tab in the Inspector.

6

Change the Workflow pop-up menu to Create Tile.
The girl in the hat now displays as a picture-in-picture.

352

7

Click the Preview Layout checkbox to view the familiar tile preview.

8

Change the number of Columns to 3 and number of Rows to 1.

9

Increase the Rounding to 1.0 to create three circular tiles.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

10 Change the Vertical Offset to about 0.20 so the tiles sit above the mountains andincrease the Horizontal Spacing to about 0.125 to reduce the size of the tiles.

NOTE The size of the tiles is based on the Left/Right Margins and Top/Bottom
Margins, with the outermost tiles placed at these margins and any additionaltiles distributed evenly between those outermost tiles. Therefore, increasing
the Horizontal Spacing between each tile results in each tile being madesmaller, since the outer margins haven’t changed.

11 Click the Tiles button and open the Tile Styling controls.
12 Increase the Tile Border to about 0.025 and then click the Tile Color chip and use
the system Color Picker to select a white border to match the Organ Mountain
Outfitters logo.
13 Open the Drop Shadow controls and change the Strength to about 0.350, the Drop
Angle to 90.0, the Drop Distance to about 0.035, and the Blur to about 0.5 to createa subtle, diffused drop shadow.

Creating Tiles with Video Collage353

14 Deselect Preview Layout to display just the current title (Tile 1) and the clip of the girlturning toward the camera.

15 Open the Resize Content controls and adjust the Pan to about 0.06, the Tilt to about
0.35, and the Zoom to about 0.85 to reframe the girl in the circle, not forgetting tokeep the Organ Mountain Outfitter’s clothing brand in shot!

The filter is now ready to be copied to the other clips in the tracks Video 4 and 5.

354

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Copying and Pasting Attributes
The easiest way to apply the same effect, with the same settings, to the other clips is to use
the copy and paste attributes commands, after which you only need to make one or two
adjustments to the copied filters for the new clips.
1

Click the clip on V3 to ensure that it’s currently selected, and then press Command-C(macOS) or Ctrl-C (Windows) or choose Edit > Copy to copy the clip.

2

Shift-click the Enable Video Track button for V4 or V5 to enable all disabled tracks.

3

Select the clips on V4 and V5 and press Option-V (macOS) or Alt-V (Windows) or choose
Edit > Paste Attributes.

4

In the Paste Attributes dialog, select Plugins and click Apply.

Creating Tiles with Video Collage

355

The Video Collage filter is applied to the selected clips with exactly the same settings
as the original clip it was copied from. You will need to make a few changes to thesecopied filters.

5

Command-click (macOS) or Ctrl-click (Windows) the clip on V5 to deselect it, leaving
just the clip on V4 selected.

6

Click the Effects tab in the Inspector to reveal the Video Collage settings for theselected clip.

7

In the Manage Tiles controls, change the Active Tile pop-up menu to Tile 2.
The clip on Video 2 appears in the position specified for Tile 2.

356

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

8Open the Resize Content control and change the Pan to about 0.07, the Tilt to 0.0, andthe Zoom to 0.6.

9

Select the clip on V5, change the Active Tile pop-up to Tile 3 and, in the Resize Content
controls, change the Pan to about 0.009, the Tilt to 0.0, and the Zoom to about 0.585.

Now that you have each of the tiles styled, it’s time to add some keyframed animation.
Although the Video Collage effect has its own animation parameters, it’s often easier
to animate multiple elements together in the same compound clip. That way, if you
wish to change the animation, you only have one set of keyframes to worry about.
10 In the media pool, select the Compound Clips bin.
11 Select the clips on V3, V4, and V5, and then choose Clip > New Compound Clip or rightclick them and choose New Compound Clip.

Creating Tiles with Video Collage357

12 Name the new compound clip OMO Tiles and click Create.

The three clips in the timeline are collapsed into a single compound clip, leaving two
empty timeline tracks.
13 Right-click the timeline track headers and choose Delete Empty Tracks to remove theredundant video tracks.

NOTE The empty audio track will not be deleted. Each timeline must contain atleast one video and one audio track.

358

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

14 Place the timeline playhead at the position just as the logo on V2 is almost fully fadedin and, with the OMO Tiles compound clip still selected, click the Position keyframe in
the Inspector.

15 Return the playhead to the start of the timeline and change the Y Position value toabout 600, or until the tiles have moved fully out of the top of the timeline viewer,
adding a new keyframe to this position automatically.

16 With the compound clip still selected in the timeline, Choose Clip > Show Curve Editor
or press Shift-C.
17 Click the Curve pop-up menu and change the current curve to Position Y.

Creating Tiles with Video Collage359

18 Select the second keyframe in the Curve Editor and click the Ease In button to add a
Bézier handle to the left side of the keyframe.

19 Drag the Bézier handle down slightly to flatten the curve, slowing the animation as it
approaches the keyframe position.

20 To change the timing of the animation, select the compound clip in the timeline
and choose Clip > Show Keyframe Editor or press Shift-Command-C (macOS) or
Shift‑Ctrl-C (Windows).
21 Drag the second keyframe in the Keyframe Editor to the left for 15 frames or until thegraphic on V2 has faded in completely.

22 Press Shift-C to close the Curve Editor and press Shift-Command-C (macOS) or
Shift‑Ctrl-C (Windows) to close the Keyframe Editor and play back the timeline toreview the animation.

TIP If you wish to manually keyframe the individual tiles created using
the Video Collage effect, you’ll need to nest each of the clips in their own
compound clip in order to adjust the render order of the Video Collage andTransform controls

360

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Well done! You have successfully completed this lesson and can now use some of theeffects included with DaVinci Resolve 18 to complete common tasks required of editors
on a daily basis.

NOTE A series of finished timelines for each of the exercises in this lesson areavailable for you to import into this project from R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 07/
Timelines.

Lesson Review
1Which DaVinci Resolve FX can be used to key blue- or green-screen footage over a
background?
a) Luma Keyerb) HSL Keyerc) 3D Keyer

2

True or false? The only way to determine whether a clip has a Resolve FX applied is toopen the Inspector.

3

Which Resolve FX can be used to easily adjust a clip’s pitch, yaw, width, and heightvalues using intuitive onscreen controls?
a) Distortb) Perspectivec) Transform

4

Which Resolve FX can be used to quickly create complex picture-in-picture effects?
a) Gridb) Video Collagec) Blanking Fill

5

True or false? Render in Place creates a video file using the render cache options in
Project Settings.

Lesson Review

361

Answers

3621b) and c). The Luma Keyer has no controls for selecting hue and saturation values.

2

False. The timeline clip displays a small FX badge next to the clip name.

3c) Transform.

4b) Video Collage.

5

False. Render cache and Render in Place use different settings.

Lesson 7

Edit Page Effects

Lesson 8

Editing and
Mixing AudioYour project’s soundtrack is an
essential part of the overall audienceTimeexperience. You could have the mostThis lesson takes approximately
60 minutes to complete.

wonderful editing, fantastic effects,

Goals

and superb grading on your film, but

Preparing the Project

364

When Should You Start Mixing?

366

Replacing Lines from
Other Takes  	

367

Balancing the Dialogue Clips373

social media videos as it’s ever been.

Enhancing the Scene

380

In this lesson, you’ll explore somePanning Tracks in
Acoustic Space  	382

Adding More Atmosphere

386

Creating a Radio Effect393

Simplifying the Mix

399

Mixing with the Mixer

407

Using Buses for
Alternative Mixes  	

408

Lesson Review

419

if your audience can’t hear what’s
happening clearly, they won’t be able
to engage with your story and willquickly switch off. And that’s as true
today for films, TV shows, and online

specific techniques for audio editing,sound design, and final mixing foryour timelines.

Preparing the Project
For this lesson, you’ll work on the soundtrack for the short scene from Sync that you
previously edited in Lesson 4, “Editing a Dramatic Scene.”

TIP Ideally, you’ll want to have a good set of speakers or headphones connected toyour computer for this lesson to appreciate the audible subtleties.

1

In the Project Manager, right-click and choose Import Project. Navigate to R18 Editors
Guide/Lesson 08, select the SYNC SCENE AUDIO.drp project, and choose Open toimport the project into your Project Manager.

2

Open the project and relink the media files.

3

Choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout.

4

From the Select Timeline pop-up menu, select the SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX timeline.
Adjust the timeline track heights if appropriate so you can see as many of the timeline
clips as possible.

5

Play through the SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX timeline to reacquaint yourself withthe scene.
Wow! There’s a lot going on in this timeline! You should be familiar with this scene
between Doctor Kominsky and Agent Jenkins, which you cut in an earlier lesson. Thisis a slightly refined version of the scene with several lines of dialogue having been
removed to help the scene’s pacing. Some additional elements have also been added

364

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audioto enhance the soundtrack; the audio clips on A4, for example, are a radio call being
received by the FBI agents about the developing situation, and there are also music
and sound effects on A6–A8 that drown out Agent Jenkins’s final lines.
To get a better sense of how the audio is currently working, you’ll mute some of
the tracks.
6

Open the Index window and select the Tracks tab.
The Tracks Index gives you a more compact view of the track controls, including the
track names.

7

Click the Mute button for tracks A4, A7, A8, and A9, and then play the timeline again topreview the scene.

Notice how the timeline has been arranged with each character in the scene having
their own audio track; even the assistant who has only one line in this scene (and wasrecorded on the Doctor’s audio track) has a track dedicated to that line. This is to aid
the audio mixing process, which you will get to in good time.

Preparing the Project365

When Should You Start Mixing?
Up to now, you’ve learned how to use DaVinci Resolve to edit audio at the subframe level,
adjust audio levels, add fades, etc. However, most audio work occurs toward the end of theediting process, and that’s why this lesson is the penultimate chapter of this book.
While you will no doubt make basic adjustments to audio levels throughout the editing
process, you don’t really want to spend too long perfecting the audio mix until the editing
has been completed. This is the point that’s usually referred to as picture lock, where thedirector or client is happy with the work so far and the fine-tuning can begin. If you start
mixing the audio too early, you may find yourself in a position where you’ll have to cut out apart of the scene, or maybe the entire scene completely, in which case all your hard work andthe time taken to achieve it will be wasted. This is also the reason why grading the picture
also occurs once the scene is picture locked and no further changes should be made.
In practice though, while picture lock may be aspired to, many edits may need further
tweaking after a mix or grade has been started (or, in extreme cases, completed). In thesecases, the benefit of having the editing, mixing, and grading tools together inside thesame application becomes obvious, as Resolve allows you to move seamlessly from one
process to another and back again just by clicking the appropriate page.
The vast majority of the timelines you will work on will have three main audio components:
dialogue (words spoken by actors, interviewees, or in voiceover/commentary), effects(sounds that occur onscreen or offscreen, such as a door slamming, the tapping of an
iPhone’s keyboard, an aircraft approaching from a distance, or wolves howling in thewilderness), and music (which sets the tone of the scene).
Quite often, there might be several clips across different audio tracks for the same typeof audio. For example, this timeline has four tracks for dialogue clips: one for each of the
speaking actors and a fourth for the radio operator’s lines. There are four effects tracks:
one for the audience applause at the start of the scene, one for the sounds of the crowdin the room, and then two more for the crash and bang effects at the end of the scene.
There’s also one music track for the mixed score.
The audio in each of these groups can be internal to the scene or external. Internal audio(often referred to as diegetic) comes from a source the viewer can place somewhere
within the scene, such as a specific speaker or music playing from a radio. It doesn’t
always need to be emanating from a visible source to be classed as diegetic sound; thesounds of cars, buses, sirens, etc., can indicate that the scene is taking place at a busy
city intersection, even though not a single vehicle may be seen onscreen! External audio(called non‑diegetic) is anything in the soundtrack that couldn’t possibly come fromanything within the onscreen world, such as a narrator’s voiceover or music used toenhance the audience’s emotion.

366

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioAgain, this scene contains a mixture of diegetic and non-diegetic audio. Can you identify
which is which?
The applause as the doctor walks off the stage in the scene’s first shot is obviously meant tobe made by a large crowd of people she’s just been addressing, while the sounds of people
speaking in the background are made by the extras surrounding the doctor and the agentsthroughout the rest of the scene. (This ATMOS track you added in Lesson 4—the nondescript
audio of a crowd—also has the advantage of providing a consistent background noise, orroom tone, that helps fill the gaps in the soundtrack left during the dialogue clips.) However,the sounds of impacts and the music toward the end of the scene are obviously meant only
for the audiences’ ears, to provide an emotional resonance to the end of the scene.

Replacing Lines from Other Takes  
A common problem that editors often face is that a take might be great visually, but theaudio might be less than optimal. Indeed, many takes are often chosen initially on the basisof their visuals rather than their audio. In these cases, it’s often easier to replace part of theaudio in the timeline with the audio from another take.
1

Select the Markers tab in the Index and double-click the second marker named
REMOVE CLAP?.
The playhead jumps to the second red marker in the timeline.

TIP Pressing Shift-Up Arrow or Shift-Down Arrow jumps the playhead to theprevious or next marker, respectively.

Replacing Lines from Other Takes  

367

2

Press / (slash) to play around the current playhead position, paying attention to thedoctor’s line.
Ouch! It sounds as though Doctor K hits herself as she brings her hand down! It’svery distracting but probably very difficult to edit out (which should have been yourfirst instinct). Instead, you will use Resolve’s audio track layers to replace the line withanother take.

3

Zoom in on the current playhead position and use Shift-Mouse scroll to increase theheight of the audio tracks.

4

Choose View > Show Audio Track Layers.
All the timeline tracks appear to shrink in height. But look closer, and you will see aspace appear above the clips for each track, separated by a thin dividing line. These
are the audio track layers.

NOTE Audio track layers function very similar to the way you work with video
tracks. You can add any amount of audio clips to the audio track’s layers, andthey will appear one above the other. However, only the topmost layer is theclip that plays. The topmost clip always has priority; you can’t “mix it” with a clip
on a lower level, although you can use audio fades on the uppermost clips tofade them in from or out to a lower clip.

368

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio5

In the media pool, select the Video bin in the Dialogue Clips bin and double-click theclip A_S8_T2 WS Agent J to open it in the source viewer.

This clip has a blue duration marker locating the alternative take of the line of dialogue.
6

Choose Mark > Set In and Out from Duration Marker to add the required In and
Out points.

7

Press Option-/ (slash) on macOS or Alt-/ (slash) on Windows to play from the In to
Out points.
This is a clean version of the same line of dialogue.

Replacing Lines from Other Takes  

369

8

In the timeline, deselect the track source controls for A2 or press Option-Command-2(macOS) or Alt-Ctrl-2 (Windows).

9

Disable Snapping and use the source viewer Overlay button to drag the audio clip into
A1 above the existing clip (the doctor’s lines are on the first source channel).

10 Trim the new clip so it starts at the waveform where the doctor begins speaking andalign it with the beginning of the original clip on the track layer below.

11 Press / (slash) to preview the new line of dialogue.
The clap has vanished!

370

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio12 Click and drag the original dialogue clip up and above the new clip to swap their orderin the track layers.

TIP Hold Shift when changing the layer order of the clips to prevent either
moving horizontally in the timeline.

13 Press / (slash) again to preview the original take.
14 Change the order again so the new take sits above the old take on the track layers.
You’ll probably get away with using the audio from this different take, as the actressplaying the doctor delivered her lines at roughly the same speed and it’s doubtful
anyone would ever spot a discrepancy between her lip movements and the words
spoken. However, if you look closely, the waveforms of the uppermost layer don’t fullyalign with the original take’s audio. But you can easily fix this by adjusting the speed of
the audio clip.
15 Right-click the topmost audio clip and choose Change Clip Speed.
16 Change the speed to 115%. Ensure that Ripple Timeline is not selected but Pitch
Correction is selected and click OK.

Replacing Lines from Other Takes  

371

NOTE You can, of course, also use the Speed Change controls in the Audio tabin the Inspector to change the speed of the audio clip using the same options.

The speed of the audio clip is increased, and the audio pitch is automatically adjusted
so the doctor’s new audio is now in near-perfect sync, and she doesn’t sound like she’s
inhaled helium.

TIP You can use the Elastic Wave function in the Fairlight page to manually
adjust the speed of an audio clip and create variable speed adjustments foraudio clips without adjusting the pitch of the audio clip. For more information,
see The Fairlight Audio Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18.

17 Choose Timeline > Flatten Audio Track Layers to remove the unwanted take fromthe timeline.
18 Trim any excess audio from the newly added clip, and then choose View > Show Audio
Track Layers to hide the track layers.
19 Select the Full Extent Zoom and adjust the audio track heights so you can see all theaudio tracks in the timeline again.

Audio track layers are a useful feature of working with audio in DaVinci Resolve timelines.
They can be used for many different things, such as quickly switching between different
voiceover takes or auditioning different music cues for a scene. Used this way, they arevery similar to using the Take Selector, which cannot be enabled for audio-only clips.

372

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioBalancing the Dialogue Clips
Of the three general types of audio, probably the most important one is dialogue: if youraudience cannot hear what’s being said, they will not be able to follow the story, whether
that is the story told in a drama scene such as in this lesson or through an interview,
as with the Organ Mountain Outfitters footage you edited in previous lessons. Think
about how much information is communicated in what the people onscreen are saying.
The only time when dialogue is not the most important element of the soundtrack isfor a video that is cut entirely to music (such as the Jitterbug Riot footage in Lesson 5,“Multicamera Editing”) or when the dialogue is purposefully meant to be inaudible.
With that in mind, it’s not surprising to learn that, as when starting to edit a piece together,dialogue is usually the best place to start when it comes to the audio mixing process.
1

Play the timeline again, and this time listen carefully to the dialogue clips.
The audio for this scene has been recorded quite well, and the audio editing means
just the parts of the clips with spoken words are included. However, you need to set all
the dialogue clips to the same general level.

2

At the top right of the interface, click the Mixer button.

The edit page audio mixer opens to the right of the timeline. If you don’t see the mixer
at full width, drag the left edge of the mixer to the left in order to reveal all the controls.

TIP If you need more space along the bottom of the interface for the timeline
and the mixer, you can use the Shrink button to the left of the Media Poolbutton in the interface to close the Index and use a half-height media pool.

Balancing the Dialogue Clips

373

The mixer contains a strip of controls for each audio track in your timeline, and an
additional strip for the master control for the entire timeline, currently called Bus 1. In
DaVinci Resolve, each audio clip can be adjusted within the track, as you’ve been doing
so far. Each track can then be further adjusted by using the mixer before it is passed
to the output bus. It is the output from Bus 1 that you hear playing through yourspeakers or headphones. Any adjustments made to the track controls in the mixer
affect any clips on that track.
3

Play the timeline once more, and this time keep an eye on the audio levels for eachtrack as the clips play.
You should see that the levels for Doctor K’s audio clips are a lot lower than thoseof Agent J.

At this point, you might be tempted to reach for the audio level control for the track,
but you first need to adjust the clip levels as much as you can; just because one clip is
at one level doesn’t mean that they all are!
4

Play the first dialogue clip, which is on track A1, and look at the levels displayed in the
track’s control strip in the mixer.

374

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioThe clip’s levels barely peak above -20 dBFS! This clip is a good candidate for increased
audio levels.
5

Increase the volume of the clip in the timeline until the tooltip reads about +8 dB andplay the clip once more.

TIP Hold Shift when adjusting the volume of the clip for more precision.

The volume of the clip has increased and now sits in the yellow region of the tracklevel, peaking around -15 dBFS and sounds much better compared to the following
clip of Agent J.

Balancing the Dialogue Clips

375

How Much Should You Adjust Your Clip’s Audio Levels?
The mixer in DaVinci Resolve also gives you a good indication as to where youraudio levels should be set, with each meter showing a range of levels color-codedin green, yellow, or red. For your current purposes, it really doesn’t matter whatlevel you choose as long as you are consistent—that is, you set the volume for theclips on the same track to the same level.
A good guide for dialogue levels is to set them within the yellow area, which is
between -18 dBFS and -8 dBFS on the audio mixer. Quiet, softly spoken lines might
be toward the bottom end of this range, and shouted lines will be toward thehigher end, with normal dialogue levels being set around -12 dBFS.

Normalizing Audio Levels
At this point, you now need to balance all the dialogue clips so they play at a similar level.
Remember, your audience must clearly hear each line of dialogue. You can, however,
employ normalization across the dialogue clips to help with this process. It’s not a “Get
Out of Jail Free” card in that it doesn’t necessarily fix all your audio levels, but it can help
streamline the process on many occasions.
1

Select all the clips on the first three audio tracks, A1, A2, and A3.

2

Right-click any of the selected clips and choose Normalize Audio Levels.
The Normalize Audio Levels window appears.

3

Leave the Normalization Mode set to Sample Peak Program, leave the Target Level set
to -9 dBFS but change the Set Level option to Independent. Click Normalize.

376

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioThe selected audio clips have their volume adjusted as indicated by the change in the
waveforms. Notice how the waveforms for the different clips are now all similar sizes,
indicating that they are roughly the same level.

4

Once more, play the timeline and see the change in the audio levels in the mixer.
Now all the levels seem to be playing at a much more consistent level. However, as
mentioned earlier, the process of normalizing the audio levels isn’t a fix in itself; it justgets you in the ballpark. You now need to go through and ensure that the clips’ levels
are where you want them.

5Play the third clip on A1. This is where the doctor mutters to her assistant.
The clip has been raised to the level you specified when you normalized the clips,
but it’s totally unsuitable for this particular clip.

Balancing the Dialogue Clips

377

6

Lower the clip’s volume curve to about 12 dB, which puts the clip at the lower values ofthe yellow target area on the meters.

You can always refine the levels further by adding keyframes.
7

As the clip is still a little noisy at the end, add a couple of keyframes after the doctor
has delivered her line by Option-clicking (macOS) or Alt-clicking (Windows) the volume
curve and lowering the portion after the second keyframe to about 4 dB to push therustling noises back into the overall mix.

Continue to balance each of the dialogue clips across the first three tracks so they are
consistent throughout the scene.

378

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioIntroducing the Dialogue Leveler
DaVinci Resolve 18.1 introduced a new audio track control to help smooth out
dialogue audio levels that may be a bit too low or too high. Like Normalization, theDialogue Leveler is not a fix in itself but can help with the often tedious need toadjust multiple clips’ levels using numerous keyframes.
Ideally used as part of the Fairlight page’s more comprehensive mixing
environment, where it is available as a Fairlight FX in the mixer, the Dialogue
Leveler is also available in the edit page by opening the Inspector and clicking theaudio track header in the timeline.
The Dialogue Leveler has some self-explanatory controls for lifting soft portions
and reducing loud portions of the dialogue, together with a slider to adjust overall
output gain.

Again, like the Normalization process, the Dialogue Leveler is not a solution forwrong audio levels. Instead, think of it as a way of bringing your dialogue levels
into line.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the Timelines
bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 08/
Timelines and select SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX CATCHUP 1.drt and click Open.

Balancing the Dialogue Clips

379

Enhancing the Scene
Now that the dialogue has been repaired and balanced, it’s time to turn your attention
to the sound design for this scene. In the script, this scene is set during a break at a busy
technology conference. While the Atmosphere wild sound clip on A6 offers some senseof the other people in this room, it’s supposed to be in a room full of people chatting,and there’s a distinct lack of atmosphere, which you will now inject. To begin with, you’ll
duplicate the Atmosphere wild sound clip to increase the number of people in the room.
1

Right-click on the timeline header controls for A6 and choose Add Track > Mono.
A new A7 audio track is added to the timeline, below the A6.

NOTE You can always reposition a track’s position in the timeline by rightclicking the track header and choosing Move Track Up or Move Track Down, as
appropriate. Alternatively, you can use the Tracks Index panel to freely dragaudio tracks to a different order.

2

In the mixer, double-click the new Audio 7 track name and type ATMOS to rename
the track.

380

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio3

In the timeline, right-click the track header for A7 and choose Change Track Color >Chocolate.

4

Press and hold the Option key (macOS) or the Alt key (Windows), select the
Atmosphere wild sound clip in A6, and drag a copy of the clip into A7.

TIP If you don’t have snapping enabled before you start duplicating theclip, press and hold Shift together with the above step before you release
the mouse to ensure that you constrain the horizontal position of the clip in
the timeline.

Listen to the change this makes. Maybe you’ll agree that it doesn’t sound as though
you’ve increased the amount of people in the crowd—rather, they are just louder.

Enhancing the Scene

381

5

Press T to activate Trim Edit mode and slip one of the two Atmosphere wild soundclips by about -10 seconds.

6

Finally, right-click the Atmosphere wild sound clip in A7 and choose Change Clip
Speed. Change the Speed to 90%, uncheck the Pitch Correction option, and click
Change, before reviewing the changes.

You’re getting there. By offsetting the timing and adjusting the speed and pitch of
one of the clips, it sounds as though there are so many more people in the room now,even though only a handful of people are actually onscreen. Congratulations! You haveincreased the crowd size without having to pay for additional actors. The producer
will be pleased.

Panning Tracks in Acoustic Space  Pan controls enable you to choose where a track’s audio is placed within a panoramic
sound field. They enable you to adjust the spatial arrangement of audio elements just asa cinematographer composes the visuals of a shot. Mono tracks can be precisely locatedto sound as if they come from an offscreen source or from somewhere within the frame.
DaVinci Resolve includes advanced pan controls in the mixer that support both 2D (stereo)
and 3D (surround) audio placement.
In this exercise, you’ll use the pan controls in the mixer to “widen” the audio from theatmos tracks so they don’t “crowd” the dialogue tracks.

382

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioNOTE You are advised to use headphones for this panning exercise to fully
appreciate the changes you will make.

1

Return your playhead to the start of the scene and play again, listening carefully
with your eyes closed. Can you pinpoint where the dialogue and atmos audio is all
coming from?
Your eyes may tell you where things are onscreen, but when you close them everything
seems to be coming from directly in front of you. Of course, the crowd should be all
around you, with only the dialogue from the actors coming from directly ahead.
Because the audio is playing from a series of mono tracks, the sound from all thesetracks is playing equally from both output channels in the timeline, and therefore
equally from both of your speakers. This makes them sound centered within thesound environment.

2

Continue playing the scene and, using the mixer’s Pan controls, drag the blue handle
for the A6 track to the upper-left corner of the panning control in the control strip.

Panning Tracks in Acoustic Space  

383

Can you hear the change? It sounds like you’re pushing part of the crowd to the edgeof the room.
3

Drag the A7 track’s blue panning handle to the upper-right corner of the control.

4Play the timeline from the beginning to hear the atmos tracks panned to the far left
and right of the acoustic space.
In just a matter of seconds, you filled the far reaches of the acoustic space with theatmos, making the crowd seem to spread out within a much larger room. Crucially,
you’ve also moved the sound of the crowd away from the actors’ audio tracks, thereby
making it easier to hear the all-important dialogue.

TIP For more control over a track’s pan, double-click the Pan control inthe mixer.

384

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio5

In the mixer, change the name of the A6 and A7 tracks to ATMOS-L and ATMOS-R,
respectively.

When you’re finished panning tracks to compose the acoustic space within your scene,
you can move on to finessing the levels of those tracks. In audio post-production, volume
control is an ongoing process right up until you output the final mix.

Increasing the Audience
To practice the above steps, repeat the process on the opening applause clip:
1

Create a mono track below the existing STAGE track. Rename this track STAGE-R andcolor code it Teal to match the A5 track.

2

Rename the STAGE track STAGE-L.

3

Duplicate the audio of the 01_Outro shot from previous scene clip to this new track.

4

Slip the applause audio of one of the clips and adjust the track pan so that theapplause fills the room.

5

Try adjusting the speed of one of the applause clips, with or without pitch correction.

Panning Tracks in Acoustic Space  

385

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the Timelines
bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 08/
Timelines and select SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX CATCHUP 2.drt and click Open.

Adding More Atmosphere
The script for this scene calls for the FBI agents to interrupt the doctor at a high-browconference with her colleagues. Now that you have increased the number of people inattendance, it’s time to add a little more nuance to the scene.
1

Select the Foley bin in the media pool.

NOTE In filmmaking parlance, foley is the term used for any audio added to afilm’s soundtrack that recreates diegetic sounds, such as footsteps on different
surfaces, traffic sounds, the rustle of clothing, or the swish of a lightsaber.
Named after Jack Foley, the pioneer of recording and synchronizing such
“everyday” sounds for films, it also gives rise to the terms foley studio, wheresuch sounds are often created and recorded, and foley artist, the person who
actually performs and/or records the sounds.

This bin contains the original Atmosphere wild sound clip, together with anotheraudio clip, Piano dry.aif.

386

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio2

Double-click the Piano dry.aif clip to load it in the source viewer and play the clip tolisten to it.

This clip is a stereo recording of a piano being played in a studio. A portion of the clip
has already been marked with In and Out points. You will edit this clip into a new track
to add to the overall ambience of the scene, as if there were a pianist somewhere
offscreen tinkling the ivories for the delight of the conference attendees.
3

In the timeline, right-click the track header for A8, the ATMOS-R track, and choose Add
Track > Stereo.

Adding More Atmosphere387

A new, stereo audio track is added to the timeline and the mixer, labeled A9.

NOTE Because you’re adding a stereo clip to this timeline, it makes sense thatit should be added to a stereo track to preserve the stereo effect in the mix. If
you add a stereo clip to a mono track, only the first of the two stereo channels
are used, and if you add a mono clip to a stereo track, the mono audio will only
be played out of the first channel as you experienced briefly in Lesson 3, “Fine
Cutting an Interview.” Incorrectly created track types can be adjusted by rightclicking the track header and choosing Change Track Type To, and incorrect
audio configurations for clips can be adjusted in Clip Attributes.

4388

In the mixer, change the name of the new A9 track to PIANO.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio5

In the timeline, change the A9 track color to Tan and click the Track Destination Control
to target the new track.

NOTE Default keyboard shortcuts exist to quickly target any of the first eight
video or audio tracks in the timeline (viewable by choosing Timeline > Track
Destination Selection). For any track numbers above this, it’s often easier totarget them by clicking with the mouse.

You’ll now use the duration of the clip on either of the ATMOS tracks to quickly mark aduration for your piano audio.
6

Select the clip on the A8 track and choose Mark > Mark Selection or press Shift-A.

In and Out points are added to the timeline for the duration of the selected clip.

Adding More Atmosphere

389

7

Make an Overwrite edit.

8

Increase the size of the A9 track so you can see the waveform clearly and lower the
Piano clip’s volume by 25 dB to bring its level down to around the same level as theatmos audio (using the levels displayed for A9 in the mixer as a guide).

9

Using the Fade handles, add a short ten-frame fade at the start of the Piano clip anda 2-second fade at the end, changing the curve of the fade-out to create a subtle
logarithmic fade for the piano.

Perfect. Now your conference crowd has some entertainment to listen to while the doctor
and the FBI agents discuss the worsening situation.

390

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioFilling the RoomThe piano has added some much-needed ambiance to the scene, but it still feels a little dry,since it was recorded in a sound studio with lots of foam cones on the wall that reduced any
unwanted sound reflections from the studio walls. This is ideal for the foley clips because you
can then add your own reverb to the audio using the built-in Fairlight FX to suit the scene.
1

Click the Effects Library and select Fairlight FX from the Audio FX category and locate
the Reverb effect.

2

Drag the Reverb effect to the A9 track header in the timeline.

Adding More Atmosphere

391

The Reverb FX controls window opens automatically.

3

From the presets pop-up menu in the top-left of the controls window, choose theConcert Hall preset.

4

Solo track A9 and play back the scene to hear the newly created sound reflections of
the piano bouncing around the room.

TIP Use the red active switch in the top-left of the Reverb controls to disableand enable the effect to hear the audio clip with and without the effect applied.

5

Close the Reverb effect controls window and un-solo the A9 track.

NOTE In the edit page, to access the controls for an audio effect applied toa track, click the track header in the timeline and open the Effects tab in the
Inspector.

Adding an effect to a track rather than individual clips is an easy way to make sure thatany clips on any part of the track will have the reverb applied. You can tell if a track has aneffect applied to it by the FX badge in the track header in the timeline and at the top of the
track’s controls in the mixer.

392

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioCreating a Radio Effect
Now that you have some idea of the sort of work that goes into a scene’s sound design,it’s time to turn your attention to adjusting the audio that is supposedly coming from theagents’ radios. In this case, you’ll apply some adjustments to the clips’ EQ before changing
the track’s level for the mix.
1

Open the Markers Index and double-click the thumbnail for the first marker inthe timeline.

2

Adjust the timeline zoom so that you can clearly see at least the first three clips on
the A4 track.

3

In either the timeline track header or the Tracks Index, click the A4 Mute button to
unmute the track and click the A4 Solo button to solo the same track.

Creating a Radio Effect

393

4

Press / (slash) to play around the marker.
This part of the timeline has a sound effect at the beginning and end of the line fromthe radio operator to indicate the radios receiving a signal. The actual lines from theradio operator were spoken by an actor and recorded directly into Resolve. However,as you did with the piano clip, you’ll need to manipulate the audio to make it sound as
though you’re hearing this over a radio rather than through a studio microphone.

NOTE See The Fairlight Audio Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18 for more information
on recording audio using the Fairlight page.

5

In the timeline, select the Dispatch Recording.wav clip on A4.

6

Open the Inspector, click the Audio tab, and scroll down until you see theEqualizer controls.

394

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioIn DaVinci Resolve, each audio clip has a set of controls that includes a four-band
equalizer that can be used for boosting or attenuating (reducing) different ranges offrequencies of the clip.
7

Enable the Equalizer for the selected clip.

8

In the Audio Inspector, move the Band 1 control right to about 650 Hz to cut the lower
frequencies of this clip.

9

Move the Band 4 control to the left to around 1.5 kHz to cut the higher-end
frequencies of the voice.

These changes limit the range of frequencies in the voice to just the midrange, making
the clip sound a little tinny and artificial.

Creating a Radio Effect395

10 Drag the Band 3 control to the area between the Band 1 and 4 controls (around 1 kHz)and then drag it upward by around +10 dB.

This boosts the 1 kHz frequencies by 10 dB.
11 Play back the clip to review the changes you’ve made.
You can hear how the voice actor’s dialogue has lost the warmth of the lower
frequencies and the brightness of the upper frequencies, making it seem like it’semanating from a radio’s tinny loudspeaker.

396

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioCopying and Pasting EQ
Having adjusted the frequencies of this first line of radio dialogue, you now need to apply
the same adjustments to the second line. Just as you’ve done in previous exercises withvideo clips, you can copy and paste attributes between audio clips.
1

Select the Dispatch Recording.wav to which you’ve applied the EQ and choose Edit >Copy or press Command-C (macOS) or Ctrl-C (Windows).

2

Select the second line of dialogue in A4 (the 5th clip in the track) and choose Edit >Paste Attributes or press Option-V (macOS) or Alt-V (Windows).

3

In the Paste Attributes window, select the Equalizer settings and click Apply.

The EQ settings from the first line of dialogue are applied to the second lineof dialogue.
4

Place your timeline playhead over the second line of radio dialogue and press / (slash)to hear the change.

Creating a Radio Effect397

Setting Track Levels
The radio dialogue is coming along nicely, but now you need to listen to it alongside theother dialogue tracks in this scene. In this case, the radio dialogue doesn’t need to beheard clearly; it’s more to add a sense of urgency to the FBI agents’ enquiries.
1

Return your timeline playhead to the first red marker.

2

Click the Solo button for A4 to un-solo the track.

3

Press / (slash) to preview the line of radio dialogue as part of the overall sound design.
The radio dialogue is in the mix, but it’s competing with the actual dialogue youneed the audience to focus on, so you need to attenuate (lower) its levels so that it’sless intrusive.
However, the dialogue clips are actually just two elements of the radio track, with theother being the clicking sounds of the radio connecting and disconnecting. If you wereto adjust the level of the dialogue clips themselves, you’d also need to lower each of
the clicking sounds too. This is why it’s now easier to adjust the level for all of track A4.

4398

In the mixer, use the Level slider to lower the audio levels for A4 by about -8 dB.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioTIP You can see the relative adjustments you’re making to the track’s levels at the
top of the slider controls.

5

Once you’ve made your change, press / (slash) once more to hear the results.

The radio dialogue is now better integrated into the scene without you having to adjusteach of the clips’ levels individually. This also demonstrates the advantages of having
tracks dedicated to specific types of audio and how you can then use the mixer’s tracklevels to further refine the levels for any track once the individual clips have beencorrectly balanced.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the Timelines
bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 08/
Timelines and select SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX CATCHUP 3.drt and click Open.

Simplifying the Mix
Now it’s time to think about how each track needs to be adjusted in the mixer. Because you
already know that each of the dialogue clips is at the right levels, you shouldn’t need to doa lot to those tracks. However, you might need to make further adjustments to each of theeffects tracks—specifically, the ATMOS and PIANO tracks: A7, A8, and A9. While this is stilla relatively simple scene with a limited number of tracks, it can still be advantageous tosimplify this process by creating additional buses.
Buses provide a way in which you can add a further level of control to your audio mixing byrouting different tracks through a separate control strip in the mixer, allowing you to adjust
the output levels of those routed tracks with one set of controls.
To explore this process, you will create three additional buses for this scene’s dialogue,
diegetic effects and non-diegetic music elements.

Simplifying the Mix

399

TIP You can create up to a total of 256 stereo buses (or 512 mono buses), which
can then be used to control the audio from multiple tracks, vastly simplifying theprocess of mixing very complex timelines.

1

Choose Fairlight > Bus Format.
The Bus Format window opens, displaying the default bus for the timeline. This bus isused for the audio output of the entire timeline and is set to stereo by default.

Renaming the buses so you know what they are being used for is good practice.

400

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio2

Click the Name field for Bus 1 and change its name to STEREO MAIN.

NOTE Even though you’re on the edit page, you can still access some Fairlightfeatures directly through the Fairlight menu. However, many options will be
unavailable unless you’re on the Fairlight page itself.

3

Click Add Bus to add a new bus call Bus 2 to this timeline.
You’ll use this new bus for adjusting all the dialogue tracks in the timeline.

Simplifying the Mix

401

4

Change the name of Bus 2 to DIALOGUE.

NOTE Short names for tracks are often useful since they’re easier to read in
the mixer or the track headers.

5

Leave the Format set to mono (this is for dialogue, after all) but change the color
to Orange.

NOTE Because a mixer bus doesn’t contain any audio clips, changing its
color really only has the benefit of identifying it in the mixer or the Bus Assign
window (as you’ll see later).

You now need to add two additional buses for the diegetic effects, and the nondiegetic effects and music.

402

6

Click the Add Bus button twice more to add a Bus 3 and Bus 4.

7

Change the name of Bus 3 to SFX and change the name of Bus 4 to MUSIC.

8

Change the format of both buses to Stereo.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio9

Change the color of the SFX bus to Lime and the color of the Music bus to Teal.

10 Click OK to save the changes and close the Bus Format window.
11 In the mixer, drag the dividing area next to the Bus 1 channel strip to reveal thecontrols for each of the buses.

Simplifying the Mix

403

TIP You can change the order of the Bus control strips in the mixer by changing
the order of the buses in the Bus Format window.

Assigning Tracks to Buses
You have successfully created three additional buses for this timeline. However, now you
need to route the audio for each of the tracks to the appropriate bus, and then from eachbus onward to the Stereo Main bus.
1

Choose Fairlight > Bus Assign to open the Bus Assign window.

The Bus Assign window is used to view and change the destination of the audio once
it leaves a track. By default, all audio tracks are automatically routed directly to Bus 1,
abbreviated as B1o (Bus 1 out). This is ultimately what you are listening to when thetimeline plays.
2404

In the Busses area, select the B1:STEREO MAIN Out and click Un-Assign All.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioNow the tracks are no longer assigned to any destination, so you won’t be able to hearthem because they’re no longer being sent to the B1 output bus.
3

In the Busses section at the top of the Bus Assign window, click the B2:DIALOGUE Out
bus to select it.

4

In the Available Tracks area, click each of the dialogue tracks in your timeline: Doctor K,
Agent J, Assistant, and Radio.

B2o (Bus 2 out) appears below the name of each track to identify which bus it is being
routed to.

NOTE Tracks can be sent to multiple buses simultaneously, so they might havemore than one destination set.

5

In the Busses section, click the B3:SFX Out button to select the SFX bus.

6

Click the tracks that contain diegetic audio: STAGE-L, STAGE-R, WALLA-L, WALLA-R, andPIANO to route them to B3o.

Simplifying the Mix

405

7

Click the B4: MUSIC Out bus to select the final bus for non-diegetic effects and music,
and then click the two SFX tracks and the MUSIC tracks to assign them to B4o.

TIP To remove a track from a specific bus, click the bus from the Available
Tracks section of the Bus Assign window, and then click the track. Tracks
already assigned to the selected bus will be removed.

Lastly, you still won’t hear anything from your timeline unless you route the buses
themselves to the stereo bus you’re using as the main output.
8

In the Busses section, click the B1:STEREO MAIN Out button, and then click the
DIALOGUE, SFX, and MUSIC buttons in the Available Tracks section to route them to B1o.

NOTE You cannot route a bus to itself, so you’ll be unable to select the STEREO
MAIN track with the B1 STEREO MAIN Out bus also selected.

9406Once you have the buses correctly routed as in the preceding image, click Close.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioMixing with the Mixer
Wow! It might seem like a lot of hard work, but now everything will start to pay off since it’s
now easier to mix the audio for the scene just by using the controls for each of the buses.
1

In the mixer, unmute A10, A11, and A12.

TIP Shift-clicking the Mute button in the timeline track controls for any muted
track will unmute all currently muted tracks.

2

Play through the timeline from the beginning, listening to the various elements inthe soundtrack.
What are your ears telling you? Most likely, you’ll identify that the sound effects andmusic toward the end are far too loud!

3

Play the timeline again, and this time use the Music bus slider to bring the level of themusic down by about 10 dB (or whatever level you think is suitable that you can hear
the dialogue at the scene’s climax).

4

Using the same technique, adjust the level of the SFX bus to reduce the sounds of theapplause, atmos, and piano tracks together (if in doubt, try about -6 dB).

As you can see (and hear), using the buses has made it so much easier to mix the audio
for the scene. What’s more, if you need any greater degree of control (for instance, you
might think that the radio dialogue track needs further changes), then you can always
adjust the level of a specific track, or you can even go back into the clips themselves
and further refine their individual levels if needed!
Now that you’ve seen the power of buses in DaVinci Resolve, mixing the audio in yourtimeline should be so much easier.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next step, select the Timelines
bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 08/
Timelines and select SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX CATCHUP 4.drt and click Open.

Mixing with the Mixer

407

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  
A common requirement for many editors responsible for a film’s audio is to set up thetimeline for delivering different audio mixes. In the final exercise in this lesson, you’ll create
two additional buses for the SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX timeline: the first is for delivering
an M&E (music and effects) version of the soundtrack, and the second will enable you todeliver a 5.1 surround-sound mix of the same soundtrack!
You’ll start by creating two additional buses that you will use for each of the mixes.
1

Choose Fairlight > Bus Format to reopen the Bus Format window containing thetimeline’s current buses.

408

2

Click Add Bus twice to add two additional buses: Bus 5 and Bus 6.

3

Change the name of Bus 5 to M&E, the format to Stereo, and the color to Purple.

4

Change the name for Bus 6 to SURROUND, the format to 5.1, and the color to Violet.

5

Drag the M&E bus so that it’s arranged below the STEREO MAIN bus.

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio6

Drag the SURROUND bus to below the M&E bus.

TIP The arrangement of the buses in the Bus Format window reflects theorder of the controls shown in the mixer, so this is a good practice to keep
similar-use buses together.

7

Click OK to confirm your changes.

8

Expand the mixer so you can see all the controls.

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

409

The new buses appear in the mixer but, as before, nothing is being routed to them.

9

Choose Fairlight > Bus Assign to reopen the Bus Assign window.

10 In the Busses section, select the B5:M&E Out bus.

To create the M&E output for this bus, all you need to do is route the SFX and Music
buses you created earlier, rather than the individual tracks.

410

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio11 In the Available Tracks section, select the SFX and MUSIC, so both buses are now being
routed to the B1o and B5o buses.

Next, you’ll need to route the full mix to the SURROUND bus.
12 Click to select the B6:SURROUND Out bus from the Busses section.

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

411

13 From the Tracks section, click the DIALOGUE, SFX, and MUSIC tracks to route thosebuses to B6o.

14 Once you have the routing set as in the preceding image, click Close to close the Bus
Assign window.

Monitoring the Different Buses
To listen to the different mixes from the same timeline, you just need to change the bus
you’re listening to.
1

Return your playhead to the start of the timeline and begin playing the scene.

2

From the Control Room pop-up menu above the mixer, select the M&E bus.

This is the soundtrack, minus the dialogue tracks.

412

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio3

Select the DIALOGUE bus from the Control Room pop-up menu.

You’re now listening to just the dialogue bus for this scene.
4

Change the Control Room to the SURROUND bus.

You’re now listening to the same mix play as a surround mix. Unfortunately, unless
you have a surround system attached to your system and set up correctly for Resolve
to use, you won’t hear any change, but you can see the meters moving in the mixer.
However, you’ll need to make some further changes to how the audio is handled within
the timeline since three channels in the 5.1 main are not currently being used.

This is because the buses for the effects and music are both stereo.
5

Select Fairlight > Bus Format to reopen the Bus Format window.

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

413

6

Change the format for the SFX bus and the MUSIC buses to 5.1 and click OK.

By changing the buses from stereo to 5.1, it now means that any audio using thesurround panners will have the audio correctly routed.
7

In the mixer, adjust the pan for the STAGE-L, STAGE-R, ATMOS-L and ATMOS-R tracks
so they are midway between the front and rear speaker channels and then play thetimeline again.

414

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioNow you can see that the two rear channels of the 5.1 main are being used (even if you
can’t actually hear them.

8

Drag the blue handle for the PIANO track to the bottom of the pan controls so that it
will now only play out of the rear speakers.

For anyone listening in 5.1, it will now sound as though the piano player isbehind them.
9

Double-click the A10 SFX track’s pan controls.

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

415

The A10 pan controls open in a separate, larger window.

10 Drag the blue control into the center of the pan window so the Front/Back controls are
set to C (for center).
11 In the Boom settings, click On to send audio to the subwoofer channel and set thelevel to -20.

416

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing Audio12 Close the Audio Pan - SFX window.
The mixer’s pan controls update to show the change you’ve just made.

13 Repeat the previous steps for the A11 and A12 tracks.

14 Play the timeline once more to see how the channels in the SURROUND bus are now
being fully used.

Using Buses for Alternative Mixes  

417

15 Return the Control Room pop-up menu to STEREO MAIN for the full stereo mix.

NOTE If you need to catch up before moving to the next lesson, select theTimelines bin and choose File > Import > Timeline, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/
Lesson 08/Timelines and select SYNC SCENE FINAL MIX CATCHUPFINISHED.drt and click Open.

Congratulations! You just completed some high-end professional audio post-production
from the comfort of your own computer workstation. Hopefully, this lesson has opened
your eyes (and ears) to the wonderful, yet often underappreciated, world of audio postproduction, as well as the sophisticated audio tools and configurations available asstandard in DaVinci Resolve.
More information on working with audio in DaVinci Resolve is available in The Fairlight
Audio Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18.

418

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioLesson Review
1

True or false? Normalizing audio levels is a quick way of ensuring that all your audio
is at the correct level.

2

True or false? You can change the speed of an audio clip in the edit page.

3

True or false? You can only mute or solo a track from the track header controls in
the timeline.

4

Which window allows you to add and remove different buses?
a) Bus Assignb) Bus Formatc) Audio Mixer

5

True or false? Fairlight FX must be applied in the Fairlight page.

Lesson Review

419

Answers
1

False. Normalizing audio will adjust the level of a clip so that the peak is at the levelspecified.

2

True. To adjust the speed of any audio clip, you can use the Speed Change controls in
the Audio tab in the Inspector.

3

False. You can also use the same controls in the mixer or the Tracks Index.

4b) The Bus Format window allows you to add, change, and remove buses.

5

False. Fairlight FX are available in the Effects Library in the cut, edit, andFairlight pages.

420

Lesson 8

Editing and Mixing AudioLesson 9

Delivering Projects

In Lesson 2, you used the Quick Exportfunction to output a single videoTime

file suitable for uploading to a social

This lesson takes approximately
45 minutes to complete.

media or video sharing site. The Quick

Goals

Export window is very useful as a wayof generating a file that you can use
either as a final deliverable or simply as
a way of showing the director or client
your current progress on an edit withthe fewest number of mouse clicks.
However, if you want more control overyour output files, as well as the ability

Preparing the Projects

422

Reformatting a Timeline
for Different Aspect Ratios

424

Reframing Shots

430

Smart Reframe(Studio Version Only)

435

Customizing Deliver Page Presets 438
Exporting AAF for Pro Tools

441

the deliver page is the place to conduct

Adding Subtitles

444

your business.

Importing Subtitle Files

448

Adjusting Subtitles

450

Styling Subtitles

451

well as how to include subtitles andExporting with Subtitles

455

different audio tracks and buses inExporting Audio Tracks

457

your final output.

Changing and Rendering
Jobs from Multiple Projects

460

Media Managing Timelines

467

Lesson Review

471

to batch process multiple files, thenThis lesson will shed some light on how
to customize your export options, asPreparing the Projects
For this lesson, you’ll use three different projects that you have previously worked on
to explore the various options that DaVinci Resolve provides for delivering projects in avariety of formats. You’ll begin by importing all three projects into a separate folder in
the Project Manager.

422

1

Launch DaVinci Resolve and, in the Project Manager, click Add Folder.

2

In the Create New Folder window, type Delivery, and then click Create.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

A new folder called Delivery is created in the Project Manager.

3

Double-click the Delivery folder to open it.

TIP You can use the folder path in the top left of the Project Manager(Projects/DELIVERY) to navigate back out of this folder.

4

Open a new Finder window (macOS) or Explorer window (Windows) and navigate to
R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 09.
This folder contains several files that you will use throughout this lesson.

5

Select the three DaVinci Resolve Project files (OMO PROMO DELIVERY.drp,
WTTP DELIVERY.drp, and SYNC SCENE DELIVERY.drp) and drag them directly into
the Project Manager window.

Preparing the Projects

423

Each of the projects is imported into the Project Manager. You’re now ready tocontinue with the lesson.

Reformatting a Timeline
for Different Aspect Ratios
While most modern video cameras still shoot traditional 16:9 aspect video footage, that
doesn’t necessarily mean you are always required to deliver 16:9 footage. With many
videos being watched on mobile devices, many social media content creators prefer analternative aspect ratio, such as 1:1 (square formats such as those favored by Instagram)or 9:16 (vertical formats that are common on TikTok).
DaVinci Resolve allows you to customize your timeline settings for several different
aspect ratios.
In the next exercise, you’ll learn how easy it is to repurpose a timeline to fit a square
aspect ratio.
1

From the Project Manager, open the OMO PROMO DELIVERY project and relink the
media files.

2424

If necessary, choose Workspace > Reset UI Layout.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

3

From the Select Timeline dropdown menu, open the OMO PROMO timeline.

This is a finished version of the Organ Mountain Outfitter’s promo video that you edited
in Lessons 1 and 2.
4

Choose Timeline > Find Current Timeline in Media Pool.

5

With the timeline selected in the media pool, choose Edit > Duplicate Timeline andrename the duplicated timeline to OMO PROMO SQUARE.

6

Double-click to open it in the timeline.
Next, you will need to adjust the settings of this timeline for the desired aspect ratio.

Reformatting a Timeline for Different Aspect Ratios

425

7

In the media pool, right-click the OMO PROMO SQUARE timeline and choose Timelines >Timeline Settings.

The Timeline Settings window appears. As you can see from the grayed-out Format,
Monitor, and Output tabs, this timeline is using the timeline format for this project as
set in the Project Settings.

426

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

8Uncheck the Use Project Settings option.

9

In the Timeline Resolution dropdown menu, choose the 1080 x 1080 HD Square option.

TIP DaVinci Resolve contains presets for common timeline format resolutions,but you’re free to choose a custom timeline resolution by choosing
Custom from the preset menu and specifying the horizontal and verticalresolutions in the For Processing boxes. For vertical resolutions, simply checkthe “Use vertical resolution” checkbox to invert the current horizontal andvertical values.

Reformatting a Timeline for Different Aspect Ratios

427

10 Click OK to update the timeline settings for this timeline.
The timeline viewer shows the updated resolution. However, it has simply letterboxed
the 16:9 footage into the square aspect ratio. The client does not want this “empty
space” above and below the video, preferring that the video completely fill the square
aspect ratio.

This is due to the fact that Resolve is resolution independent—that is, by default, it doesn’t
matter what resolution the source video is; it will always be formatted to fit the current
timeline resolution. However, you can always override this in the timeline settings.
11 Right-click the OMO PROMO SQUARE timeline in the media pool again and choose
Timeline > Timeline Settings to reopen the Timeline Settings window.

428

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

12 Change the Mismatched Resolution menu to “Scale full frame with crop” and click OK.

Now all the clips in this timeline correctly fill the 1:1 aspect ratio. However, unless the
shots were specifically filmed with repurposing to a square aspect ratio in mind, it’s
likely that not all of them will be framed correctly.

Reformatting a Timeline for Different Aspect Ratios429

Reframing Shots
Unless the director of photography (DoP) had a clear understanding that all or part of the
final film would need to be displayed in a 1:1 aspect ratio, it’s very likely that you will needto adjust the framing of some of these shots. Thankfully, you always have access to the full
picture information, even though it appears currently cropped.
1

In the square timeline, place the playhead over the second interview clip.

Because the clip was originally shot off-centered, half of Chris’s head is now
disconcertingly missing off the side of the frame.

2

Press Shift-` (grave accent) or choose View > Viewer Overlay > Transform to display theTransform overlays.

430

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

3

Hold Shift and drag the shot of Chris in the timeline viewer to center him in thesquare frame.

NOTE Alternatively, you can use the Position X parameter in the Transform
section of the Inspector if you prefer.

4Play through the next two clips on V2 and adjust the horizontal framing, if required.
While you can often get away with simply adjusting a clip’s Position X value, other shots
might be a bit more problematic.

5

Play the next clip on V2, WHITE SANDS.

Reframing Shots

431

This is one such problematic shot, since the DoP framed this shot for the 16:9 aspectratio of HD video, not considering the possible need to repurpose this shot for asquare aspect ratio, leading to the slightly awkward framing of the four friends.
6

Place the timeline playhead on the first frame of the WHITE SANDS clip and open the
Inspector.

432

7

Adjust the Position X value to about 150.000 to frame the first three friends to the left.

8

Click the Add Keyframe button for the Position values.

9

In the timeline, disable the Auto Track Selector control for V1.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

10 Press ’ (apostrophe) to jump to the last frame of the clip on V2.

NOTE Leaving the Auto Track Selector enabled for V1 would mean that
Resolve would have used the duration of the clip on V1 when you moved to thelast frame.

11 Change the Position X value to about -20.000 to frame the three friends to the right.

12 Play the shot to review the “pan” you have just created.
For a more “natural” movement to the pan, you can add a touch of smoothing to the
keyframes’ acceleration.
13 Make sure your playhead is over the WHITE SANDS clip and press [ (left square
bracket) to jump back to the first keyframe.

Reframing Shots433

14 In the Inspector, right-click the red keyframe button next to the Position values andchoose Ease Out to apply a default Bézier curve to the right of this keyframe.

15 Press ] (right square bracket) to jump to the next keyframe, right-click the red keyframe
button for the Position values, and choose Ease In to add a default Bézier curve to theleft of this keyframe.

NOTE Ease Out is available only if there is another keyframe later in the clip
and Ease In is available only if there is another keyframe earlier in the clip. If
there are other keyframes before and after the current keyframe, you will also
see the option for Ease Both. Select the clip and press Shift-C to reveal the clip’s
keyframe curve in the timeline to manually add or adjust the Bézier handles
as required.

By easing the keyframes, you apply a slightly smoother change to the animation.

434

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Smart Reframe(Studio Version Only)
NOTE The following exercise uses the Smart Reframe feature, which is available
only in DaVinci Resolve Studio. If you’re using the free version of DaVinci Resolve,
you will not have the Smart Reframe option and will need to complete thesesteps manually.

While the ability to manually add keyframes and adjust the framing of a clip is no doubt
useful, if you must do this for a large number of shots it can quickly slow down the processof preparing the video for export. If you have several shots to reframe in this manner,using the Smart Reframe feature in DaVinci Resolve 18 can be a huge timesaver.
1

In the OMO PROMO SQUARE timeline, place the playhead over the FIRE DANCER clip.

This is another shot that could do with a small amount of reframing.
2

In the Inspector, click the disclosure arrow for the Smart Reframe controls and thenclick the Reframe button.

Smart Reframe (Studio Version Only)

435

After a short analysis, the shot reframes itself, centered on the dancer!

Smart Reframe uses the DaVinci Resolve Neural Engine to analyze the clip anddetermine the best way to reframe for any given shot.
3

Select the FIRE DANCER clip in the timeline, choose Clip > Show Keyframe Editor, andclick the disclosure arrow for the Transform settings.

TIP If you can’t see the keyframes in the Keyframe Editor, zoom in on the clip in
the timeline.

The Smart Reframe function has automatically added keyframes to the Position X andY parameters in order to keep the clip framed.
You can also choose an area of interest for the Smart Reframe function to focus on.

436

4

Press Shift-C to hide the Keyframe Editor.

5

In the timeline, select the COMPUTER DESIGN clip.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

6

In the Smart Reframe controls in the Inspector, change the Object of Interest menu toReference Point.

The Reference Point area is displayed in the timeline viewer as a box.

7

Resize the Reference Point box in the timeline viewer so that it frames the T-shirt
design on the screen.

Smart Reframe (Studio Version Only)

437

8

Click the Reframe button in the Smart Reframe controls.
The Smart Reframe function now keeps the framing on the design.
As you can see, the Smart Reframe function in DaVinci Resolve Studio can save time byquickly reframing shots for you.

TIP You can select multiple timeline clips and use the Smart Reframe’s Autofeature on all of them together. Each clip will be analyzed separately for thebest results.

Customizing Deliver Page Presets
Instead of using the Quick Export feature to output this video, you’ll use the options in thedeliver page, which provide more customization and control over the final exported file.
1

Click the Deliver page button.
The square timeline opens in the deliver page, where you can assign much more
specific settings to the file you want to output.
Render Presets—Quick
access to saved presets
Render Settings—Used to customize Video,
Audio and File settings for the current preset

Clips—List of clips inthe current timeline

438

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Render Range—Marked portionof the timeline to be rendered

Render Queue—List of any
jobs ready to be rendered

Timeline—Edit
page timeline used
as referenceNOTE The Render Settings window features a list of common delivery presets.
Click the downward triangles for each preset for additional options, such as
different resolutions.

2

To export your square video for Instagram or other social media sites that utilize
square-aspect videos, select the H.264 Master preset.

3

In the Filename field, type OMO PROMO SQUARE.

TIP You can have the filename default to the current timeline name bychoosing the “Timeline name” option in the File tab.

4

For the Location, click the Browse button, and in the File Destination window thatappears, navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Output Folder, and click Save.

5

In the Video tab, check that the resolution is set to 1080 x 1080, and the frame rateis 23.976.

NOTE Unless specified, the export preset will default to the resolution andframe rate of the current timeline and, unless choosing a lower resolution thanthe current timeline, it is not recommended that you change these settings at
this point. Choosing a higher resolution than the current timeline settings will
result in a warning when you submit the job to the Render Queue that it might
result in reduced image quality.

Customizing Deliver Page Presets

439

6

Click the Audio tab and verify that the codec is AAC, the data rate is 320 Kb/s, and theoutput track is Bus 1 (which is the only bus for this timeline).

7

Click Add to Render Queue at the bottom of the Render Settings panel.

The job is added to the Render Queue as Job 1. From here, you could choose to renderout the job, but there are more jobs to add to the queue before you start the rendering.

Understanding Data Levels
In the Advanced Settings, Data Levels specifies the data range of an image basedon its source. The default Auto setting renders media at a data level appropriate
for the selected codec. Video refers to YCbCr formats that constrain to pixel data
values between 64–940 on a 10-bit system in formats using a Rec.709 video
standard. Full expands the range to the film standard of 4–1024 values, which isutilized in digital film formats such as DPX. In general, the best choice is to leavethis setting unchanged and let DaVinci Resolve choose the data level automatically.
However, if you find that your final video looks substantially darker or lighter than
it appears on your calibrated monitor, it’s possible that the data levels are being
incorrectly distributed. In that rare case, you might want to manually set the Data
Levels correctly for your intended distribution.

440

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Exporting AAF for Pro Tools
Despite Fairlight having all the tools necessary to mix and master your audio, another task
required of many editors is to send the audio to be mixed in a Pro Tools system. In thisexercise, you’ll look at using the Pro Tools export preset for doing just that.
1

Press Shift-1 to open the Project Manager.

2

Double-click the WTTP DELIVERY project. If prompted, save the current project toprevent the loss of your changes.

3

Switch to the edit page and use the Relink Media button to relink the files.
This project is a version of the Welcome to the Pantry promo you edited in Lesson 3. Youmight remember that you’d didn’t spend too much time finessing the audio for thisproject. So now you will export it in a format suitable for a Pro Tools system, where theaudio will be mixed for you.

4

Click the deliver page again, and from the Render Settings panel, scroll along andselect the Pro Tools preset.

NOTE Resolve uses the AAF (Advanced Authoring Format) to output timeline
information for Pro Tools systems.

Presets like Pro Tools don’t allow you to set a filename because you’re not renderinga single file. Instead, you’re rendering out multiple files for each of the clips in thetimeline, which in the case of the Pro Tools preset, is all the audio clips.
5

Click Browse and navigate to the R18 Editors Guide/Output Folder. Create a new folder
here called Pro Tools AAF and click Open.

Exporting AAF for Pro Tools

441

6

In the Audio tab, ensure that the codec is set to Linear PCM. This will create a series of
uncompressed .wav files for the audio clips in your timeline, as preferred by many Pro
Tools users.

7

Choose to add 12 frame handles to the media you will render.

Although you’re rendering out the audio clips in this timeline for Pro Tools, you should
also provide a video reference file for the Pro Tools operator.
8

Click the Video tab. Change the Format to QuickTime, and then ensure that the codec
is H.264, and the resolution is 1280 x 720 HD 720P (the resolution of this timeline).

It would also be useful to have Burned-in Timecode (BiTC) on the video reference clip.
9442

Choose Workspace > Data Burn-In.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

10 In the Data Burn-In window, select Record Timecode to display the timeline’s timecode.
Increase the size to about 85 and the background opacity to 80, and then close theData Burn-In window.

The Data Burn In will appear in the viewer as you make the changes.

Exporting AAF for Pro Tools

443

11 Click Add to Render Queue to add this job to the Render Queue window.

That’s two jobs now queued and ready to go. There’s just one more job to add to theRender Queue, and then you can let Resolve render all the jobs together.

Adding Subtitles
DaVinci Resolve allows you to add subtitles to your timelines in several ways. You canmanually create all your subtitles for your project, or you can import a supported subtitle file.
1

Press Shift-1 to open the Project Manager and double-click the SYNC SCENE DELIVERY
project, saving the changes to the current open project if prompted.

2

Press Shift-4 to jump to the edit page and relink the media for this project.
This project contains a finished version of the Sync scene that you’ve worked on inprevious lessons. Take a moment to reacquaint yourself with the scene and how theaudio is mixed. All that’s left for you to do is add subtitles before outputting the final
files for delivery.

444

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

3Open the Effects Library.

4

In the Effects Library, in the Titles group, locate the Subtitle title.

5

Drag the Subtitle to the timeline in the space above the video tracks and snap it to thebeginning of the timeline.

Adding Subtitles

445

A new track appears in the timeline labeled ST1 Subtitle 1, and the subtitle text
appears in the timeline viewer.

TIP You can show and hide existing subtitle tracks in the Timeline View
Options menu.

6

In the timeline, select the subtitle, and then open the Inspector.
The Inspector includes the controls for the individual subtitle captions and for theentire subtitle track.

7446

In the Caption field, highlight the word “Subtitle,” and type [applause].

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

NOTE Settings for the maximum number of characters per line and theminimum duration for each of your captions is set in the Subtitles panel of the
Project Settings window.

8

Place the timeline playhead at the start of the next timeline clip on V1 and, in the
Inspector, click the Add New button.

A new subtitle is overwritten onto the subtitle track at the current playhead position.

Adding Subtitles

447

9

Select the new subtitle and, in the Inspector, type the dialogue from the doctor for the
next clip: Oh, thank you. I’m so glad you really liked it.

10 Trim the end of the second subtitle to the end of the second clip on V1.

You can edit and trim Subtitle generators just like any other clip on your timeline.

Importing Subtitle Files
You can continue working through this timeline, adding subtitles for the different linesof dialogue. However, it’s usually much more efficient and accurate to have someone
transcribe the dialogue for you and create a subtitle file that you can import directly.

NOTE DaVinci Resolve supports the importing and exporting of .srt, .vtt, .ttml(IMSC1), and .dfxp subtitle files.

448

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

1

In the media pool, select the Subtitles bin and choose File > Import > Subtitle.

2

Navigate to R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 10/Subtitles and select the file
SYNC SUBTITLES US.srt. Click Open.
The .srt file is added to the selected bin as a subtitle clip.

3

Select the subtitle file SYNC SUBTITLES US and drag it into the timeline, so it snaps tothe green timeline marker.

All the subtitles in the .srt file are added to the Subtitle 1 track in the timeline.

Importing Subtitle Files449

Adjusting Subtitles
Subtitles clips behave just like any clip in the Resolve timeline, so you can easily adjust theirtimings as necessary.
1Move the timeline playhead to the red marker, where the doctor says, “That wouldn’t
be possible.” Play the timeline from this point to review the dialogue and subtitles.

The subtitles appear onscreen too late for the doctor’s line of dialogue. You’ll need toadjust the subtitle timing to sync it correctly.
2

Press T to enter Trim Edit mode and slide the subtitle to the left by about a second,
until it snaps to the beginning of the doctor’s audio clip on A1.

3

When you’ve finished sliding the subtitle into the correct position, press / (forward
slash) to review the change.

4

Press A to return to Selection mode.

You can also trim and roll trim each of the subtitles using the Selection mode, as well as cut
each subtitle into shorter clips using the Blade Edit mode and keyboard shortcuts.

450

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Styling Subtitles
Just as with any other title in Resolve, subtitles have many parameters that allow you toadjust the style and position of your subtitle text. One common style applied to subtitles
is a semi-transparent box behind the text to help it stand out against video with asimilar brightness.
1

Move your playhead to the start of the last subtitle in your timeline.
The end of the line appears a little obscured against this final shot and isn’teasy to read.

2

In the timeline, select the subtitle, and in the Inspector, click the Track tab.

3

Scroll down to the Background options and enable the Background settings.

Styling Subtitles451

A semi-transparent box appears around the subtitle’s text, helping it stand out fromthe similarly light video background.

Because these changes have been made in the Track tab, all the subtitles in this track
are updated with the change. This behavior is particularly useful when you need tomodify style settings for all the subtitles in a track.
You can, however, override those track-wide settings for any individual subtitle when
you need to adjust the color, font, or position of one or more subtitles, but not all.
4452

In the timeline, move the playhead to the first subtitle.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

This subtitle indicates a sound effect rather than detailing spoken dialogue. As such,the director would like to use a different style to differentiate it from captions
for dialogue.
5

In the timeline, select the subtitle, and in the Inspector, select the Caption tab.

6

Check the Customize Caption box to reveal an additional set of controls for this caption
in the Caption tab.

7

Change the Font Face setting to Semibold Italic to distinguish this caption from theother captions.

The subtitle updates to reflect the change in style, but the other subtitles in the track
do not change.

Styling Subtitles

453

You can add multiple subtitle tracks, which is particularly useful when you need tosupply subtitles in more than one language.
8

In the edit page, right-click any one of the timeline track headers and choose Add
Subtitle Track to add an additional subtitle track to the timeline.

9

With the Subtitles bin selected in the media pool, choose File > Import > Subtitle.

10 From the R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 10/Subtitles, select the SYNC SUBTITLES FR.ttml
file and click Open to add this subtitle to the media pool.

11 Edit this new subtitle file into the empty subtitle track you just created, starting at the
beginning of the timeline.

This subtitle file includes French subtitles. You can rename subtitle tracks to reflect thelanguage used, making it easier to identify the different tracks.

454

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

12 Click the Subtitle 1 track name, and type en_US to identify this subtitle as English for
a US audience.
13 Click the Subtitle 2 track name, and type fr_FR to identify this subtitle as French fora French audience.

TIP To choose the subtitle track visible in the timeline viewer, in the head of the
track you wish to view, click the eye icon. You can display only one subtitle trackat a time.

Using Subtitle Regions
Instead of customizing individual subtitles, you can set subtitle regions. Eachsubtitle track can have up to four regions, with each region having its own style.
Moving a subtitle from one region to another instantly updates the subtitle to that
region’s settings.
To create a new region, right-click anywhere along the subtitle track and choose
Add Subtitle Region. Move subtitles into the region by dragging them up or downin the subtitle track.
Subtitle regions are supported only by .ttml and .dfxp subtitle files. Make sure
those file types are supported by your destination of choice before submitting
your video file with subtitles.

Exporting with Subtitles
When it comes to delivering subtitles with your finished program, several options areopen to you. Depending on your delivery format, you can include subtitles as burned-ingraphics, embedded text in a supported media file, or as a separate file.
In this next exercise, you’ll output a file for delivery, together with the necessary separate
subtitle files.

Exporting with Subtitles

455

1

Click the Deliver page button and choose the Custom preset.

2

Set the render to “Single clip” to export a single movie file.

3

In the File Name field, type SYNC SCENE MASTER.

4

Click the location Browse button and navigate to the R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 09/
Output folder. Create a new folder called Sync Scene and click OK.

5

Back in the Render Settings panel, set the Format dropdown menu to MXF OP1A, theCodec to DNxHD, and the Type to 720p 100/85/55/45 8-bit.

6

At the bottom of the Video tab, expand the option for Subtitle Settings, and choose
Export Subtitle.

7

Set the Format option to “As a separate file.”
If you chose the “Burn into video” option, Resolve would burn the currently active
subtitles (with their styles) into the final rendered video file, so the subtitles would bepermanently included as part of the video content. Choosing “As embedded captions”
will output the currently active subtitle track as an embedded metadata layer withinthose media formats that support it. Currently, DaVinci Resolve supports CEA608 andtext captions within MXF OP1A and QuickTime containers.

456

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

8

In the Export As dropdown menu, choose “SRT” and select both the “en_US” and“fr_FR” subtitle tracks to include them in the export.

This takes care of the video and file settings. Next, you’ll choose which audio tracks to
output as part of this master file.

Exporting Audio Tracks
You will remember from the previous chapter that this scene contains three different
mixes: a stereo mix, M&E (music and effects), and a 5.1 mix, together with three buses
for dialogue, effects, and music only. In the Render Settings, you can choose to output
different combinations of audio tracks and buses. Doing so makes it incredibly easy toexport a final movie with stereo, surround, and an M&E mix for international dubbing, orjust the 5.1 mix.
1

In the Render Settings, click the Audio tab.

2

Leave the audio codec set to Linear PCM (this is also referred to as uncompressed,
or lossless, audio) and leave the sample rate and bit depth settings as they are.

TIP Project sample rates default to 48 kHz but can be set in Project
Settings > Fairlight.

Exporting Audio Tracks

457

3

From the Output Track 1 dropdown menu, ensure that the STEREO MAIN (Stereo) bus
is selected.

4

Click the + (plus) button to the right of the Output Track 1 menu to add a second
output track.

5

From the Output Track 2 menu, choose the M&E (Stereo) bus to add this bus as thesecond output track.

This will export the MXF file with two stereo tracks: the first for the full stereo mix;
the second for the M&E mix, which does not contain the dialogue audio of thesoundtrack—just the music and effects elements. It is the second track that can beused when reversioning the film for a different language.
6

Click Add to Render Queue.
If you need to use the same settings for more than one export, consider saving therender settings as a preset.

458

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

7

Click the Render Settings options menu and choose Save As New Preset.

8

Name your preset MXF DNxHD 720P and click OK.

The new preset appears at the top of the Render Settings panel.

Exporting Audio Tracks

459

Delivering AS-11 and Other File Formats
The DaVinci Resolve IO Plug-In SDK enables third-party developers to create anddistribute plug-in packs that extend the range of codec and format options thatcan be rendered directly from DaVinci Resolve Studio.
An example of this is the MainConcept Codec Plug-In for DaVinci Resolve Studio.
Once installed, this plug-in adds additional MainConcept MXF and MP4 format
options, including a specific option to deliver directly to AS-11 DPP.
More information on this plug-in is available at https://www.mainconcept.com/
products/plugins/blackmagic-design-plugins/bmd.html.

Changing and Rendering
Jobs from Multiple Projects
The Render Queue can show jobs from the current project or from all projects in yourdatabase. If you split longer projects into reels, or you are working on different projects forthe same client, you might need to access all the jobs in the queue instead of waiting for
one batch to render before outputting other projects.
1

460

In the Render Queue options menu, choose Show All Projects.

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Any jobs added to the Render Queue in any project in the current project library aredisplayed for you to select and render.

2

In the Render Queue options menu, choose Show Job Details.

Changing and Rendering Jobs from Multiple Projects

461

The specific settings for each job are displayed, including resolutions, codec, andframe rate.

Even after you add jobs to the Render Queue, you can update their settings or remove
them from the queue entirely.

462

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

3

In the Render Queue, click the pencil icon for Job 1. If prompted, save thecurrent project.

The OMO PROMO DELIVERY project reopens automatically, and the current rendersettings for the selected job become available.
Now you can make any changes to the job before rendering out the final file.
4

In the Video tab, change the Format to MP4 instead of QuickTime.

5

Click Update Job at the bottom of the Render Settings panel.

Changing and Rendering Jobs from Multiple Projects

463

The change updates the original job settings with the new setting as reflected in thedisplayed job details in the Render Queue. In this case, you can see the file extension
change from .mov to .mp4.

TIP To delete a job, click the “X” in the upper-right corner of the job in the
Render Queue.

464

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

6Finally, click in an empty area of the Render Queue panel to deselect Job 1, and thenclick the Render All button to create the output files.

Changing and Rendering Jobs from Multiple Projects

465

DaVinci Resolve renders each of the jobs in the Render Queue.

NOTE Resolve will render a total of four jobs from this Render Queue because
the AAF contains two separate renders: one for the audio clips and one for thevideo reference file.

Once all the files have been rendered, you can choose to open the Output Folder on
your system and verify the files you’ve created.

466

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

7

Right-click any of the completed jobs and choose Reveal in Finder (macOS) or Open File
Location (Windows).

NOTE While you can often open and view many files to check their integrity(such as MP4 files, for example), the only true test of the success of creating thefile(s) (such as with the AAF for Pro Tools) is to open them back into Resolve.

Utilizing the correct render settings is vital to delivering an aesthetically correct andtechnically functional video project. Understanding these settings has even greater
benefits. It elevates your skill set as an editor and imbues confidence that your projects aredelivered at their optimal quality and adhere to industry standards.

Media Managing Timelines
A final step in the delivery options for your projects is to manage the source media files foryour projects for easy archiving.
1

If necessary, press Shift-1 to open the Project Manager and double-click
SYNC SCENE DELIVERY to reopen the Sync Scene project.

TIP You can enable Dynamic Project Switching by right-clicking in an empty
area of the Project Manager to allow you to quickly switch between projects
without having to close the current project.

Media Managing Timelines

467

2

Choose File > Media Management to open the Media Management window.

Media Management allows you to copy or transcode the media for the entire project,specific timelines, or specified clips.
3

Select the Timelines tab.

4

Next to the Destination field, click Browse.

5

Navigate to the R18 Editors Guide/Lesson 10/Output Folder and create a new folder
called Archive. Click Open.

6

In the Media Management window, select the SYNC SCENE FINAL timeline.

7

In the Copy tab, make sure the “Used media and trim keeping 24 frame handles”
option is selected.
This option means the media files being copied will only be the parts of those files
actually used in the selected timeline, plus an additional 24 frames before the In point
and after the Out point, just in case a small tweak is ever needed.

468

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

8Uncheck the “Use project name subfolder” option.

At the bottom of the Media Management window, the current size indicator displays
the total storage size of all the media currently in this project (including unused clips).
The new size indicator shows the amount of storage the trimmed media will use. In thiscase, you can see that the copied media will only require about a third of the storage ofthe full project.

Media Managing Timelines

469

9

Click Start to begin the media management process.

10 Once complete, open the Archive folder to find the copied media and a .drt file.
This is the folder that you can now archive separately. To restore the edit from this archived
material, simply create a new project and choose File > Import > Timeline and import the.drt file. The imported timeline will automatically relink to the trimmed media.

470

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

Lesson Review
1

True or false? You must use the deliver page in order to export a video file fromyour project.

2

Which function uses the DaVinci Resolve Neural Engine to automatically add keyframes
to keep the subject of a clip in frame when reformatting a timeline to a different
aspect ratio?
a) Auto Conformb) Smart Reframec) Smart Conform

3

What format is commonly used when sending audio to be mixed on a Pro
Tools system?
a) AAFb) XMLc) EDL

4

Which window enables you to add a Burned-in Timecode (BiTC) to yourexported video?
a) Timecode Windowb) Data Burn-Inc) Text+

5

True or false? All subtitles must be imported from a supported .srt file.

Lesson Review

471

Answers
1

False. You can use the Quick Export option, where available.

2b) Smart Reframe.

3a) AAF (Advanced Authoring Format)

4b) Data Burn-In

5

False. Subtitles can be manually created inside DaVinci Resolve using the Subtitle title
in the Effects Library, or imported from a .srt, .vtt, .ttml, or .dfxp file.

472

Lesson 9

Delivering Projects

IndexNumbers

atmos audio clips, 115, 138–139

1:1 aspect ratio, 429

atmosphere, adding, 386–392

3D Keyer FX, 325–333

audio. See also mixing audio; music levels;
synced audio

80/20 rule, rough cut, 531080 x 1080 HD Square option, 427

changing speed, 372

1920 x 1080 HD timeline
resolution, 226–227

diegetic versus non-diegetic, 366–367

Symbols

internal versus external, 366–367‘ (apostrophe), Last Frame
command, 43–44

playing out of speakers, 122

filling in gaps, 115
multicam clip, 207, (comma), selected edits, 129–130

Project Manager, 225. (period), trimming edits, 129–130

removing, 85–86/ (forward slash)syncing to video, 246–252

playing around edits, 126
previewing clips, 72, 75, 79, 128

tidying up, 167–168
waveforms, 123` (grave accent), viewer overlay, 96

audio and video, destination controls, 79Aaudio channels

AAF (Advanced Authoring Format),exporting for Pro Tools, 441–444
account for Blackmagic Cloud ID,
registering for, 3alpha channel, 306
Alpha Highlight, 331
Alpha Matte Shrink and Grow filter, 327
Alpha versus Lum, 306
Alt key. See keyboard shortcuts
apostrophe (‘), Last Frame
command, 43–44
Append at End edits, 30, 33
applause clip, 385
AS-11 file format, 460
aspect ratios, timelines, 424–429
At End edits, appending, 28–29. See also
edit page

displaying, 14
modifying in clip attributes, 250–252
audio editing and mixing. See also
subframe audio editing
adding atmosphere, 386–392
balancing dialogue clips, 373–379
buses for mixes, 408–418
mixing in mixer, 407
panning tracks in acoustic
space, 382–385
project preparation, 364–365
radio effects, 393–399
replacing lines from takes, 367–372
scene enhancement, 380–382
simplifying mixes, 399–406
starting, 366–367

Index

473

audio levels
changing, 50, 376

caching speed changes, 320

normalizing, 376–379

Caption field, adding subtitle to, 446

audio mixing, 80–88

certification program, xi, xiii

audio scrubbing, 13, 15, 125, 198. See also
sound bites

Cinema Viewer, 107

audio track layers
changing order, 371
showing, 368
using, 372
Audio Track mode, 14
audio tracks
adding music, 49
exporting, 457–459
sample rates, 457
automatic Smart Bins, 262–264. See also
bins; Power Bins; Smart Bins

B

clip attribute, modifying audio channels
in, 250–252
Clip Attributes window, 247–248
clip duration, changing, 144
clip resolution. See proxy files
clip speed, changing, 104
clips. See also compound clips; edits;
Join Clips command; Overwrite Clip
button; Recent Clips dropdown menu;
SOT (sound on tape) clips; subclips;
takes; timeline clips
adding frames, 171
adding to tracks, 39
analyzing for people, 264–270
atmos, 115

backtiming edits, 43–48
backward playback, J key, 18
Bézier Curve, 317, 434
Bin List, Edit page, 10
bin lists, 225
bins. See also automatic Smart Bins;
Power Bins; Smart Bins
deselecting, 250
metadata, 260
using with timelines, 56
Blackmagic Cloud, xiv, 3Blade Edit mode, 124
blue-screen footage, working
with, 325–333
B-roll, adding, 31–43
Bus Assign window, 404
Bus control strips, changing order, 404
buses
for alternative mixes, 408–418
creating, 399–406
monitoring, 412–418

474

C

Index

clicking and selecting, 93
color coding for rendering, 324
copying, 138, 355
cutting, 125
determining lengths of, 19
going offline, 8
inserting, 190
naming convention, 151
navigating, 24, 128
overwriting, 22
playing, 14, 16
previewing, 72, 75, 79
renaming with metadata, 270–275
replacing, 67–79
replacing parts of, 73–77
resetting custom names, 275
ripple deleting, 126
selecting forward, 34
showing file names, 20
synchronizing, 187
wildtrack, 115
Clips Speed pop-up menu, 312

closing titles, adding, 96–102

media managing timelines, 467–470

CLOSING TITLES timeline,
importing, 139–140

preparation, 422–424

cloud-based project library, setting up, 3

reframing shots, 430–434

reformatting for aspect ratios, 424–429

codec plug-in, 460
colored markers, filtering, 118
comma (,), selected edits, 129–130
Command key. See keyboard shortcuts
composited images, resizing, 308–309
compositing using traveling
mattes, 298–309
compound clips. See also clips
creating, 302–303

Smart Reframe, 435–438
Design Training and Certification Program, xi
despill, adjusting, 332–333
destination tracks, specifying, 77–79
Detail Zoom, 23, 58.dfxp subtitle files, 448
dialoguebalancing, 373–379
cutting, 162

decomposing on edit, 136–138

starting and stopping, 150, 152

continuity editing, 147, 152–162.
See also editing

Dialogue Leveler, 379

control points, adjusting, 313

diegetic audio, 366–367

Copy command, 355

downloading DaVinci Resolve, xii

copying

DPX digital film format, 440

clips, 138

dramatic scenes. See also scenes

and pasting EQ, 397

comparing takes, 162–166

timecode, 76

dynamic trimming, 173–176

transitions, 106

editing for continuity, 152–162

Ctrl key. See keyboard shortcuts

filling “dead air,” 178–180

Curve Editor, Video Collage filter, 359–360

separate takes, 148–151

Custom Zoom, 23

split edits, 169–173

cuts, navigating in clips, 128

tidying up audio, 167–168
Drop shadow filter, 92

D
Data Burn-In window, 443
data levels, 440
DaVinci Resolve, downloading, xii
DaVinci Resolve IO Plug-In SDK, 460
dB and kHz controls, 396“dead air,” filling, 178–180
deleting In points and Out points, 45
Deliver page presets, customizing, 438–440.
See also Quick Exportdelivering projects. See also project
organization; subtitles
changing and rendering jobs, 460–467
exporting AAF for Pro Tools, 441–444
exporting audio tracks, 457–459

Dropbox Replay video review service, 108.drp file extension, 6–7.drt file extension, 120
ducking music levels, 88–89
Dynamic Project Switching, enabling, 467.
See also projects
dynamic trimming, 173–177.
See also trimming
Dynamic Zoom, 94–95

E
Ease Out and Ease In, Bézier curves, 434
edit page. See also At End edits; Insert
edits; three-point editing
3D Keyer FX, 325–334

Index

475

creating tiles, 339–361

extend edit, 170–173. See also edits

freeze frames, 318–325

Eyedropper tool, 328–329

jumping to, 444Fnonlinear editing, 2
project setup, 296–297
Transform FX, 334–339

file names, showing for clips, 20

traveling mattes forcompositing, 298–309

filters, controls in edit page, 349

variable speed changes, 309–318

Find Current Timeline command, 55
Fit to Fill edit, 300–301

Video Collage, 339–361
workspace, 8edit points
adding, 125ripple trimming, 64–65
selecting, 128
editing. See also continuity editing;four-point edit
for continuity, 152–162
multicam music video, 197–203
multicamera interview, 184–191
process, 2
between timelines, 132–139
editor’s art, 57
edits. See also clips; extend edit;
Replace edits; rolling edits; slide edits;
split edits; through edits
backtiming, 43–48
playing around, 126

Flatten Audio Track Layers, 372
flattening multicam clips, 196
folders, selecting in project libraries, 5.
See also watch folders
foley, 386
forward playback, L key, 18
forward slash (/)
playing around edits, 126
previewing clips, 72, 75, 79, 128
four-point edit, 155. See also editing
fps (frames per second), 226–227
frame rates, changing, 234
Frame.io video review service, 108
frames. See also freeze frames; Match
Frame button; Smart Reframe featureadding to clips, 171
marking durations, 44

Effects Inspector, 331

freeze frames, creating, 318–324.
See also frames

Effects Library, 92

Full Extent Zoom, 23–24, 119

Titles category, 96
Titles group, 445
Video Transitions, 118
Elastic Wave function, Fairlight page, 372

full screen review, 106–107
Fusion Titles, live previewing, 96

G

EQ, copying and pasting, 397

gaps, moving to, 138

Equalizer controls, 394–395

garbage mattes, 334

exporting. See also Quick Export

Gaussian Blur filter, 348–349

AAF to Pro Tools, 441–444

gradient controls, 100–101

audio tracks, 457–459

graphic file formats, 91

metadata and bins, 260
MXF files, 458
with subtitles, 455–457

476

Fade handles, 390

Indexgrave accent (`), viewer overlay, 96
green-screen footage, working
with, 325–333

H

dynamic trimming, 174–175

H.264 Master preset, 110

jogging playhead, 125

HSL Keyer, 327
HSL values, selecting, 332

using, 107
jobs. See also projects
changing and rendering, 460–467

I
images, corner pinning, 334–339
importing
CLOSING TITLES timeline, 139–140
media files, 230–234
projects, 6–7“selects” timeline, 120
subtitle files, 448
and using metadata, 257–279
In points. See also three-point editing
adding, 16, 18, 24, 44
adding to frames, 127removing, 45
Index window, Markers tab, 117
Insert Clip button, 33, 190
Insert edits, 25–27. See also edit page
Inspector
field values, 99
opening, 93
Upper Text Controls, 98–99
interview bin, contents of, 12interviews. See also multicamera interview
editing between timelines, 132–139
importing “selects” timeline, 119–121
painting, 36–43
project setup, 114–116
radio edit, 128–131
Smooth Cut transition, 117–119
stacked timelines, 139–144
timelines, 122–127

J

deleting, 464
Join Clips command, 124. See also clips

K
K key, stopping playback, 18, 125, 169
Key filters, 327
keyboard settings, configuring, 22
keyboard shortcuts. See also JKL keys
Append to End of Timeline, 33
audio scrubbing, 15, 198
Cinema Viewer, 107
clip duration, 144
Copy command, 76, 106, 138, 355
cutting clips, 125.drt files, 120
edit points, 128
gaps, 138
inserting clips, 190
Keyframe Editor, 436
keyframes, 84
Linked Selection feature, 194
markers, 367
Match Frame to Source clip, 75
multicam clips, 193
Out points, 16, 18, 24, 45
Overwrite Clip, 22, 154
Paste command, 138, 355
Place on Top edit, 39–42, 45
In points, 16, 18, 24, 45
positioning playhead, 128
Preferences, 252previewing clips, 72, 75, 79

J key, backward playback, 18, 107

Project Manager, 444

J-cut, 169

Project Settings, 225–227

JKL keys. See also keyboard shortcuts

Replace edits, 74, 77

controlling playback, 18

Retime Controls, 311

Index

477

keyboard shortcuts (continued)
ripple deleting, 191
ripple deleting clips, 126–127
Selection mode, 130
selections, 129, 176snapping, 66
source audio destination, 77
source viewers and timelines, 25, 27, 134
timeline snapping, 36
timelines, 11
timelines and source viewers, 25, 27, 134
trimming, 129–130
Undo command, 155
video edits, 175
video source, 79
zooming timeline, 23
Keyframe Editor, hiding, 436
keyframes
adding, 84, 86, 89
jumping to, 434
using to remove audio, 85–86
keying filters, 332

M & E (music and effects) soundtrack,
408–418, 458
MainConcept Codec Plug-In, 460
markers
adding to timelines, 115
jumping between, 134
jumping to, 367
Markers Index, filtering coloredmarkers, 118
Master Settings, Project Settings, 226
Match Frame button, 75. See also frames
Matte Finesse controls, 331
mattes. See garbage mattes;
traveling mattes
media files
importing, 230–234
relinking, 8–10, 197
media managing timelines, 467–470.
See also timelines
media page, 224
media pool, 225, 243–245
edit page, 10
importing data to, 257

kHz and dB controls, 396

media storage browser, 225

Lmedia storage locations, 225

L key, forward playback, 18, 21,107, 125, 169

metadata. See also project organization

L-cut, 169lesson files, copying, xiii
Line Color controls, 100lines from takes, replacing, 367–372
Linked Selection feature, 194
List View, 233
Live Preview, disabling and enabling, 231
local project library, working in, 3
Locate button, using with media files, 9logo, adding, 90–96

478

M

media storage settings, 245
analyzing clips for people, 264–270
automatic Smart Bins, 262–264
custom Smart Bins, 275–281
default settings, 225
exporting, 260
importing and using, 257–259
renaming clips with, 270–275
searching using, 260–262
variables, 270
metadata fields, navigating, 277
metadata presets, configuring, 252–256

Lum versus Alpha, 306

Mixer, mixing with, 80, 407

Luma Keyer, 327

mixes, simplifying, 399–406

Indexmixing audio, considering, 366.
See also audio
Mono setting, 122

Option key. See keyboard shortcuts
Out points. See also three-point editing
adding, 16, 18, 24, 44

motion estimation, changing, 320–322

adding to frames, 127

MP4 format, 463

jumping to, 43

multicam angles, switching, 192–197
multicam clips
adjusting, 214–220

removing, 45
Overlay composite mode, 338

creating, 200–203

Overwrite Clip button, 22, 91, 154.
See also clips

finessing and flattening, 194–197

Overwrite edit overlay, 17

identifying, 188

Pmaximum number of angles, 219
viewing and trimming, 188–191
multicam music video, editing, 197–203
multicamera editing
adjusting, 210–213
cuts at playhead position, 212
real-time, 203–210
Speed Editor, 213
sync between angles, 211
techniques, 210
multicamera interview, editing, 184–191.
See also interviews
multicamera music video, editing, 197–203
music, adding, 48–50
music levels, “ducking,” 88–89.
See also audio
Mute button, 81, 365
muting and unmuting tracks, 407
MXF files, exporting, 458

N
NLE (nonlinear editor), 57
nonlinear editing, 2Normalization Mode Sample Peak
Program, 123
Normalize Audio Level window, 82–83
normalizing audio levels, 376–379

O

painting interviews, 36–43
pan, reviewing, 433
panningaround clips, 332
tracks in acoustic space, 382–385
Paste command, 138, 355
People Metadata, Smart Bins for, 264–270
period (.), trimming edits, 129–130
piano recording, 387
Pins, Transform filter, 339
Place on Top edit, 39–42, 45
playback
halting, 14
halting, controlling, 18
stopping, 18
playheadjogging back and forth, 125
positioning, 128
repositioning, 15–16
returning to start of clips, 13, 15
playing clips, 14
plug-in packs, creating anddistributing, 460
Position X parameter, Transform
section, 431–433
Power Bins, 290–292. See also automatic
Smart Bins; bins; Smart Bins
preferences, choosing, 11, 252–253

Opacity slider, 339

presets, saving, 228

opening projects, 7preview marks, showing, 154

Index

479

previewing clips, 72, 79

R

Pro Tools, exporting AAF for, 441–444

radio edits

project libraries
accessing, 3adding, 4–6
selecting folders in, 5
Project Manager
creating projects, 224–225
opening, 2, 444
project organization. See also delivering
projects; metadata
importing media, 230–234
metadata presets, 252–256
Power Bins, 290–292
proxy files, 234–245
subclips, 281–289
syncing audio to video, 246–252
project presets, saving, 227–229
Project Settings, 225–227
projects. See also Dynamic Project
Switching; jobs
creating, 224–229
dramatic scenes, 148–151
edit page effects, 296–297
editing and mixing audio, 364–365
fine cutting interview, 114–116
opening, 7
preparing for delivery, 422–424
refining rough cut, 54
rough cut, 2–8
settings, 224–229
timeline resolution, 226
proxy files, generating, 234–245
proxy media, generating from media
pool, 243–245

480

completing, 131features, 116
refining, 128–131
radio effects, creating, 393–399
reaction shot, backtiming, 161
Rec.709 video standard, 440
Recent Clips dropdown menu, 150.
See also clips
reframing shots, 435–438
registering for Blackmagic Cloud ID, 3
Relink Media feature, 8–9, 197
Render Cache format settings, 322
Render in Place, 323–324
Render Queue, adding jobs to, 444, 460–462
render settings, Deliver page, 438
Render Settings, 438–439, 459
rendering jobs, 460–467
Replace edits, 71–74, 77. See also edits
replacing clips, 67–79
resizing
composited images, 308–309
content for Video Collage, 345–347
Smart Bins area, 32
thumbnails, 12
resolution. See Timeline Resolution
dropdown menu
retime controls, displaying, 311
retime curve, adjusting, 315–318
retime processing, changing, 320–322
Reverb FX controls, 392
ripple deleting clips, 126, 191
Ripple Overwrite option, 155–157

Qripple trimming edit points, 64–65.
See also trimming

Q key, switching to source
viewer, 24–25, 27

rough cutrolling edits, 63–64. See also edits

Quick Export, 108–110. See also Deliver
page presets; exporting

80/20 rule, 53

QuickTime format, 463

adding logos, 90–96

Indexadding closing titles, 96–102

adding music, 48–50

setting default preset, 227–229

audio mixing, 80–88

Shading Gradient, 100

backtiming edits, 43–48

Shift key. See keyboard shortcuts

B-roll, 31–36

shooting ratio, 19

controlling playback, 18

shots“ducking” music levels, 88–89

matching, 62

duplicating timeline, 55–56

reframing, 430–438

Edit page, 10

stabilizing, 103

editor’s art, 57

Show Paths, 328

full screen review, 106–107

slide edits, 66–67. See also edits

last-minute changes, 102–106

Smart Bins. See also automatic Smart Bins;
bins; Power Bins

pacing sound bites, 31–36
painting interviews, 36–43
project setup, 2–8, 54
Quick Export, 108–110
relinking media files, 8–10
replacing clips, 67–79
ripple trimming edit points, 64–65
rolling edits, 63–64
slide edits, 66–67
sound bites, 11–17, 24–29
subclips, 19–22
three-point editing, 30
timeline zoom and scroll, 23
trimming timeline clips, 58–62

S
Safe Area, using, 98, 102
Sample Peak Program,Normalization Mode, 123
sample rates, audio tracks, 457
scenes, enhancing, 380–382. See also
dramatic scenes
scroll and zoom, timelines, 23
scroll wheel, 332
scrubbing audio, 13, 15, 125, 198
searching using metadata, 260–262
Selection mode, 57, 63–64, 124, 130, 196
selections, toggling between, 129, 176

customizing, 275–280
making available, 280
Match options, 281
organizing, 279
resizing, 32
Smart Reframe feature, 435–438.
See also frames
Smart Show Paths, 328
smooth cut transition, 117–119. See alsotransitions
snapping
disabling, 66
enabling, 381
enabling in timeline, 178
SOT (sound on tape) clips, setting levels of,
87–88. See also clips
sound bites. See also audio scrubbing
adding, 24–29
assembling, 11–17
locating, 14
pacing, 31–35
source audio, destination control, 77
source media files, managing, 467–470
Source Timecode, timeline viewer, 68, 71
source viewers
edit page, 10
switching between timelines, 24, 134“selects” timeline, importing, 119–121.
See also timelines

Spacebar, pressing to play clips, 16

Set Level, Normalize Audio Level, 83

Speed Change controls, 104, 372

speakers, setting up for audio, 122

Index

481

speed changes
caching, 320
making, 309
Speed Editor, multicam editing, 213
speed points, adding to clips, 311–314, 319
Speed Warp setting, 322
spill, removing from green screen, 332–333
split edits, utilizing, 169–173. See also edits.srt subtitle files, 448–449
stabilizing shots, 103

three-point editing, 30, 38. See also edit
page; In points; Out points
through edits. See also edits
adding, 125
identifying and removing, 124
thumbnails, resizing, 12
tiles
attributes, 355–361
creating with Video Collage, 350–361
size of, 353

stacked timelines, 139–144.
See also timelines

tiles controls, Video Collage filter, 341–344

stereo audio track, adding, 388

timecode, copying, 76

stereo buses, creating, 400

timecode field, source timecode, 68

Stop button, halting playback, 14

timeline clips, trimming, 58–62. See also clips

stopping playback, 18

Timeline Resolution dropdown menu, 427

subclips. See also clips

Timeline Settings window, 426

adjusting limits, 289

Timeline Sort Order pop-up menu, 297

creating, 281–289

timeline tabs, dragging, 141

modifying metadata, 287–289

Timeline Toolbar, Edit page, 10

working with, 18–22

timeline toolbar, Markers, 115

subframe audio editing, 131. See also audio
editing and mixing
subtitle files, importing, 448
subtitle regions, 455
subtitle tracks, showing and hiding, 446
subtitles. See also delivering projects
adding, 444–448
adjusting, 450
exporting with, 455–457
importing, 448–449
styling, 451–455
synced audio, verifying, 249. See also audio

482

working with, 148–151

Timeline Viewer
Edit page, 10
Source Timecode, 68
timelines. See also media managing
timelines; “selects” timeline;
stacked timelines
adding markers, 115
aspect ratios, 424–429
disabling, 56
duplicating, 55–56
Edit page, 10
editing between, 132–139

system requirements, xii

Find Current Timeline command, 55

Tresolution, 226

keyboard shortcuts, 11

Take Selector, activating, 164–166

settings, 226

takes. See also clips

snapping, 178

comparing, 162–166

snapping function, 36

removing from timeline, 372

swapping with Source Viewer, 134

replacing lines from, 367–372

switching between source viewers, 24

using alternates, 158–162

using bins with, 56

Index

workflow, 121–127

video and audio, destination controls, 79

zoom and scroll, 23

Video button, 208

title safe areas, 99

Video Collage filter

Titles category, Effects Library, 96, 445

Create Background, 339–341

track heights, adjusting, 123

creating tiles, 350–361

track levels, setting, 398–399

Curve Editor, 359–360

tracksdeselecting clips, 356

assigning to buses, 404–406

reordering effects, 347–349

creating for traveling mattes, 298–301

resizing content, 345–347

muting and unmuting, 407

setting layout, 341–344

name lengths, 402

stacking effects, 347–349

panning in acoustic space, 382–385
removing from buses, 406
repositioning in timeline, 380
Transform filter, Pins, 339
Transform FX, 334–339
Transform overlays, displaying, 430transitions. See also smooth cut transition
adding, 105–106

tiles controls, 341–344
video edits, selecting, 175
video review services, 108
video source, targeting, 79
Video Transitions, Effects Library, 118
viewer, Project Manager, 225
viewer overlay
revealing controls in, 95

trimming, 119
traveling mattes
adding, 304–307
compositing using, 298–309
Trim Edit mode, 57, 60, 63–64
Trim mode, 128
trimming. See also dynamic trimming;ripple trimming edit points
editor’s art, 57
selected edits, 129
timeline clips, 58–62
transitions, 119

turning off, 96
volume, increasing precision, 375
volume bar, using, 84–85
volume overlay, adjusting, 50

Wwatch folders, 236. See also folders
waveforms, audio, 123, 128
wildtrack audio clips, 115
wind noise, 40
workflow, applying to timelines, 121.ttml (IMSC1) subtitle files, 448

WTTP (“Welcome to the Pantry”)
timeline, 122UY“Umm,” identifying in waveform, 123–124

Y position value, changing, 101

Undo command, 155

YCbC4 formats, 440

Upper Text Controls, Inspector, 98–99

YouTube option, selecting, 108

User Preferences, 11, 252–253

ZV

zoom and scroll, timelines, 23

variable speed changes, making, 309–318

zooming in, 332

video, syncing audio to, 246–252

zooming timeline. See Full Extent Zoom

Index

483

The Editor’s Guide to

DaVinci
Resolve 18
The Editor’s Guide to DaVinci Resolve 18 is a step by step training
guide tailored to the art and craft of editing. Using a project based
approach, focusing on the edit page, the hands on lessons
demonstrate how to cut interviews, dramatic scenes, documentarymaterial and music videos. Specific lessons also show how you
can build eye catching effects using the new 3D keyer and video
collage plug-ins, create variable speed effects, simplify complex
audio mixes, and deliver your final film, whether for online
distribution, broadcast television or streaming services.

Master Editing Techniques

What You’ll Learn• Apply advanced editing and trimming techniques for multiple
genres as used by professional editors around the world• Generate and manage proxy media with the Blackmagic Proxy Generator• Perform variable speed changes to enhance action

Multicam Editing in Real Time

• Use trimming tricks and real time dynamic trimming• Apply multi camera syncing and editing techniques• Organize large projects efficiently using metadata and smart bins
• Build complex composites on the edit page
• Use keyframes to create sophisticated animations• Edit and mix audio for stereo and surround soundTips for Audio Editing and Mixing• Create, import and edit subtitles for different languages• Deliver projects for online distribution, broadcast televisionand streaming services• Discover dozens of tips and tricks throughout the book thatwill transform how you work!

Who This Book is For
This book is designed for both beginners and professionals. Beginners willfind clear and concise lessons to get you up and running quickly. If you’rea professional switching from another system, you’ll find lessons that cover
everything from basic editing and trimming to working with audio, adding
text, effects and more. Plus, you’ll discover dozens of pro tips and tricks
that will help make you a master at editing with DaVinci Resolve!

Build Eye Catching Effects